Labview Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices Course Manual

LabVIEW Intermediate I: TM
Successful Development
Practices Course Manual
Course Software Version 8.6
October 2008 Edition
Part Number 323756D-01
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual
Copyright
© 2004–2008 National Instruments Corporation. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, storing in an information retrieval system, or translating, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent
of National Instruments Corporation.
National Instruments respects the intellectual property of others, and we ask our users to do the same. NI software is protected by
copyright and other intellectual property laws. Where NI software may be used to reproduce software or other materials belonging to
others, you may use NI software only to reproduce materials that you may reproduce in accordance with the terms of any applicable
license or other legal restriction.
The following notices relate to certain components used in USI (Xerces C++, ICU, HDF5, Citadel 5, b64 library, and Stingray). For a
listing of the conditions and disclaimers regarding these components, refer to the USICopyrights.chm.
Xerces C++. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
ICU. Copyright 1995–2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved.
HDF5. NCSA HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format 5) Software Library and Utilities
Copyright 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003 by the Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois. All rights reserved.
Citadel 5. In regards to components that use Citadel 5, the following copyright applies. Copyright © 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company.
b64 library. Copyright © 2004–2006, Matthew Wilson and Synesis Software. All Rights Reserved.
Stingray. This software includes Stingray software developed by the Rogue Wave Software division of Quovadx, Inc.
Copyright 1995–2006, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks
National Instruments, NI, ni.com, and LabVIEW are trademarks of National Instruments Corporation. Refer to the Terms of Use section
on ni.com/legal for more information about National Instruments trademarks.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies.
Members of the National Instruments Alliance Partner Program are business entities independent from National Instruments and have
no agency, partnership, or joint-venture relationship with National Instruments.
Patents
For patents covering National Instruments products/technology, refer to the appropriate location: Help»Patents in your software,
the patents.txt file on your media, or the National Instruments Patent Notice at ni.com/legal/patents.
Worldwide Technical Support and Product Information
ni.com
National Instruments Corporate Headquarters

11500 North Mopac Expressway Austin, Texas 78759-3504 USA Tel: 512 683 0100
Worldwide Offices
Australia 1800 300 800, Austria 43 662 457990-0, Belgium 32 (0) 2 757 0020, Brazil 55 11 3262 3599, Canada 800 433 3488,
China 86 21 5050 9800, Czech Republic 420 224 235 774, Denmark 45 45 76 26 00, Finland 358 (0) 9 725 72511,
France 01 57 66 24 24, Germany 49 89 7413130, India 91 80 41190000, Israel 972 3 6393737, Italy 39 02 41309277,
Japan 0120-527196, Korea 82 02 3451 3400, Lebanon 961 (0) 1 33 28 28, Malaysia 1800 887710, Mexico 01 800 010 0793,
Netherlands 31 (0) 348 433 466, New Zealand 0800 553 322, Norway 47 (0) 66 90 76 60, Poland 48 22 3390150,
Portugal 351 210 311 210, Russia 7 495 783 6851, Singapore 1800 226 5886, Slovenia 386 3 425 42 00,
South Africa 27 0 11 805 8197, Spain 34 91 640 0085, Sweden 46 (0) 8 587 895 00, Switzerland 41 56 2005151,
Taiwan 886 02 2377 2222, Thailand 662 278 6777, Turkey 90 212 279 3031, United Kingdom 44 (0) 1635 523545
For further support information, refer to the Additional Information and Resources appendix. To comment on National Instruments
documentation, refer to the National Instruments Web site at ni.com/info and enter the info code feedback.
Contents
Student Guide
A. NI Certification .....................................................................................................vii
B. Course Description ...............................................................................................viii
C. What You Need to Get Started .............................................................................viii
D. Installing the Course Software..............................................................................ix
E. Course Goals.........................................................................................................ix
F. Course Conventions ..............................................................................................x
Lesson 1
Successful Development Practices
A. Scalable, Readable, and Maintainable VIs ...........................................................1-2
B. Successful Development Practices .......................................................................1-3
C. Course Project Overview ......................................................................................1-11
Lesson 2
Analyzing the Project
A. Evaluating the Needs of the Customer .................................................................2-2
B. Communicating with the Customer ......................................................................2-4
C. Developing the Requirements Document .............................................................2-6
Exercise 2-1 Analyze a Requirements Document .................................................2-8
D. Defining the Application ......................................................................................2-15
Lesson 3
Designing the User Interface
A. User Interface Design Issues.................................................................................3-2
B. User Interface Layout Issues.................................................................................3-4
C. Front Panel Prototyping ........................................................................................3-15
D. User Interface Examples .......................................................................................3-16
E. Localizing User Interfaces ....................................................................................3-17
Exercise 3-1 User-Interface Design Techniques ...................................................3-20
Lesson 4
Designing the Project
A. Design Patterns .....................................................................................................4-2
B. Event-Based Design Patterns................................................................................4-11
C. Advanced Event-Based Design Patterns...............................................................4-14
Exercise 4-1 User Event Techniques.....................................................................4-17
D. Creating a Hierarchical Architecture ....................................................................4-25
E. Using the LabVIEW Project and Project Libraries ..............................................4-27
Exercise 4-2 Using the LabVIEW Project.............................................................4-41
Exercise 4-3 File and Project Management with Project Explorer Tools .............4-45
© National Instruments Corporation iii LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Contents
F. Choosing Data Types............................................................................................4-51

Exercise 4-4 Choose Data Types...........................................................................4-53
G. Information Hiding ...............................................................................................4-56
Exercise 4-5 Information Hiding...........................................................................4-60
H. Designing Error Handling Strategies ....................................................................4-67
Exercise 4-6 Design an Error Handling Strategy ..................................................4-71
Lesson 5
Implementing the User Interface
A. Implementing User Interface-Based Data Types..................................................5-2
Exercise 5-1 Implement User Interface-Based Data Types...................................5-7
B. Implementing Meaningful Icons...........................................................................5-11
Exercise 5-2 Implement a Meaningful Icon ..........................................................5-13
C. Implementing Appropriate Connector Panes........................................................5-15
Exercise 5-3 Implement an Appropriate Connector Pane .....................................5-18
Lesson 6
Implementing Code
A. Configuration Management ..................................................................................6-2
B. Implementing a Design Pattern.............................................................................6-7
Exercise 6-1 Implement the Design Pattern ..........................................................6-13
C. Implementing Code...............................................................................................6-26
Exercise 6-2 Timing ..............................................................................................6-49
D. Develop Scalable and Maintainable Modules ......................................................6-53
Exercise 6-3 Implement Code ...............................................................................6-60
E. Implement an Error Handling Strategy.................................................................6-68
Exercise 6-4 Implement Error Handling Strategy .................................................6-69
Lesson 7
Implementing a Test Plan
A. Verifying the Code................................................................................................7-2
B. Implementing a Test Plan for Individual VIs .......................................................7-3
C. Implementing a Test Plan for Integrating VIs ......................................................7-5
Exercise 7-1 Integrate Initialize and Shutdown Functions....................................7-11
Exercise 7-2 Integrate Display Module .................................................................7-16
Exercise 7-3 Integrate Record Function ................................................................7-22
Exercise 7-4 Integrate Play Function.....................................................................7-27
Exercise 7-5 Integrate Stop Function ....................................................................7-34
Exercise 7-6 Integrate Save and Load Functions ..................................................7-36
Exercise 7-7 Integrate Error Module .....................................................................7-42
D. Implementing a Test Plan for the System .............................................................7-47
Exercise 7-8 Stress and Load Testing....................................................................7-53
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual iv ni.com

Contents
Lesson 8
Evaluating VI Performance
A. Steps to Improving Performance ..........................................................................8-2
B. Using VI Metrics to Identify VI Issues.................................................................8-2
Exercise 8-1 Identify VI Issues with VI Metrics...................................................8-4
C. Identifying VI Issues with VI Analyzer (Optional) ..............................................8-5
Exercise 8-2 Identify VI Issues with VI Analyzer (Optional)...............................8-12
D. Identifying Performance Problems .......................................................................8-13
E. Fixing Performance Problems ..............................................................................8-14
Exercise 8-3 Methods of Updating Indicators.......................................................8-24
Lesson 9
Implementing Documentation
A. Designing Documentation ....................................................................................9-2
B. Developing User Documentation..........................................................................9-2
C. Describing VIs, Controls, and Indicators..............................................................9-5
Exercise 9-1 Document User Interface..................................................................9-7
D. Creating Help Files ...............................................................................................9-9
Exercise 9-2 Implement Documentation ...............................................................9-10
Lesson 10
Deploying the Application
A. Implementing Code for Stand-Alone Applications ..............................................10-2
Exercise 10-1 Implementing Code for Stand-Alone Applications..........................10-8
B. Building a Stand-Alone Application.....................................................................10-12
Exercise 10-2 Create a Stand-Alone Application....................................................10-16
C. Building an Installer..............................................................................................10-18
Exercise 10-3 Create an Installer.............................................................................10-22
Appendix A
IEEE Requirements Documents
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standards ......................A-2
B. IEEE Requirements Document .............................................................................A-3
Appendix B
Additional Information and Resources
Glossary
Index
Course Evaluation
© National Instruments Corporation v LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Student Guide
Thank you for purchasing the LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful

Development Practices course kit. This course manual and the
accompanying software are used in the three-day, hands-on LabVIEW
Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course.
You can apply the full purchase of this course kit toward the corresponding
course registration fee if you register within 90 days of purchasing the kit.
Visit ni.com/training for online course schedules, syllabi, training
centers, and class registration.
Note For course manual updates and corrections, refer to ni.com/info and enter the
info code rdcelv1.
A. NI Certification
The LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course is
part of a series of courses designed to build your proficiency with LabVIEW
and help you prepare for NI LabVIEW certification exams. The following
illustration shows the courses that are part of the LabVIEW training series.
Refer to ni.com/training for more information about NI Certification.
Courses
New User Experienced User Advanced User
Begin LabVIEW Basics I* LabVIEW Intermediate I* LabVIEW Advanced

Here
LabVIEW Basics II* LabVIEW Intermediate II* Application Development
Skills learned: Skills learned: Skills learned:

• LabVIEW environment • Modular application development • Large application design
navigation • Structured design and • Code reuse maximization
• Basic application creation development practices • Object-oriented programming
using LabVIEW • Memory management and VI in LabVIEW
performance improvement
Certifications
Certified LabVIEW Certified LabVIEW Certified LabVIEW

Associate Developer Exam Developer Exam Architect Exam
Skills tested: Skills tested: Skills tested:

• LabVIEW environment • LabVIEW application • LabVIEW application
knowledge development expertise development mastery
Hardware-Based Courses:
• Data Acquisition and Signal Conditioning • Modular Instruments • Instrument Control • Machine Vision
• Motion Control • LabVIEW Real-Time • Compact RIO
*Core courses are strongly recommended to realize maximum productivity gains when using LabVIEW.
© National Instruments Corporation vii LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Student Guide
B. Course Description
The LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course
teaches you four fundamental areas of software development in
LabVIEW—design, implement, test, and deploy. By the end of the
LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course, you
will be able to produce a LabVIEW application that uses good programming
practices and is easy to scale, easy to read, and easy to maintain. As a result,
you should be able to more effectively develop software with LabVIEW.
This course assumes that you have taken the LabVIEW Basics I:
Introduction and LabVIEW Basics II: Development courses or have
equivalent experience.
This course kit is designed to be completed in sequence. The course is

divided into lessons, each covering a topic or a set of topics. Each lesson
consists of:
• An introduction that describes the lesson’s purpose and topics
• A discussion of the topics
• A set of exercises to reinforce the topics presented in the discussion
Note The exercises in this course are cumulative and lead toward developing a final
application at the end of the course. If you skip an exercise, use the solution VI for that
exercise, available in the <Solutions>\LabVIEW Intermediate I directory, in later
exercises.
• A quiz that reviews the important concepts and skills in the lesson
C. What You Need to Get Started

Before you use this course manual, make sure you have the following items:
❑ Windows 2000 or later installed on your computer; this course is

optimized for Windows XP
❑ LabVIEW Professional Development System 8.6 or later
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual viii ni.com

Student Guide
❑ LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course CD,

containing the following folders:
Filename Description
Exercises Folder containing VIs and other files used in the course
Solutions Folder containing completed course exercises
D. Installing the Course Software

Complete the following steps to install the course software.
1. Insert the course CD in your computer. The LabVIEW Intermediate
Course Material Setup dialog box appears.
2. Click Next.
3. Select Complete click Next.
4. Click Next to begin the installation.
5. Click Finish to exit the Setup Wizard.
6. The installer places the Exercises and Solutions folders at the top
level of the root directory.
Exercise files are located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I directory.
Tip Folder names in angle brackets, such as <Exercises>, refer to folders in the root
directory of your computer.
Repairing or Removing Course Material

You can repair or remove the course material using the Add or Remove
Programs feature on the Windows Control Panel. Repair the course
material to overwrite existing course material with the original, unedited
versions of the files. Remove the course material if you no longer need the
files on your machine.
E. Course Goals
After completing the course, you will be able to:
• Analyze the requirements of an application and choose appropriate
design patterns and data structures
• Implement good programming style to create efficient VIs
• Develop techniques to test and validate VIs
© National Instruments Corporation ix LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Student Guide
• Develop modular applications that are scalable, readable, and

maintainable
• Develop techniques to evaluate and improve inherited code
• Use LabVIEW tools to evaluate VI performance
• Effectively document VIs
• Use advanced features of the LabVIEW Application Builder to create a
stand-alone application
• Use the LabVIEW Application Builder to create a professional installer
to use on other platforms
F. Course Conventions
The following conventions are used in this course manual:
» The » symbol leads you through nested menu items and dialog box options
to a final action. The sequence File»Page Setup»Options directs you to pull
down the File menu, select the Page Setup item, and select Options from
the last dialog box.
This icon denotes a tip, which alerts you to advisory information.
This icon denotes a note, which alerts you to important information.
This icon denotes a caution, which advises you of precautions to take to

avoid injury, data loss, or a system crash.
bold Bold text denotes items that you must select or click in the software, such as
menu items and dialog box options. Bold text also denotes parameter names,
controls and buttons on the front panel, dialog boxes, sections of dialog
boxes, menu names, and palette names.
italic Italic text denotes variables, emphasis, a cross-reference, or an introduction
to a key concept. Italic text also denotes text that is a placeholder for a word
or value that you must supply.
monospace Text in this font denotes text or characters that you enter from the keyboard,
sections of code, programming examples, and syntax examples. This font
also is used for the proper names of disk drives, paths, directories, programs,
subprograms, subroutines, device names, functions, operations, variables,
filenames, and extensions.
Platform Text in this font denotes a specific platform and indicates that the text
following it applies only to that platform.
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual x ni.com

Successful Development Practices
1
This course describes various development techniques that enable you to
create scalable, readable, and maintainable VIs. Also, this course shows
how to prevent the addition of unplanned features that alter your original
intent of the application and make code more difficult to maintain.
Additionally, this course shows problem-solving techniques and how best to
use LabVIEW to solve problems. The course presents each phase of the
software development process—design, implement, test, and deploy, as
shown in Figure 1-1.
Design Implement Test Deploy
Analyze Implement the Implement the Implement the

the Project User Interface Test Plan Documentation
Design the Implement Evaluate the Code Build and Deploy

User Interface the Code Performance the Application
Design
the Code
Figure 1-1. Software Development Map
Topics
A. Scalable, Readable, and Maintainable VIs
B. Successful Development Practices
C. Course Project Overview
© National Instruments Corporation 1-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Lesson 1 Successful Development Practices
A. Scalable, Readable, and Maintainable VIs

When you use LabVIEW to develop complex applications, use good
software design principles. Create VIs that are scalable, readable, and
maintainable.
• Scalable—Expand functionality of an application without being forced
to completely redesign the application.
• Readable—Visually inspect the design of an application and quickly
understand its purpose and functionality.
• Maintainable—Easily change the code by the original developer or any
other developer without affecting the intent of the original code.
When you program with LabVIEW you encounter many of the same design
issues that you encounter when you program in text-based languages.
However, LabVIEW provides many powerful features and allows for
programming techniques that enable you to focus on producing a solution to
a problem rather than focusing on syntax or memory issues.
Scalable
In order to create a scalable VI, begin thinking about the design of the
application early in the design process. A well-designed scalable VI allows
you to easily modify and add additional functionality to the original design.
For example, consider a data acquisition VI that acquires data from three
thermocouples. If the requirements of the application change and you need
to acquire data from hundreds of thermocouples, extending the VI to acquire
data from hundreds of thermocouples is easier than designing a new VI if
the original VI is designed to be scalable. When you design any application,
consider the purpose of the application and how to manage changes when
the scale of the application goes beyond the original specification.
Readable
In your experience working with LabVIEW, you may have seen block
diagrams that were unstructured, difficult to read, and difficult to
understand. Confusing and unmaintainable code sometimes is called
spaghetti code. Unreadable code can make it impossible to decipher the
functionality of a block diagram. Figure 1-2 shows poorly designed block
diagram and a well-designed block diagram.
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual 1-2 ni.com

1 2
1 Poorly Designed 2 Well-Designed
Figure 1-2. Examples of Poorly Designed and Well-Designed Block Diagrams
Code that is difficult to read and difficult to understand is difficult to

maintain.
Maintainable
When you develop an application, keep in mind that another programmer
might need to use and modify the VI in the future. By using forethought in
designing and creating an application, you can create VIs that are more
maintainable. A VI written using good program design and architecture
allows you as well as other programmers to add new features without
completely rewriting the application.
B. Successful Development Practices

LabVIEW makes it easy to assemble components of data acquisition, test,
and control systems. Because creating applications in LabVIEW is so easy,
many people begin to develop VIs immediately with relatively little
planning. For simple applications, such as quick lab tests or monitoring
applications, this approach can be appropriate. However, for larger
development projects, good project planning is vital.
LabVIEW—A Programming Language

LabVIEW is a multipurpose programming language designed specifically
for creating applications in the measurement and automation industry.
LabVIEW applications can range from a simple VI with one VI, to extensive
applications that contain many VIs organized into a complex hierarchy. As
you expand the use of LabVIEW and create more complex applications, the
code that comprises the applications becomes more complex.

Many industries around the world use LabVIEW to perform a wide range of
measurement and automation tasks, in many environments, including those
where safety is critical. For example, a LabVIEW application might
measure the size of medical stents that are placed into human arteries. If the
programmer fails to correctly design, implement, test, and deploy the
application, he could place the patient who receives the stent in a
life-threatening position.
Programmers have placed people in life-threatening positions in the past.

In 1987, the United States Food and Drug Administration recalled five
Therac-25 medical linear accelerators used in clinical cancer radiotherapy.1
The machines were recalled due to software defects that caused massive
radiation overdoses leading to patient death. It was later determined that the
Therac-25 overdoses were the result of poor software design to control the
safety of the Therac-25. As a programmer, you must create applications that
are safe, reliable, easy to maintain, and easy to understand2.
Software Lifecycles
Software development projects are complex. To deal with these
complexities, many developers adhere to a core set of development
principles. These principles define the field of software engineering. A
major component of this field is the lifecycle model. The lifecycle model
describes steps to follow when developing software—from the initial
concept stage to the release, maintenance, and subsequent upgrading of the
software.
Many different lifecycle models currently exist. Each has advantages and
disadvantages in terms of time-to-release, quality, and risk management.
This topic describes some of the most common models used in software
engineering. Many hybrids of these models exist, so you can customize
these models to fit the requirements of a project.
Although this discussion is theoretical, in practice consider all the steps

these models encompass. Consider how you decide what requirements and
specifications the project must meet and how you deal with changes to them.
Also consider when you need to meet these requirements and what happens
if you do not meet a deadline.
The lifecycle model is a foundation for the entire development process.

Good decisions can improve the quality of the software you develop and
decrease the time it takes to develop it.
1. United States, United States Government Accounting Office, Medical Device Recalls Examination of Selected Cases GAO/PEMD-90-6
(Washington: GAO, 1989) 40.
2. National Instruments tools are not designed for operating life critical support systems and should not be used in such applications.

Code and Fix Model

The code and fix model probably is the most frequently used development
methodology in software engineering. It starts with little or no initial
planning. You immediately start developing, fixing problems as they occur,
until the project is complete.
Code and fix is a tempting choice when you are faced with a tight
development schedule because you begin developing code right away and
see immediate results.
Unfortunately, if you find major architectural problems late in the process,

you usually have to rewrite large parts of the application. Alternative
development models can help you catch these problems in the early concept
stages, when making changes is easier and less expensive.
The code and fix model is appropriate only for small projects that are not
intended to serve as the basis for future development.
Waterfall Model
The waterfall model is the classic model of software engineering. This
model is one of the oldest models and is widely used in government projects
and in many major companies. Because the model emphasizes planning in
the early stages, it catches design flaws before they develop. Also, because
the model is document and planning intensive, it works well for projects in
which quality control is a major concern.
The pure waterfall model consists of several non-overlapping stages, as

shown in the following illustration. The model begins with establishing
system requirements and software requirements and continues with
architectural design, detailed design, coding, testing, and maintenance. The
waterfall model serves as a baseline for many other lifecycle models.
System
Requirements
Software
Requirements
Architectural
Design
Detailed
Design
Coding
Testing
Maintenance

The following list details the steps for using the waterfall model:
1. System requirements—Establishes the components for building the
system, including the hardware requirements, software tools, and other
necessary components. Examples include decisions on hardware, such
as plug-in boards (number of channels, acquisition speed, and so on),
and decisions on external pieces of software, such as databases or
libraries.
2. Software requirements—Establishes the expectations for software
functionality and identifies which system requirements the software
affects. Requirements analysis includes determining interaction needed
with other applications and databases, performance requirements, user
interface requirements, and so on.
3. Architectural design—Determines the software framework of a system
to meet the specified requirements. The design defines the major
components and the interaction of those components, but the design
does not define the structure of each component. You also determine the
external interfaces and tools to use in the project.
4. Detailed design—Examines the software components defined in the
architectural design stage and produces a specification for how each
component is implemented.
5. Coding—Implements the detailed design specification.
6. Testing—Determines whether the software meets the specified
requirements and finds any errors present in the code.
7. Maintenance—Addresses problems and enhancement requests after
the software releases.
In some organizations, a change control board maintains the quality of
the product by reviewing each change made in the maintenance stage.
Consider applying the full waterfall development cycle model when
correcting problems or implementing these enhancement requests.
In each stage, you create documents that explain the objectives and describe
the requirements for that phase. At the end of each stage, you hold a review
to determine whether the project can proceed to the next stage. You also can
incorporate prototyping into any stage from the architectural design and
after.
Many people believe you cannot apply this model to all situations. For
example, with the pure waterfall model, you must state the requirements
before you begin the design, and you must state the complete design before
you begin coding. There is no overlap between stages. In real-world
development, however, you can discover issues during the design or coding
stages that point out errors or gaps in the requirements.

The waterfall model does not prohibit returning to an earlier phase, for
example, from the design phase to the requirements phase. However, this
involves costly rework. Each completed phase requires formal review and
extensive documentation development. Thus, oversights made in the
requirements phase are expensive to correct later.
Because the actual development comes late in the process, you do not see
results for a long time. This delay can be disconcerting to management and
to customers. Many people also think the amount of documentation is
excessive and inflexible.
Although the waterfall model has its weaknesses, it is instructive because it

emphasizes important stages of project development. Even if you do not
apply this model, consider each of these stages and its relationship to your
own project.
Modified Waterfall Model

Many engineers recommend modified versions of the waterfall model.
These modifications tend to focus on allowing some of the stages to overlap,
thus reducing the documentation requirements and the cost of returning to
earlier stages to revise them. Another common modification is to
incorporate prototyping into the requirements phases.
Overlapping stages, such as the requirements stage and the design stage,
make it possible to integrate feedback from the design phase into the
requirements. However, overlapping stages can make it difficult to know
when you are finished with a given stage. Consequently, progress is more
difficult to track. Without distinct stages, problems can cause you to defer
important decisions until later in the process when they are more expensive
to correct.
Prototyping
One of the main problems with the waterfall model is that the requirements
often are not completely understood in the early development stages. When
you reach the design or coding stages, you begin to see how everything
works together, and you can discover that you need to adjust the
requirements.
Prototyping is an effective tool for demonstrating how a design meets a set

of requirements. You can build a prototype, adjust the requirements, and
revise the prototype several times until you have a clear picture of the overall
objectives. In addition to clarifying the requirements, a prototype also
defines many areas of the design simultaneously.
The pure waterfall model allows for prototyping in the later architectural
design stage and subsequent stages but not in the early requirements stages.

However, prototyping has its drawbacks. Because it appears that you have a
working system, customers might expect a complete system sooner than is
possible. In most cases, a prototype is built on compromises that allow it to
come together quickly but prevent the prototype from being an effective
basis for future development. You need to decide early if you want to use the
prototype as a basis for future development. All parties need to agree with
this decision before development begins.
Be careful that prototyping does not become a disguise for a code and fix
development cycle. Before you begin prototyping, gather clear requirements
and create a design plan. Limit the amount of time you spend prototyping
before you begin. Time limits help to avoid overdoing the prototyping
phase. As you incorporate changes, update the requirements and the current
design. After you finish prototyping, consider returning to one of the other
development models. For example, consider prototyping as part of the
requirements or design phases of the waterfall model.
LabVIEW Prototyping Methods

You can prototype a system in LabVIEW in a number of ways. In systems
with I/O requirements that are difficult to satisfy, you can develop a
prototype to test the control and acquisition loops and rates. In I/O
prototypes, random data can simulate data acquired in the real system.
Systems with many user interface requirements are perfect for prototyping.
Determining the method you use to display data or prompt the user for
settings is difficult on paper. Instead, consider designing VI front panels
with the controls and indicators you need. Leave the block diagram empty
and figure out how the controls work and how various actions require other
front panels. For more extensive prototypes, tie the front panels together.
However, do not get carried away with this process.
If you are bidding on a project for a client, using front panel prototypes is an
extremely effective way to discuss with the client how you can satisfy his or
her requirements. Because you can add and remove controls quickly,
especially if the block diagrams are empty, you help customers clarify
requirements.

Spiral Model
The spiral model is a popular alternative to the waterfall model. It
emphasizes risk management so you find major problems earlier in the
development cycle. In the waterfall model, you have to complete the design
before you begin coding. With the spiral model, you break up the project
into a set of risks that you need to deal with. You then begin a series of
iterations in which you analyze the most important risk, evaluate options for
resolving the risk, deal with the risk, assess the results, and plan for the next
iteration. The following illustration shows the spiral lifecycle model.
Determine Objectives, Evaluate Alternatives

Alternatives, and Constraints and Risks
Risk
Analysis Cumulative Cost
Prototype
Commit to
Next Cycle
Plan Next Phase Develop and Test
Risks are any issues that are not clearly defined or have the potential to
affect the project adversely. For each risk, consider the following two things:
1. The likelihood of the risk occurring (probability)
2. The severity of the effect of the risk on the project (loss)
You can use a scale of 1 to 10 for each of these items, where 1 represents the
lowest probability or loss and 10 represents the highest. Risk exposure is the
product of these two rankings.

Use something such as the following table to keep track of the top risk items
of the project.
Risk Risk Management

ID Risk Probability Loss Exposure Approach
1 Acquisition rates 5 9 45 Develop prototype to
too high demonstrate
feasibility
2 File format might 5 3 15 Develop
not be efficient benchmarks to show
speed of data
manipulation
3 Uncertain user 2 5 10 Involve customer;
interface develop prototype
In general, deal with the risks that have the highest risk exposure first. In this
example, the first spiral deals with the potential of the data acquisition rates
being too high. If after the first spiral, you demonstrate that the rates are
high, you can change to a different hardware configuration to meet the
acquisition requirements. Each iteration can identify new risks. In this
example, using more powerful hardware can introduce higher costs as a new
risk.
For example, assume you are designing a data acquisition system with a
plug-in data acquisition card. In this case, the risk is whether the system can
acquire, analyze, and display data quickly enough. Some of the constraints
in this case are system cost and requirements for a specific sampling rate and
precision.
After determining the options and constraints, you evaluate the risks. In this
example, create a prototype or benchmark to test acquisition rates. After you
see the results, you can evaluate whether to continue with the approach or
choose a different option. You do this by reassessing the risks based on the
new knowledge you gained from building the prototype.
In the final phase, you evaluate the results with the customer. Based on
customer input, you can reassess the situation, decide on the next highest
risk, and start the cycle over. This process continues until the software is
finished or you decide the risks are too great and terminate development. It
is possible that none of the options are viable because the options are too
expensive, time-consuming, or do not meet the requirements.
The advantage of the spiral model over the waterfall model is that you can
evaluate which risks to handle with each cycle. Because you can evaluate

risks with prototypes much earlier than in the waterfall model, you can deal
with major obstacles and select alternatives in the earlier stages, which is
less expensive. With a standard waterfall model, assumptions about the
risky components can spread throughout the design, and when you discover
the problems, the rework involved can be very expensive.
C. Course Project Overview

Throughout this course, you complete exercises that cumulate in a final
project. The exercises allow you to practice techniques that are integral to
each phase of the design process. Complete the exercises in the order in
which they are presented. You can apply the project and lessons presented
in this course to any development project that you may work on in your
profession.
This course refers to both the programmer and customer. This course defines
the programmer as the individual or group who uses LabVIEW to create a
solution for a particular project. The customer is the end user who uses the
solution developed by the programmer. Solutions in LabVIEW can be a
stand-alone application that consists of the solution or a set of VIs that are
used as a library. This course focuses on using good programming practices
to create a scalable, readable, and maintainable stand-alone application as a
solution to a particular project.
Course Project Goal

Given a project, use LabVIEW and good programming practices to create a
scalable, readable, and maintainable stand-alone application as a solution.

Summary – Quiz
1. Match each software lifecycle to its description:
Code and Fix Model a. Reduces the cost of returning to

earlier stages
Waterfall Model b. Begin development immediately
Modified Waterfall Model c. Clearly defines and implements
each stage
Spiral Model d. Find problems earlier in the
development cycle
2. Match each software design principle to its definition:
Scalable a. Easy to visually inspect the

design of the VI and understand
its purpose
Readable b. Easy to add functionality to a VI
without having to redesign it
Maintainable c. Easy to change a VI without
affecting the intent of the
original VI

Summary – Quiz Answers

1. Match each software lifecycle to its description:
Code and Fix Model b. Begin development

immediately
Waterfall Model c. Clearly defines and
implements each stage
Modified Waterfall Model a. Reduces the cost of returning
to earlier stages
Spiral Model d. Find problems earlier in the
development cycle
2. Match each software design principle to its definition:
Scalable b. Easy to add functionality to a

VI without having to redesign it
Readable a. Easy to visually inspect the
design of the VI and
understand its purpose
Maintainable c. Easy to change a VI without
affecting the intent of the
original VI

Notes

Analyzing the Project
2
Analyzing a project before you begin any VI building helps you develop VIs
more efficiently and prevent feature creep. This lesson describes essential
steps in the process of analyzing a project—evaluating the specifications
document, creating the requirements document, and defining the
application. At the end of this lesson, you analyze a specifications document
and a requirements document. The requirements document defines the
features required for the application to function according to the
specifications.
Topics
A. Evaluating the Needs of the Customer
B. Communicating with the Customer
C. Developing the Requirements Document
D. Defining the Application

Lesson 2 Analyzing the Project
A. Evaluating the Needs of the Customer

You typically develop software because someone has identified a need for
the software. For example, a customer might identify a need and hire you to
create software that meets that need. Before you can develop the application,
you must analyze the project to make sure you fully understand the needs of
the customer. The customer might provide you with a specifications
document that defines the function of the application they hired you to
create.
The customer does not always produce the specification document. Often,
you must gather the specifications based on the information the customer
provides. The specifications document should provide a good understanding
of the software to produce. However, the specifications document is not
necessarily the architecture of the software.
The customer might not have a complete understanding of the problem they
want you to solve. In this case, you must determine those details. A good
design always begins with a good understanding of the software
specifications. In order to understand the specifications, read the
specifications carefully and develop questions for the customer if the intent
of any specification is unclear.
The specification phase of the design process also allows you to identify any
areas of the specifications document that are lacking. This is the first step in
producing a requirements document.
Specifications have two categories—functional and non-functional

specifications.
• Functional Specifications—Define the functions that the software
must perform. The following examples are functional specifications:
– Sample data at 100 kS/s
– Perform a Fast Fourier Transform
– Store data in a database
• Non-functional Specifications—Define the characteristics or attributes
of a software implementation. The following examples are
non-functional specifications:
– System must be reliable for up to 10 simultaneous users
– System should be implemented by October 10
– VIs must be scalable
Functional and non-functional specifications are interrelated. Separating

specifications into functional and non-functional categories can make it
easier to implement an application. The functional specifications become

requirements in the requirements document. Later, when you implement

the specifications, the functional specifications become modules of the
application. The non-functional specifications define the attributes of the
functional specifications.
The specifications define what the customer wants to achieve with the
software or what functions the application should perform. A thorough
specifications analysis sorts out the needs from the wants. Many times
a specifications document becomes a wish list rather than a well-defined
document. Removing the non-essential specifications from the
specifications document helps prevent feature creep.
You can sort out the needs from the wants by analyzing the key words in the
specification. Words such as shall, must, and will define specifications that
the system needs to implement. Words such as should, can, may, might, and
could indicate specifications that the customer wants but may not need. You
can organize specifications that are wants into a wish list that you can use in
the future.
Analyzing the specifications requires a good understanding of the overall

purpose of the application. Even when the customer has delivered a
complete specifications document, it is important to examine it closely and
determine if any items are missing in the specifications. Ask questions and
gather any requirements that are not mentioned in the document.
Job Aid
Use the following checklist to identify areas of concern with a specifications
document. Not all items in the checklist pertain to every project
specification.
Specifications Content Checklist

❑ Does a specifications document exist?
❑ Are the tasks the user performs indicated in the specifications

document?
❑ Are the specifications clearly defined?
❑ Does the document clearly specify the technical requirements of the

project?
❑ Is the specifications document free of conflicts?
❑ Are all specifications listed?
❑ Are costs and time needs clearly indicated?

❑ Are all specifications possible to implement?
❑ Are design details excluded from the specifications document?
❑ Is each specification verifiable through testing?
For a complete and thorough specifications document, you can check off all
applicable items in the checklist. Any items that you cannot check off are
questions for your customer.
B. Communicating with the Customer

The process of finalizing a specifications document requires you to gather
information and communicate with the customer to clarify the
specifications.
You must interact with the customer closely to make sure the specifications
document contains all the necessary information. If information is missing,
you must determine what is missing and add it to the specifications
document.
The expectations of the customer and the programmer are different. You
must determine what expectations the customer has and how to relate to
them.
Customer Expectations of the Programmer 1

Consider the following expectations the customer might have of you as a
programmer:
• Understands what he or she has been told
• Communicates his or her design ideas
• Communicates any problems
• Keeps to schedule
• Keeps promises
• Asks the right questions
• Leads the project
1. Jon Conway and Steve Watts, A Software Engineering Approach to LabVIEW (Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall, 2003) 113.

Programmer Expectations of the Customer 1

Consider the following expectations you might have of the customer:
• Knows what he or she wants
• Communicates his or her requirements
• Is aware of any pitfalls
• Is consistent in stating views
Because their expectations differ, the customer and programmer speak

different languages. It is important to understand that the customer expects
you to solve many of the issues regarding the final requirements for the
project. You can use this expectation to your advantage because you can
recommend the best technology to solve a particular problem. For example,
the customer might want to display data in a tabular format, but after you
evaluate the data, you might recommend displaying the data in a graphical
plot so that all the data is visually available. Solving issues regarding the
final requirements of the project is where you can add value to the process
of analyzing the project.
Communicating with your customer also can help reduce costs. If

specifications change during the implementation phase, you might have to
discard code. It is not easy to add changes to an existing application.
Software studies from corporations such as IBM, TRW, and GTE have
shown the significant cost increases associated with changing the
specifications during various phases of the software development process.
If a change occurs during the design phase of the project, it is five times
more expensive. If a change occurs in the implementation phase, it is
10 times more expensive. If a change occurs in the test phase, it is 20 times
more expensive. If a change occurs during deployment, it is 50 times more
expensive. Therefore it is important to make sure the specifications
document is as complete as possible so that changes do not occur during any
other phase than the design phase.2
It also is important to make sure that you are communicating with the right
individual. Always communicate with the individual who has design
authority.1 To save yourself frustration, formalize the decision making
process so that the person who has the final say on the project is identified
and aware of the project requirements.
In order to communicate effectively with your customer, first make sure that
you can check off each applicable item in the Specifications Content
Checklist. Any items that you cannot check off are questions for your
customer.
1. Conway and Watts, 113.

2. Steve McConnell, Code Complete (Redmond: Microsoft Press, 1993) 29.

Job Aid
Use the following checklist when you communicate with your customer to
help make sure that you both agree on the specification items.
Customer Communication Checklist

❑ Do you know why each specification should be implemented?
❑ Are data handling and reporting methods defined?
❑ Are the user interface needs defined?
❑ Is the hardware defined?
❑ Are all the functions that the software should perform defined?
C. Developing the Requirements Document

Requirements documents provide a common starting point for you and the
customer. After the specifications meetings and requirements meetings with
the customer, you should have all the information you need to produce a
requirements document. You or the customer can create the requirements
document.
If a project requires you to create the requirements document, use the

guidelines in this section to help determine what items to include.
Remember that at this point of the development process, the design of the
software has not even begun. This is a fact finding journey for the project.
Designing the software occurs later. Write the requirements document in a
language that you and the customer understand so you can complete the
software design.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) defines

standards for software engineering, including standards for requirements
documents. The requirements document in this course follows a format
similar to the requirements documents included in NI Certified LabVIEW
Developer exams. Refer to Appendix A, IEEE Requirements Documents,
for information about IEEE standards and a version of the requirements
document for the theater light control software based on the IEEE-830
requirements document specification.

Job Aid
Use the following requirements checklist to make sure that the requirements
document is complete and adequate. This is not a complete checklist, but it
provides a starting place to determine if the requirements document is
appropriate.
Requirements Document Checklist

Each of the requirements:
❑ Is clear and understandable.
❑ Has a single meaning.
❑ Contributes to the explanation of every functional behavior of the

software system.
❑ Does not contradict another requirement.
❑ Does not specify invalid behavior.
❑ Can be tested.

Exercise 2-1 Analyze a Requirements Document

Goal
Assess a requirements document that is based on a software requirements
document specification.
Scenario
You work with a Certified LabVIEW Architect to develop a requirements
document. You develop the requirements document after researching
commercially available theatre light control software and analyzing the
specifications document. You must analyze the requirements document to
ensure that it is complete and accurate.
Implementation
Analyze the requirements document for the Theatre Light Control Software.
Read the following requirements document to gain an understanding of the

software you create in this course.
Many organizations use their own techniques to create a requirements

document. If your organization is not using a format for a requirements
document, you can use this requirements document as a basis for other
requirements documents. Another version of this requirements document
can be found in the IEEE Requirements Documents section of Appendix A.
Start of Requirements Document
Requirements Document
ABC Theatre Inc.
Theatre Light Control Software Specifications
Document Number: LV100975
Section I: General Requirements

The application should do the following:
• Function as specified in Section II: Application Requirements of this
document.
• Conform to LabVIEW coding style and documentation standards. Refer
to the Development Guidelines section of the LabVIEW Help for more
information about the LabVIEW style checklist and creating
documentation.

Requirements Document Continued
• Be hierarchical in nature. All major functions should be performed in

subVIs.
• Use a state machine that uses either a type-defined enumerated type

control, queue, or Event structure to manage states.
• Be easily scalable enabling the addition of more states and/or features

without having to manually update the hierarchy.
• Minimize the excessive use of structures, local and/or global variables,

and Property Nodes.
• Respond to front panel controls within 100 ms and not utilize 100% of
CPU time.
• Close all opened references and handles.
• Be well documented and include the following:

– Labels on appropriate wires within the main VI and subVIs.
– Descriptions for each algorithm.
– Documentation in VI Properties»Documentation for the main
VI and subVIs.
– Tip strips and descriptions for each front panel control and indicator.
– Labels for constants.
Section II: Application Requirements

Introduction
ABC Theatre Lighting Inc. is the largest provider of theatre lighting systems
for major metropolitan theatres worldwide. Theatre light systems must be
scalable for as many lights as a particular production might require. A
software-based theatre light control system allows theatres to scale the
lighting for each production. The control system controls each light
individually. Each light contains its own dimmer and color mixing system.
The color mixing system can mix an appropriate amount of red, green, and
blue to define each color. The control software sends signals to a hardware
control system that controls the intensity and color of the lights. The user
interface for the control software should look similar to the following front
panel.

Definitions
This section defines the terminology for the project.
• Channel—The most basic element of the Theatre Light Control
Application. Each channel corresponds to a physical light.
• Intensity—Attribute of the channel that defines the intensity of the
physical light.
• Color—Attribute of the channel that defines the color of the channel as
a combination of red, green, and blue.
• Cue—A cue contains any number of independent channels with timing
attributes for the channels.
• Wait time—A cue timing attribute that defines the amount of time to
wait, in multiples of one second, before the cue fires.
• Fade time—A cue timing attribute that defines the time it takes, in
multiples of one second, before a channel reaches its particular intensity
and color.
• Follow time—A cue timing attribute that defines the amount of time to
wait, in multiples of one second, before the cue finishes.
Task
Design, implement, test, and deploy a theatre light control system that
allows a theatre lighting engineer to easily control and program the theatre
lights for any production.

General Operation
Controls on the front panel control the operation of the theatre light control
software. Indicators on the front panel indicate the current status of the
theatre light control software.
The controller will store the channel intensity, channel color, channel wait
time, channel fade time, channel follow time, and name for the cue when the
user clicks the Record button. When the user clicks the Play button, the
controller services each cue in the Cue Control by cycling through the
recorded cues starting with the first cue in the Cue Control. A cue that is
playing will wait for the specified wait time, then fade the channels to the
desired color and intensity within the specified fade time, and then wait for
the specified follow time. The next cue in the Cue Control loads and the
process repeats, until all of the Cues play. The user can stop a currently
playing cue by clicking the Stop button. The controller exits when the user
selects File»Exit.
Sequence of Operation
Application Run
When the application starts, all of the controls must initialize to the default
states as shown on the front panel. The Cue Control must be cleared to
remove all of the recorded Cues. The channels must be initialized with their
corresponding channel number, zero intensity, and the zero color.
Record
Click the Record button to activate the cue recording functionality. A
custom panel must open that allows the lighting engineer to set the channel
intensity and color for the channels. The panel must provide for the
capability to name the cue, and specify the wait time, fade time, and the
follow time. The minimum time for the wait time and follow time is zero
seconds. The minimum time for the fade time is one second. The minimum
increment for the wait time, fade time, and follow time is one second.
After a cue is recorded, the cue name is placed into the Cue Control.
Play
Click the Play button to play the recorded cues. When the play begins, the
controller should disable the Record button and the Cue List on the front
panel. The values of the first cue in the cue list is loaded into memory. The
controller waits based on the number of seconds specified for the wait time
for the current cue. The controller then fades the channel up or down based
on the current channel intensity and the desired channel intensity. The

software writes the color and intensity to the theatre lighting hardware
control system, and updates the front panel channels. The controller must
finish fading within the specified fade time. The controller will finish
processing the cue by waiting for the number of seconds specified for the
follow time of the current cue. When the play is complete, the controller
should enable the Record button and the Cue List on the front panel.
Stop
Click the Stop button to stop a currently playing cue. The operation is
ignored if a cue is not playing.
Save
Click File»Save to save all of the recorded cues in a file for later playback.
The user specifies the filename.
Open
Click File»Open to open a file that contains recorded cues. The user
specifies the filename.
Exit
Click File»Exit to exit the application. If an error has occurred in the
application, the application reports the errors.
Description of Controls and Indicators
Control Name Control Description—Function

Cue List Listbox—Stores a list of recorded cues that the
user can select
Play Boolean—Plays the recorded cues
Record Boolean—Opens a dialog box that allows the user
to specify and record channel attributes
Stop Boolean—Stops a currently playing cue

Indicator Name Indicator Description—Function

Cue Name String—Displays the name of the current cue
Wait Time Numeric—Displays the number of seconds of the
recorded cue wait time
Fade Time Numeric—Displays the number of seconds of the
recorded cue fade time
Follow Time Numeric—Displays the number of seconds of the
recorded cue follow time
Channel Cluster—Record containing channel number,
channel intensity, and channel color
Scalability
Many of the newer theatre lights systems provide motor control to move the
light around the stage. The Theatre Light Control Software should provide
for the ability to easily implement channel pan and tilt. The software should
be easily scalable to control any number of channels.
Documentation
The application documentation should address the needs of the end user and
a programmer who might modify the application in the future.
Deliverables
The project includes the following deliverables:
• Documented source code
• Documentation that describes the system
Timeline
The project has the following timeline for completion:
• Day 1—User Interface prototype completed
• Day 2—Application modules completed
• Day 3—Fully functional application
End of Requirements Document

Use the following Requirements Document Checklist to ensure the

requirements document is complete and adequate.
❑ Each requirement is clear and understandable.
❑ Each requirement has a single, clear, unambiguous meaning.
❑ The requirements explain every functional behavior of the software

system.
❑ The requirements do not contradict each other.
❑ The requirements are correct and do not specify invalid behavior.
❑ You can test each requirement.
End of Exercise 2-1

D. Defining the Application

Project requirements describe what a software system should do. Having a
set of project requirements is the next step toward developing an application.
After communicating with the customer and finalizing the specifications for
the project, you can determine the project requirements. Therefore, the
requirements must contain enough detail. The requirements tell you exactly
what the software should accomplish. If the requirements are not detailed
enough, the intent of the customer could be lost and you could implement
code that does not meet the needs of the customer.
Before you develop a detailed design of a system, define the goals clearly.
Begin by making a list of requirements. Some requirements are specific,
such as the types of I/O, sampling rates, or the need for real-time analysis.
Do some research at this early stage to be sure you can meet the
specifications. Other requirements depend on user preferences, such as file
formats or graph styles.
You can take the list of requirements directly from the specifications. Try to
distinguish between absolute requirements and desires. While you can try to
satisfy all requests, it is best to have an idea about which features you can
sacrifice if you run out of time.
Be careful that the requirements are not so detailed that they constrain the
design. For example, when you design an I/O system, the customer probably
has certain sampling rate and precision requirements. However, cost is also
a constraint. Include all these issues in the requirements. If you can avoid
specifying the hardware, you can adjust the design after you begin
prototyping and benchmarking various components. As long as the costs are
within the specified budget and the timing and precision issues are met, the
customer might not care whether the system uses a particular type of plug-in
card or other hardware.
Another example of overly constraining a design is to be too specific about

the format for display used in various screens with which the customer
interacts. A picture of a display can be helpful in explaining requirements,
but be clear about whether the picture is a requirement or a guideline. Some
designers go through significant difficulties trying to produce a system that
behaves in a specific way because a certain behavior was a requirement. In
this case, there probably is a simpler solution that produces the same results
at a lower cost in a shorter time period.
One way to limit the amount of information you have to write when
analyzing a project is to draw a diagram of the application. Creating a
diagram helps improve your ability to design the application and convey
ideas to your customer. The first step in creating a diagram is to determine
the abstract components of each requirement.

Abstracting Components from Requirements

Developing applications that are more complex than a simple application
require design techniques to realize complex items in software. Abstraction
intuitively describes an application without describing how to write the
application. Abstraction generalizes the application and eliminates details.1
In general, abstraction has two categories—procedural abstraction and data

abstraction.2
Procedural Abstraction
Procedural abstraction separates what a procedure accomplishes from how
the procedure is implemented. For example, consider the following
application outline.
Procedure Implementation
Open datalog file.
Get frequency information for data.
Display all data points that satisfy

the search parameter.
With this example of procedural abstraction, the procedure implementation

is separated from the function of the procedure.
Data Abstraction
Data abstraction separates the data you want to store from the physical
means of storing the data. Data abstraction provides a more logical view of
the data rather than the bits and bytes that create the data. An example of
data abstraction is a cluster. A cluster can represent data with a more logical
view without requiring the user to be concerned with the details of its
implementation.
Consider the following excerpt from the requirements document for a

Theatre Light Control System. To analyze this example requirements
document, extract all the nouns from the document and use the nouns to
define components.
1. Jeri R. Hanly and Elliot B. Koffman, Problem Solving and Program Design in C (Reading:Addison-Wesley, 1996) 622.
2. Martin Ward, A Definition of Abstraction, 2003, www.dur.ac.uk/martin.ward/martin/papers/abstraction-t.pdf, Science.

Start of Requirements Document Excerpt
Task
Design, implement, test, and deploy a theatre light control system that
allows a theatre lighting engineer to easily control and program the theatre
lights for any production.
Controls on the front panel control the operation of the theatre light control
software. Indicators on the front panel indicate the current status of the
theatre light control software.
General Operation
The controller will store the channel intensity, channel color, channel wait
time, channel fade time, channel follow time, and name for the cue when the
user clicks the Record button. When the user clicks the Play button, the
controller services each cue in the Cue Control by cycling through the
recorded cues starting with the first cue in the Cue Control. A cue that is
playing will wait for the specified wait time, then fade the channels to the
desired color and intensity within the specified fade time, and then wait for
the specified follow time. The user can stop a currently playing cue by
clicking the Stop button. The controller exits when the user selects File»
Exit.
End of Requirements Document Excerpt
The following list shows the nouns from the previous requirements
document.
Theatre Light Control System Theatre Lighting Engineer
Theatre Lights Production Controls
Front Panel Indicators
Status Controller
Channel Intensity Channel Color
Channel Wait Time Channel Fade Time
Channel Follow Time Name
Cue User
Record Button Play Button
Cue Control Stop Button
Selected Cue

After you have a set of nouns, you can group the nouns into actual
components of your system. The following table organizes the components
into more abstract components.
Nouns Abstracted Nouns

Theatre Lights Hardware
Indicators Display
Status
Record Button
Play Button
Cue Control
Stop Button
Selected Cue
Channel Intensity Cue
Name
Cue
Channel Color
Channel Wait Time Timing
Channel Fade Time
Channel Follow Time
Applying the abstraction technique to the entire requirements document

provides one solution for determining a set of abstract components. The
Theater Light Control System has the following components: Hardware,
Display, Cue, Timing, Error, and File. The components become the modules
for the system.
Note The abstract components are one set of components that allow you to modularize
the system. You can abstract an infinite number of components. Experience and
understanding the problem help you to abstract the best set of components for the
application.

Using properly formatted requirements documents makes it easy to

determine the actions for each module. The requirements document
contains many verbs and verb phrases that represent system behavior and
typically relate to the VIs that you define. You can match the verbs and verb
phrases with the abstract components that perform the actions. Consider the
following excerpt from the requirements document for a Theatre Light
Control System.
Start of Requirements Document Excerpt
Play
Click the Play button to play the recorded cues. When the play begins, the
controller should disable the Record button and the Cue List on the front
panel. The values of the first cue in the cue list is loaded into memory. The
controller waits based on the number of seconds specified for the wait time
for the current cue. The controller then fades the channel up or down based
on the current channel intensity and the desired channel intensity. The
software writes the color and intensity to the theatre lighting hardware
control system and updates the front panel channels. The controller must
finish the fading within the specified fade time. The controller will finish
processing the cue by waiting for the number of seconds specified for the
follow time of the current cue. When the play is complete, the controller
should enable the Record button and the Cue List on the front panel.
End of Requirements Document Excerpt
Extract the verbs from the excerpt of the requirements document. Consider
the context of the verbs to establish what functions the abstract components
perform.
The following list shows the verbs from the previous requirements
document excerpt.
click disable
loaded waits
fades writes
enable update

After you have a set of verbs, you can organize the verbs to determine what
functions the abstract components perform. You can ignore verbs that do not
improve your understanding of the system, such as click in the previous list.
You must also try to remember the context of the verbs. The following table
organizes the verbs into the abstract components.
Verb Abstracted Component

disable Display
enable
update
loaded Cue
writes Hardware
waits Timing
fades
Creating a phrase for each verb improves readability and provides the
following function list.
Verb Phrase Abstracted Component

Disable Front Panel Display
Enable Front Panel
Update Front Panel
Get Cue Values Cue
Write Color and Intensity Hardware
Wait Time Timing
Follow Time
Fade Time

Performing the verb parse on the entire requirements document generates a

list of the individual actions each component performs. Table 2-1 lists each
component and the individual actions that the module performs.
Table 2-1. Modules and Actions
Module Actions
Hardware Write Color and Intensity
Display Initialize Front Panel
Update Front Panel
Select Cue
Enable/Disable Front Panel
Update Cue List
Cue Add Cue
Get Cue Values
Set Cue Values
Get Number of Cues
Get Empty Cue
Timing Wait Time
Fade Time
Follow Time
Error Report Errors
Handle Errors
File Save Cues
Read Cues
After you identify the high-level actions for each module, you can break
each action into smaller actions. This technique helps you to further analyze
the application and guarantee each individual module accomplishes only
one goal. When a module accomplishes more than one goal, it is difficult to
test the module and determine that it works correctly.
If you determine that a module performs more than one goal, break the
module into more modules. With this design, each module performs one
specific goal. Creating a software design with this level of detail helps you
develop VIs that are scalable, readable, and that consist of reusable code.

Coupling
A module rarely stands by itself. A VI is called by other VIs. Top-level VIs
can become plug-ins to other VIs or utilities for the operating system.
Coupling refers to the connections that exist between modules. Any module
that relies on another module to perform some function is coupled to that
module. If one module does not function correctly, other modules to which
it is coupled do not function correctly. The more connections among
modules, the harder it is to determine what module causes a problem.
Coupling measures how many dependencies a system of modules contains.
The fewer outputs a module exposes, the more you can change the code
inside the module without breaking other modules. Low coupling also helps
make bug tracking more efficient. For example, a data acquisition bug
cannot occur in a VI that performs only GPIB instrument control. If a data
acquisition bug appears in a GPIB VI, you know the code is probably too
tightly coupled.
The dataflow model of LabVIEW automatically encourages low coupling

among modules. The dataflow model means each VI has only the
information it needs to do its job. A VI cannot change data in another VI.
You can introduce other communication paths, such as global variables,
queues, I/O connections, and so on, that can increase coupling, but a typical
VI is self-sufficient and couples only to the subVIs it calls. The goal of any
hierarchical architecture is to make sure that the implementation uses low or
loose coupling.
Cohesion
In a well-designed VI, each module fulfills one goal and thus is strongly
cohesive. If a single module tries to fulfill more than one goal, you should
probably break it into modules. When a module tries to accomplish multiple
goals, the block diagram becomes harder to read, and the code for one goal
can affect how the code for another goal works. In this case, fixing a bug in
one goal might break the code of another goal.
A VI with strong cohesion has one goal per module. Strong cohesion
decreases overall development time. You can more easily understand a
single module if it focuses on one task. You can read a clean, uncomplicated
block diagram quickly and make deliberate changes with confidence.

The Mathematics VIs and functions that ship with LabVIEW demonstrate
strong cohesion. For example, the Sine function performs a single goal, and
performs it well. It is a perfect example of a function that has strong
cohesion. The name of the function clearly indicates what the function
accomplishes. Other VIs that have strong cohesion are the File I/O VIs and
functions. The File I/O VIs and functions perform sequential cohesion
because one module must execute before another module can execute. The
Open File, Read File, Write File, and Close File functions each perform a
single goal within each module.
After you have abstracted the components, you can produce a diagram that
helps to visualize the abstracted components. Use the diagram to start
designing the individual modules in the application. Each abstracted
component corresponds to a module within the application. At the top level,
you define the actions for each abstracted component. Defining the actions
allows you to determine the specific goal of each individual module.
Drawing Abstracted Components

There are two methods you can use to diagram the abstractions of
higher level components—flowcharts and dataflow diagrams. The
following sections demonstrate using each method to diagram the theater
light control system.
Flowcharts
Flowcharts are a powerful way to organize ideas related to a piece of
software. Flowcharts should provide a good understanding of the
application flow. The block diagram programming paradigm used in
LabVIEW is easy to understand and similar to a flowchart. Many engineers
already use flowcharts to describe systems. The flowchart makes it easier to
convert the design into executable code.

The purpose of a flowchart is to divide the task into manageable pieces at

logical places. Start to design the VI hierarchy by breaking the problem into
logical pieces. Figure 2-1 shows a flowchart for the Play functionality in the
Theatre Light Controller.
Load
Cue
Wait
Wait Time No
Elapsed
Yes
Write Color and

Fade Each Update Front
Intensity to
Channel Panel
Each Channel
No Fade Time
Elapsed
Yes
Wait
Follow Time No
Elapsed
Yes
End
Figure 2-1. Flowchart of Play Function in the Theatre Light Control System

Dataflow Diagrams
Dataflow diagrams follow the paradigm of LabVIEW in that they represent
the flow of data through an application. Figure 2-2 shows the common
symbols used in dataflow diagrams.
1 2 3 4
1 Data Store 3 External Entity

2 Process 4 Data Flow
Figure 2-2. Dataflow Diagram Symbols
• Data store—Represents files or repositories in the system.

• Process—Accepts incoming data, processes the data, and generates
outgoing data.
• External entity—Represents items outside the system that the system
communicates with.
• Data flow—Indicates the flow of data.
Figure 2-3 shows a dataflow diagram for the Play functionality in the
Theatre Light Control System. Notice that the focus of a dataflow diagram
is the data. A dataflow diagram conceptualizes the system based on the flow
of data through the system, similar to the dataflow paradigm of LabVIEW.
Even though LabVIEW is a dataflow programming language, it is important
to spend time away from LabVIEW to design an appropriate system.
Light Control
System
Update Handle
Display Error Error
Channel Intensity
and Color Data
Follow Time
Fade Time
Wait Time
Load Wait Fade Follow Handle

Cue Data
Cue Time Time Time Error
Error Error Error Error
Data Data Data Data
Figure 2-3. Dataflow Diagram of Play Function in Theatre Light Controller

As you can see by the differences in the flowchart and the dataflow diagram
of the Play function in the Theatre Light Controller, the processes are
different. Nodes in the flowchart represent the functions to perform. Nodes
in the dataflow diagram represent the processes and the focus is on the flow
of data through the system. You can translate a dataflow diagram into a
LabVIEW block diagram.

Summary – Quiz
1. Match the document to its purpose:
Requirements Document a. Provides a common ground for the

programmer and the customer to
work from
Flow Chart b. Represents the flow of data through
an application
Data Flow Diagram c. Provides good understanding of
application flow
2. Match the application design concept with its definition:
Coupling a. Describing an application by

generalizing it and removing details
Cohesion b. Reliance of a code module upon
other code modules
Abstraction c. Focus of a code upon a single goal


1. Match the document to its purpose:
Requirements Document a. Provides a common ground for the

programmer and the customer to
work from
Flow Chart c. Provides good understanding of
application flow
Data Flow Diagram b. Represents the flow of data through
an application
2. Match the application design concept with its definition:
Coupling b. Reliance of a code module upon

other code modules
Cohesion c. Focus of a code upon a single goal
Abstraction a. Describing an application by
generalizing it and removing details

Notes

Designing the User Interface
3
Front panels must be well organized and easy to use because users see the
front panel first when working with a VI. When designing a front panel,
keep in mind two types of users—the end user and the developer. End users
work with user interface VIs, which have front panels that the end user sees.
Developers work with subVIs, which have front panels that only developers
see.
At the end of this lesson, you design a user interface for a software project
that you analyzed.
Topics
A. User Interface Design Issues
B. User Interface Layout Issues
C. Front Panel Prototyping
D. User Interface Examples
E. Localizing User Interfaces

Lesson 3 Designing the User Interface
A. User Interface Design Issues

When designing a front panel for a user interface, choose fonts, colors, and
graphics carefully to make the user interface more intuitive and easy to use.
Fonts and Text Characteristics

Limit the VI to the three standard fonts (application, system, and dialog)
unless you have a specific reason to use a different font. For example,
monospace fonts, which are fonts that are proportionally spaced, are useful
for string controls and indicators where the number of characters is critical.
Refer to the Text Characteristics topic in the LabVIEW Help for more
information about setting the default font, using custom fonts, and changing
the font style.
The actual font used for the three standard fonts (application, system, and
dialog) varies depending on the platform. For example, when working on
Windows, preferences and video driver settings affect the size of the fonts.
Text might appear larger or smaller on different systems, depending on these
factors. To compensate for this, allow extra space for larger fonts and enable
the Size to Text option on the shortcut menu.
Allow extra space between controls to prevent labels from overlapping

objects because of font changes on multiple platforms.
For example, if a label is to the left of an object, justify the label to the right
and leave some space to the left of the text. If you center a label over or under
an object, center the text of that label as well. Fonts are the least portable
aspect of the front panel so always test them on all target platforms.
Colors
Color can distract the user from important information. For instance, a
yellow, green, or bright orange background makes it difficult to see a red
danger light. Another problem is that some platforms do not have as many
colors available. Use a minimal number of colors, emphasizing black, white,
and gray. The following are some simple guidelines for using color:
• Never use color as the sole indicator of device state. People with some
degree of color-blindness can have problems detecting the change. Also,
multiplot graphs and charts can lose meaning when displayed in black
and white. Use lines for plot styles in addition to color.
• Consider coloring the pane backgrounds on the front panel background
and objects of user interface VIs with the system colors, or symbolic
colors, in the color picker. System colors adapt the appearance of the
front panel to the system colors of any computer that runs the VI.

• Use light gray, white, or pastel colors for backgrounds. The first row of
colors in the color picker contains less harsh colors suitable for front
panel backgrounds and normal controls. The second row of colors in the
color picker contains brighter colors you can use to highlight important
controls. Select bright, highlighting colors only when the item is
important, such as an error notification.
• Always check the VI for consistency on other platforms.
The top of the color picker contains a grayscale spectrum and a box you
can use to create transparent objects. The second spectrum contains
muted colors that are well suited to backgrounds and front panel objects.
The third spectrum contains colors that are well suited to highlights.
Figure 3-1 shows the color picker in LabVIEW.
1 2
1 Grayscale Spectrum 3 Muted Color Spectrum

2 Transparency Box 4 Highlight Color Spectrum
Figure 3-1. Color Picker
Keep these things in mind when designing a front panel. For most objects,
use complimentary neutral colors that vary primarily in their brightness. Use
highlight colors sparingly for objects such as plots, meter needles, company
logo, and so on.
Graphics
You can import graphics and text objects to use as front panel backgrounds,
items in picture rings, and parts of custom controls and indicators.
Check how the imported graphics look when you load the VI on another
platform. For example, a Macintosh PICT file that has an irregular shape
might convert to a rectangular bitmap with a white background on Windows
or Linux.
One disadvantage of using imported graphics is that they slow down screen
updates. Make sure you do not place indicators and controls on top of a
graphic object so that LabVIEW does not have to redraw the object each

time the indicator updates. If you must use a large background picture with
controls on top of it, divide the picture into several smaller objects and
import them separately because large graphics usually take longer to draw
than small ones.
B. User Interface Layout Issues

Consider the arrangement of controls on front panels. Keep front panels
simple to avoid confusing the user. For example, you can use menus to help
reduce clutter. For top-level VIs that users see, place the most important
controls in the most prominent positions. For subVI front panels, place the
controls and indicators of the subVI so that they correspond to the connector
pane pattern.
Keep inputs on the left and outputs on the right whenever possible to
minimize confusion on the part of the user. Use the Align Objects,
Distribute Objects, and Reorder Objects pull-down menus to create a
uniform layout.
Consider using the following tools and techniques to improve the layout of
user interface front panels.
Run-Time Menus
To help reduce clutter, use menus. You can create custom menus for every
VI you build, and you can configure VIs to show or hide menu bars.
Note Custom menus appear only while the VI runs.
You can build custom menus or modify the default LabVIEW menus
statically when you edit the VI or programmatically when you run the VI.
Static Menus
To add a custom menu bar to a VI rather than the default menu bar, select
Edit»Run-Time Menu and create a menu in the Menu Editor dialog box.
LabVIEW creates a run-time menu (.rtm) file. After you create and save
the .rtm file, you must maintain the same relative path between the VI and
the .rtm file. You also can create a custom run-time shortcut menu by
right-clicking a control and selecting Advanced»Run-Time Shortcut
Menu»Edit. This option opens the Shortcut Menu Editor. When the VI
runs, it loads the menu from the .rtm file.

Menu items can be the following three types:

• User Item—Allows you to enter new items that must be handled
programmatically on the block diagram. A user item has a name, which
is the string that appears on the menu, and a tag, which is a unique,
case-insensitive string identifier. The tag identifies the user item on the
block diagram. When you type a name, LabVIEW copies it to the tag.
You can edit the tag to be different from the name. For a menu item to
be valid, its tag must have a value. The Item Tag text box displays
question marks for invalid menu items. LabVIEW ensures that the tag is
unique to a menu hierarchy and appends numbers when necessary.
• Separator—Inserts a separation line on the menu. You cannot set any
attributes for this item.
• Application Item—Allows you to select default menu items. To insert
a menu item, select Application Item and follow the hierarchy to the
items you want to add. Add individual items or entire submenus.
LabVIEW handles application items automatically. These item tags do
not appear in block diagrams. You cannot alter the name, tag, or other
properties of an application item. LabVIEW reserves the prefix APP_ for
application item tags.
Click the blue + button, shown at left, on the toolbar to add more items to
the custom menu. Click the red X button, shown at left, to delete items. You
can arrange the menu hierarchy in the Menu Editor dialog box by clicking
the arrow buttons on the toolbar, using the hierarchy manipulation options
in the Edit menu, or by dragging and dropping.
Menu Selection Handling

Use the functions located on the top row of the Menu palette to handle menu
selections.
When you create a custom menu, you assign each menu item a unique,
case-insensitive string identifier called a tag. When the user selects a menu
item, you retrieve its tag programmatically using the Get Menu Selection
function. LabVIEW provides a handler on the block diagram for each menu
item based on the tag value of each menu item. The handler is a While Loop
and Case structure combination that allows you to determine which, if any,
menu is selected and to execute the appropriate code.
After you build a custom menu, build a Case structure on the block diagram
that executes, or handles, each item in the custom menu. This process is
called menu selection handling. LabVIEW handles all application items
implicitly.
Use the Get Menu Selection and Enable Menu Tracking functions to define
what actions to take when users select each menu item.

Run-Time Shortcut Menus

You can customize the run-time shortcut menu for each control you include
in a VI. To customize a shortcut menu, right-click a control and select
Advanced»Run-Time Shortcut Menu»Edit from the shortcut menu to
display the Shortcut Menu Editor dialog box. Use the Shortcut Menu
Editor dialog box to associate the default shortcut menu or a customized
shortcut menu file (.rtm) with the control. You can customize shortcut
menus programmatically.
You also can add shortcut menus to front panels. To add a shortcut menu to
the front panel, use the Shortcut Menu Activation and Shortcut Menu
Selection pane events.
You also can disable the run-time shortcut menu on a control.
Note Custom run-time shortcut menus appear only while the VI runs.
Decorations
Use decorations, such as a Raised Box or Horizontal Smooth Box, to
visually group objects with related functions.
.
2
1
1 System Recessed Frames 2 Free Labels
Figure 3-2. Using Decorations to Visually Group Objects

Tab Controls
Use tab controls to overlap front panel controls and indicators in a smaller
area. A tab control consists of pages and tabs. Place front panel objects on
each page of a tab control and use the tab as the selector for displaying
different pages.
Tab controls are useful when you have several front panel objects that are
used together or during a specific phase of operation. For example, you
might have a VI that requires the user to first configure several settings
before a test can start, then allows the user to modify aspects of the test as it
progresses, and finally allows the user to display and store only pertinent
data.
On the block diagram, the tab control is an enumerated type control.

Terminals for controls and indicators placed on the tab control appear as any
other block diagram terminal.
The NI Example Finder, shown in Figure 3-3, is a VI that uses tab controls
to organize the user interface.
Figure 3-3. NI Example Finder

Subpanel Controls
Use the subpanel control to display the front panel of another VI on the front
panel of the current VI. For example, you can use a subpanel control to
design a user interface that behaves like a wizard. Place the Back and Next
buttons on the front panel of the top-level VI and use a subpanel control to
load different front panels for each step of the wizard.
Note You can create and edit subpanel controls only in the LabVIEW Full and
Professional Development Systems. If a VI contains a subpanel control, you can run the
VI in all LabVIEW packages, but you cannot configure the control in the Base Package.
Figure 3-4 shows an example of a VI that uses a subpanel control.
Figure 3-4. VI with Subpanel Control
Refer to the Front Panel Controls and Indicators topic in the LabVIEW
Help for more information about subpanel controls.
Tree Controls
Use the tree control to give users a hierarchical list of items from which to
select. You organize the items you enter in the tree control into groups of
items, or nodes. Click the expand symbol next to a node to expand it and
display all the items in that node. You also click the symbol next to the node
to collapse the node.
Note You can create and edit tree controls only in the LabVIEW Full and Professional
Development Systems. If a VI contains a tree control, you can run the VI in all LabVIEW
packages, but you cannot configure the control in the Base Package.

Figure 3-4 shows an example of a VI that uses a tree control.
Figure 3-5. VI with Tree Control
Help for more information about tree controls.
Scroll Bar Controls

Scroll bar controls are numeric objects you can use to scroll data. The scroll
bar controls include vertical and horizontal scroll bars. Change the value of
a scroll bar by using the Operating tool to click or drag the square scroll box
to a new position, by clicking the increment and decrement arrows, or by
clicking the spaces between the scroll box and the arrows.
Help for more information about scroll bar controls.
Splitter Bars and Panes

You can use splitter bars to create professional user interfaces on the front
panel, such as toolbars or status bars. You can create a splitter bar to separate
the front panel into multiple regions, called panes. Each pane acts similarly
to a unique front panel. Each pane has its own set of pane coordinates and

you can scroll each pane individually. Each pane has its own set of controls
and indicators on it. The splitter bar separates the controls on one pane from
those on another pane, yet the terminals for all controls are on the same
block diagram.
Refer to the Creating Splitter Bars and Panes topic in LabVIEW Help for
more information about split pane containers. Refer to the Creating Custom
Toolbars section of Exercise 3-1 for an example that uses the split pane
container to create a toolbar.
Transparent Front Panels

You can use the Front Panel Window:Transparency property to set the
window transparency while the VI is running. The level of transparency is a
percentage where 0 is opaque and 100 is invisible. This property returns an
error if you specify a value outside the range of 0 to 100.
Refer to the Front Panel Window:Transparency Property topic in the

LabVIEW Help for more information about the Front Panel
Window:Transparency property.
Drag and Drop

You can drag and drop items from one VI or control to another VI or control.
Dragging items from VI to VI and control to control are built-in LabVIEW
behaviors for string, tree, listbox, and multicolumn listbox controls. You can
configure drag and drop events for other controls programmatically by using
the Start Drag method and the control events. You also can use drag and drop
events to configure the behavior of a drag on controls programmatically.
This feature is useful if you want to allow the user to drag one element of a
listbox to another listbox.
Refer to the Dragging and Dropping in LabVIEW topic in the LabVIEW

Help for more information about drag and drop.
Refer to the labview\examples\general\dragdrop directory for

examples using the drag and drop operation.
Sizing and Positioning

Front panels need to fit on a monitor that is the standard resolution for most
intended users. Make the window as small as possible without crowding
controls or sacrificing a clear layout. If the VIs are for in-house use and
everyone is using high-resolution display settings, you can design large
front panels. If you are doing commercial development, keep in mind that
some displays have a limited resolution, especially LCD displays and
touchscreens.

Front panels should open in the upper-left corner of the screen for the
convenience of users with small screens. Place sets of VIs that are often
opened together so the user can see at least a small part of each. Place front
panels that open automatically in the center of the screen. Centering the
front panels makes the VI easier to read for users on monitors of various
sizes. Use the VI Properties dialog box to customize the window appearance
and size.
Labels and Captions

Effective use of labels and captions can improve the ease of use of user
interface front panels.
Labels
The name of a control or indicator should describe its function. If the control
is visible to the user, use captions to display a long description and add a
short label to prevent using valuable space on the block diagram. For
example, when you label a ring control or slide control that has options for
volts, ohms, or amperes, select an intuitive name for the control. A caption
such as “Select units for display” is a better choice than “V/O/A”. Use
Property Nodes to change captions programmatically.
Use consistent capitalization, and include default values and unit

information in label names. For example, if a control sets the high limit
temperature and has a default value of 75 °F, name the control high limit
temperature (75 degF). If you will use the VI with the control on multiple
platforms, avoid using special characters in control names. For example, use
degF instead of °F, because the ° symbol might not display correctly on
other platforms.
For Boolean controls, use the name to give an indication of which state
(TRUE or FALSE) corresponds to the function (for example, ON) and
indicate the default state in parenthesis. For checkboxes and radio buttons,
the user can click the Boolean text of the control and the value of the
Boolean control changes. Free labels next to a Boolean control can help
clarify the meaning of each position on a switch. For example, use free
labels like Cancel, Reset, and Initialize that describe the action taken.
The Context Help window displays labels as part of the connector pane. If
the default value is essential information, place the value in parentheses next
to the name in the label. Include the units of the value if applicable.
The Required, Recommended, Optional setting for connector pane

terminals affects the appearance of the inputs and outputs in the Context
Help window.

Give each control a reasonable default value, which allows the example to
run without the user modifying its value whenever possible. All default
values and/or units should be added to the label in parentheses, if
appropriate, as shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6. Labels with Units and Default Values
Captions
Front panel objects also can have captions. Right-click the object and select
Visible Items»Caption from the shortcut menu to display the caption. You
can use captions instead of labels to localize a VI without breaking the VI.
Unlike a label, a caption does not affect the name of the object, and you can
use it as a more descriptive object label. The caption appears only on the
front panel.
If you assign the object to a connector pane terminal, the caption appears in
a tip strip when you use the Wiring tool to move the cursor over the terminal
on the block diagram. The caption also appears next to the terminal in the
Context Help window if you move the cursor over the connector pane or VI
icon.
Captions are useful for providing detailed descriptions when the label text
needs to be concise or for providing concise descriptions when the label text
needs to be more detailed. Captions also are useful when creating localized
versions of an application.
Paths versus Strings

When specifying the location of a file or directory, use a path control or
indicator. Path controls and indicators work similarly to strings, but
LabVIEW formats paths using the standard syntax for the platform you are
using. Set the browse options appropriately for the Browse button of path
controls. For example, if the user needs to select a directory, select the
Folders only and Existing only options on the Browse Options page of the
Path Properties dialog box.
Use a path constant and the path data type to supply a constant path value to
the block diagram. The path constant and data type use the platform-specific
notation for paths, unlike the string constant and data type.

Default Values and Ranges

Expect the user to supply invalid values for numeric controls. Right-click
the control and select Data Entry to set the control item to coerce invalid
values into a desired range: Minimum, Maximum, and Increment.
A VI should not fail when run with default values. Do not set default values
of indicators like graphs, arrays, and strings without a good reason because
that wastes disk space when saving the VI.
Use default values intelligently. In the case of many File I/O VIs and
functions, such as the Write to Spreadsheet File VI, the default is an empty
path that forces the VI to display a file dialog box. This can save the use of
a Boolean switch in many cases.
You can handle difficult situations programmatically. Many GPIB

instruments limit the permissible settings of one control based on the
settings of another. For example, a voltmeter might permit a range setting of
2,000 V for DC but only 1,000 V for AC. If the affected controls like Range
and Mode reside in the same VI, place the interlock logic there.
Key Navigation
Some users prefer to use the keyboard instead of a mouse. In some
environments, such as a manufacturing plant, only a keyboard is available.
Consider including keyboard shortcuts for VIs even if the use of a mouse is
available because keyboard shortcuts add convenience to a VI.
Pay attention to the key navigation options for objects on the front panel and
set the tabbing order for the objects to read left to right and top to bottom.
Set the <Enter> key as the keyboard shortcut for the front panel default
control, which is usually the OK button. However, if you have a multiline
string control on the front panel, you might not want to use the <Enter> key
as a shortcut.
If the front panel has a Cancel button, set the <Esc> key to be the keyboard
shortcut. You also can use function keys as navigation buttons to move from
screen to screen. If you do this, be sure to use the shortcuts consistently.
Select Edit»Set Tabbing Order to arrange controls in a logical sequence
when the user needs to tab between the controls. For controls that are
offscreen, use the Key Navigation tab of the Properties dialog box to skip
over the controls when tabbing or to hide the controls.
Also consider using the key focus property to set the focus
programmatically to a specific control when the front panel opens.

Front Panel Object Styles

You can choose controls and objects from different palettes when you build
a user interface. Figure 3-7 shows three examples of the same user interface,
each built using controls and objects from different palettes.
Front panel controls and indicators can appear in modern, classic, or system
style.
Many front panel objects have a high-color appearance. Set the monitor to
display at least 16-bit color for optimal appearance of the objects.
The controls and indicators located on the Modern palette also have
corresponding low-color objects. Use the controls and indicators located on
the Classic palette to create VIs for 256-color and 16-color monitor settings.
The first example in Figure 3-7 uses controls from the Modern palette. The
second example in Figure 3-7 uses controls from the Classic palette. You
also can use Classic controls for VIs that require an efficient user interface.
1 2 3
1 User Interface Built Using Modern Controls 3 User Interface Built Using System Controls
2 User Interface Built Using Classic Controls
Figure 3-7. User Interface Control Styles
Use the system controls and indicators located on the System palette in
dialog boxes you create. The system controls and indicators are designed
specifically for use in dialog boxes and include ring and spin controls,
numeric slides, progress bars, scroll bars, listboxes, tables, string and path
controls, tab controls, tree controls, buttons, checkboxes, radio buttons, and
an opaque label that automatically matches the background color of its

parent. These controls differ from those that appear on the front panel only
in terms of appearance. These controls appear in the colors you have set up
for the system.
The system controls change appearance depending on which platform you

run the VI. When you run the VI on a different platform, the system controls
adapt their color and appearance to match the standard dialog box controls
for that platform.
Use the System controls palette to create user interfaces that look more
professional, as shown in the third example in Figure 3-7.
C. Front Panel Prototyping

Front panel prototypes provide insight into the organization of the program.
Assuming the program is user-interface intensive, you can attempt to create
a mock interface that represents what the user sees.
Avoid implementing block diagrams in the early stages of creating

prototypes so you do not fall into the code and fix trap. Instead, create only
the front panels. As you create buttons, listboxes, and rings, think about
what needs to happen as the user makes selections. Ask yourself questions
such as the following:
• Should the button lead to another front panel?
• Should some controls on the front panel be hidden and replaced by other
controls?
If new options are presented, follow those ideas by creating new front panels
to illustrate the results. This kind of prototyping helps to define the
requirements for a project and gives you a better idea of its scope.
Systems with many user interface requirements are perfect for prototyping.
Determining the method you use to display data or prompt the user for
settings is difficult on paper. Instead, consider designing VI front panels
with the controls and indicators you need. Leave the block diagram empty
and figure out how the controls work and how various actions require other
front panels. For more extensive prototypes, tie the front panels together.
However, do not get carried away with this process.
If you are bidding on a project for a client, using front panel prototypes is an
extremely effective way to discuss with the client how you can satisfy his or
her requirements. Because you can add and remove controls quickly,
especially if the block diagrams are empty, you help customers clarify
requirements.

Limit the amount of time you spend prototyping before you begin. Time
limits help to avoid overdoing the prototyping phase. As you incorporate
changes, update the requirements and the current design.
D. User Interface Examples

Without proper planning, it is easy to produce a user interface that does not
incorporate good front panel design. Figure 3-8 shows an example of a
poorly designed user interface.
Figure 3-8. Poorly Designed User Interface
Figure 3-9 shows the same user interface with several improvements, such
as reduced use of color, regrouped controls, fewer labels, knobs instead of
sliders, and rearranged objects.

Figure 3-9. Improved User Interface
E. Localizing User Interfaces

The Microsoft Developer Network defines localization as the process of
creating an application that can be used in a different locale and culture1.
Localization can be an important consideration when creating an application
because many applications are used worldwide. Even though you might not
immediately localize an application, consider the possibility that the
application will be used in a different region or locale in the future. When an
application is translated to another language, often a brute force translation
technique is used to convert all the strings on the front panel to a different
language. Use the following guidelines to make localization easier:
• Leave space for localization. Allow for at least 30% growth in short
strings and 15% growth for long sentences.
• Do not hardcode user interface strings on the block diagram. Try to
move string constants to string controls on the front panel and hide them.
• Avoid using non-international symbols and icons in a VI.
• Avoid using text in icons whenever possible so you do not need to
localize the icons.
• Avoid using bitmaps in a VI so you do not need to localize any text in
the bitmaps.
• Use a label to define the name of a control but always make the caption
visible. Use the caption as the label for a control because you can change
captions programmatically.
Refer to the Porting and Localizing VIs topic in the LabVIEW Help for more
information about localizing VIs.
1. Microsoft Corporation, Localization Planning, 2003, msdn.microsoft.com, MSDN.

Job Aid
Use the following checklist to ensure that your user interface follows good
user interface design principles.
Front Panel Style Checklist

❑ Give controls meaningful labels and captions.
❑ Ensure the background of control and indicator labels are transparent.
❑ Check for consistent placement of control labels.
❑ Use standard, consistent fonts—application, system, and

dialog—throughout all front panels.
❑ Use Size to Text for all text for portability and add carriage returns if
necessary.
❑ Use path controls instead of string controls to specify the location of

files or directories.
❑ Write descriptions and create tip strips for controls and indicators,
including array, cluster, and refnum elements.
❑ Remember that if you copy the object to another VI, you also copy the
description. You might need to change the description for the new
object.
❑ Arrange controls logically.
❑ Group and arrange controls attractively.
❑ Do not overlap controls with other controls, with their label, digital
display, or other objects unless you want to achieve a special effect.
Overlapped controls slow down screen updates and can make the control
or indicator flicker.
❑ Use color logically, sparingly, and consistently, if at all.
❑ Provide a stop button if necessary. Do not use the Abort button to stop
a VI. Hide the Abort button.
❑ Use ring controls and enumerated type controls where appropriate. If

you are using a Boolean control for two options, consider using an
enumerated type control instead to allow for future expansion of
options.

❑ Use type definitions for common controls, especially for enumerated

type controls and data structures.
❑ Make sure all the controls on the front panel are of the same style. For
example, do not use both classic and modern controls on the same front
panel.

Exercise 3-1 User-Interface Design Techniques

Goal
Learn techniques you can use to create professional user interfaces in
LabVIEW.
Description
LabVIEW includes features that allow you to create professional user
interfaces. Learn techniques to remove borders from clusters, create custom
cursors, create custom toolbars, and use the transparency property to
enhance the user’s experience with your application.
Implementation
Removing Cluster Borders
Clusters group data elements of mixed types. However, sometimes you do
not want the user to know that you have organized the data into a cluster. The
clusters on the Modern palette visually indicate that the data is stored in a
container, while it is relatively easy to set up clusters on the Classic palette
to hide that data is organized in a cluster.
1. Open a blank VI.
2. Create a cluster from the Classic palette and make the borders of the
cluster transparent.
Tip If the Controls palette is not visible on the front panel, select View»Controls
Palette to display the palette.
Tip You can use the Search button to find controls, VIs or functions. On the Controls
or Functions palette, click the Search button on the palette toolbar. In the text field at the
top of the search dialog, start typing the name of the control, VI, or function you want to
find. As you type, the listbox shows all possible matches. When you find the control, VI,
or function you are looking for, double-click its name. This opens the palette where the
control, VI, or function is located and flashes the icon whose name you just
double-clicked.
❑ Place a cluster from the Classic palette on the front panel.
❑ Click a blank area of the front panel with the Get Color tool to copy
the color of the front panel to the foreground and background colors
used by the Set Color tool.
Tip If the Tools palette is not visible on the front panel, select View»Tools Palette to
display the palette.

❑ Select the Set Color tool. In the bottom box, select the color block
that is appears to be laying on top of the other. This is the foreground
color block. Clicking it opens the color picker.
❑ Click the T in the upper right corner of the color picker to change the
foreground color to transparent.
❑ Click the border of the cluster with the Set Color tool as shown in
Figure 3-10. Notice that the cluster border disappears.
Figure 3-10. Set Transparent Cluster Borders
You also can use this technique with other Classic controls. The
Classic controls are easier to modify and customize than Modern
controls.
To make the border of a Modern control transparent, select the Set

Color tool and right-click on the border of the control to open the
color picker. With the color picker open, press the space bar to
toggle the color selection to the foreground. Click the T in the upper
right corner of the color picker to change the foreground color to
transparent.
3. Close this VI. Do not save changes.
Creating Custom Cursors

You can change the appearance of the cursor on the front panel of a VI.
LabVIEW provides tools that allow you to use system cursors, or even
define your own custom cursors. Changing the appearance of the cursor in
your application provides visual cues to the user on the status of the
application. For example, if your application is busy processing data you can
programmatically set the cursor to busy while the processing occurs to let
the user know that the application is processing. Create a simple VI to test
the cursor functionality.

1. Create a VI that contains a While Loop and the Set Cursor VI to change
the appearance of the cursor as shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11. VI to Change the Cursor
❑ Open a blank VI.
❑ Place a While Loop from the Structures palette on the block

diagram.
❑ Create a Stop button on the front panel and wire it to the loop
conditional terminal of the While Loop.
❑ Place a Wait (ms) function inside the While Loop, and set the Wait
(ms) function to a reasonable wait amount, such as 100 ms.
❑ Place the Set Cursor VI from the Cursor palette inside the While
Loop.
❑ Right-click the icon input of the Set Cursor VI and select Create»
Control from the shortcut menu.
2. Switch to the front panel and run the VI.
❑ Change the icon in the icon ring while the VI runs.
3. Stop and close the VI. Do not save changes.
Creating Custom Toolbars

Many professional applications include custom toolbars. Providing a
toolbar in your application increases the usability of your application. You
can use a splitter bar to create a custom toolbar.
To create a toolbar at the top of your VI, place a horizontal splitter bar on
the front panel and place a set of controls in the upper pane. When you use
a splitter bar to create a toolbar, lock the splitter bar in position and turn off
scrollbars for the upper pane. To configure the splitter bar, set the splitter to
Splitter Sticks Top and set the scrollbars of the upper pane to Always Off.

You also can paint the pane and resize the splitter so that it blends seamlessly
with the menu bar. You can scroll the scrollbars of the lower pane or split the
lower pane further without affecting the controls on the toolbar.
Figure 3-12 shows examples of custom toolbars.
Figure 3-12. Custom Toolbar Examples
Complete the following steps to implement the simple custom toolbar

Figure 3-13. Custom Toolbar for Word Processor
1. Open a blank VI.
2. Place a Horizontal Splitter Bar from the Containers palette on the front
panel. Position the splitter bar near the top of the VI. Leave enough
space above the bar to place the menu controls.
3. To turn off the scrollbars, right-click the splitter bar and select Always
Off from the Upper Pane»Horizontal Scrollbar and Upper Pane»
Vertical Scrollbar shortcut menus.
4. To change the style of the splitter bar to system, right-click the splitter
bar and select Splitter Style»System from the shortcut menu.
5. To add controls to the pane above the splitter bar, place the toolbar
controls located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\
User Interface Design Techniques\Toolbar Controls
directory in the upper pane created by the splitter bar.
6. Rearrange the controls and color the splitter bar to look like a toolbar.
❑ Hide the labels on the controls.
❑ Use the Align Objects and Distribute Objects buttons on the

toolbar to align the controls.

❑ Color the background of the pane to blend the controls into the
panel.
– Click the background color block of the Set Color tool to open
the color picker.
– Click the More Colors button in the bottom right corner of the
color picker to open the Color dialog box.
– Enter the following values and click OK to set the background
color:
Red: 231
Green: 223
Blue: 231
7. To lock the splitter bar so that the user cannot move it, right-click the
splitter bar and make sure Locked is checked in the shortcut menu.
8. Close the VI. Do not save changes.
Creating Transparent Controls

Using transparency with controls can add a professional touch to the user
interface. Modify an existing VI that uses a Tank indicator to display fluid
levels. To obtain the current value of the Tank, the user must click the Tank.
To modify this VI, place a Boolean control on top of the Tank indicator and
change the colors of the Boolean control to transparent.
1. Add a Boolean button to the existing Tank Value VI.
❑ Open Tank Value.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\User Interface Design Techniques
directory.
❑ Place a Flat Square button from the Classic palette on top of the
Tank, and resize the control to fit completely on top of the Tank.
2. Modify the button to make it transparent.
❑ Change the True and False color of the button to transparent by using
the Set Color tool.
❑ Click the button with the Operate Value tool to verify that the button
is transparent whether it is True or False.

3. Insert a Case structure into the While Loop so the Tank Value indicator
updates only when the button on top of the tank is True, as shown in
Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Tank Value Modification
❑ Place a Case structure inside the While Loop to enclose the Tank
Value indicator.
❑ Wire the Boolean control to the case selector terminal of the Case
structure.
❑ Leave the False case empty.
4. Run the VI and test the behavior of the VI when you click the Tank
indicator.
5. Stop and close the VI.
End of Exercise 3-1

Summary – Quiz
1. Which of the following control types is NOT suited to improving
organization on the front panel?
a. Subpanel control
b. Tab control
c. Boolean button
2. Which of the following guidelines should be followed to make

localization easier?
a. Leave space for localization
b. Avoid using text in icons
c. Avoid using non-international symbols and icons
d. All of the above


1. Which of the following control types is NOT suited to improving
organization on the front panel?
a. Subpanel control
b. Tab control
c. Boolean button
2. Which of the following guidelines should be followed to make

localization easier?
a. Leave space for localization
b. Avoid using text in icons
c. Avoid using non-international symbols and icons
d. All of the above

Notes

Designing the Project
4
Producing a software design is the next step in developing an application.
Proper design of an application ensures that you develop an application that
is scalable, readable, and maintainable. Proper design also ensures that the
user interface is intuitive and easy to use. At the end of this lesson, you
design a software implementation for the software project that you
analyzed.
Topics
A. Design Patterns
B. Event-Based Design Patterns
C. Advanced Event-Based Design Patterns
D. Creating a Hierarchical Architecture
E. Using the LabVIEW Project and Project Libraries
F. Choosing Data Types
G. Information Hiding
H. Designing Error Handling Strategies

Lesson 4 Designing the Project
A. Design Patterns
To take the first step in choosing a scalable architecture, explore the
architectures that exist within LabVIEW. Architectures are essential for
creating a successful software. The most common architectures are usually
grouped into design patterns.
As a design pattern gains acceptance, it becomes easier to recognize when a

VI uses a design pattern. VIs that use design patterns can be easier to read
and modify.
There are many design patterns available for LabVIEW. Most applications
use at least one design pattern. Select File»New to open the New dialog box
and access VI templates based on common design patterns. The LabVIEW
Basics II: Development Practices course explores some of the basic design
patterns you can use in LabVIEW, which are summarized in the following
sections.
Simple VI Design Pattern

The simple VI design pattern usually does not require a specific start or stop
action from the user. The user just clicks the Run button. Use the simple VI
design pattern for simple applications or for functional components within
larger applications. You can convert simple VIs into subVIs that you use as
building blocks for larger applications.
Figure 4-1 shows the block diagram of the Determine Warnings VI from the
LabVIEW Basics I: Introduction course. This VI performs a single task: it
determines what warning to output dependent on a set of inputs. You can use
this VI as a subVI whenever you want to determine the warning level instead
of rebuilding the block diagram every time you perform the conversion.
Figure 4-1. Simple VI Design Pattern

General VI Design Pattern

Applications you design generally have the following main phases:
Startup—Initializes hardware, reads configuration information from files,

or prompts the user for data file locations.
Main Application—Repeats an action in a loop until the user exits the

program, or the program terminates for other reasons such as I/O
completion.
Shutdown—Closes files, writes configuration information to disk, or resets

I/O to the default state.
Figure 4-2 shows the general VI design pattern.
Figure 4-2. General VI Design Pattern
The error clusters control the execution order of the three sections. The Wait
function prevents the loop from running continuously, especially if the loop
monitors user input on the front panel. Continuous loops can use all of the
computer system resources. The Wait function forces the loop to run
asynchronously even if you specify a wait of 0 milliseconds. If
the operations inside the main loop react to user inputs, increase the wait to
100–200 ms because most users do not detect that amount of delay between
clicking a button on the front panel and the resulting action.

State Machine Design Pattern

The state machine design pattern is one of the most recognized and useful
design patterns for LabVIEW. Use the state machine design pattern to
implement any algorithm that can be explicitly described by a state diagram
or flowchart, such as a diagnostic routine or a process monitor.
Use state machines in applications that contain distinguishable states, such

as a user interface or a process test. User input or in-state calculation
determines which state to go to next. An application based on the state
machine design pattern often has an initialization state, a default state, and
a shutdown state. The actions performed in the default state can depend on
previous and current inputs and states. The shutdown state performs clean
up actions.
In a user interface state machine, different user actions send the user
interface into different processing segments. Each processing segment acts
as a state in the state machine and can lead to another segment or wait for
another user action.
For a process test state machine, each state represents a segment of the
process. The test result of a state determines the next state. State transitions
can occur continually, providing an in-depth analysis of a process.
State Machine Infrastructure

A state machine in LabVIEW consists of the following block diagram
components:
• While Loop—Continually executes the various states
• Case Structure—Contains a case for each state and the code to execute
for each state
• Shift Register—Contains state transition information
• State Functionality Code—Implements the function of the state
• Transition Code—Determines the next state in the sequence

Figure 4-3 shows the basic structure of a state machine implemented in

LabVIEW for a temperature data acquisition system.
1 While Loop 2 Shift Register 3 Case Structure
Figure 4-3. Basic Infrastructure of a LabVIEW State Machine
The While Loop implements the flow of the state transition diagram. Cases
in the Case structure represent individual states. A shift register on the While
Loop keeps track of the current state and communicates the current state to
the Case structure input.
Queued Message Handler Design Pattern

Use the queued message handler to implement code for a user interface. The
queued message handler queues messages and then handles messages
one-by-one in the order that they exist in the queue. Each subdiagram in the
queued message handler represents a handling routine.

The queued message handler design pattern consists of a While Loop, an

internal Case structure, and a shift register on the While Loop that holds the
queued messages, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4. Queued Message Handler
For each message that might be sent, the Case structure contains one case
with appropriate code to handle the message. The Case structure also can
have a default case that queues new events if the queue is empty.
Each iteration of the While Loop removes the top message from the queue
and runs the proper handling subdiagram in the Case structure. Handlers
that have a Default or No Event case execute this code when the queue is
empty. The While Loop terminates when the Exit message reaches the top
of the queue.

Remember the following key points when using the queued message
handler design pattern:
• Always terminate the While Loop by checking the latest message rather
than by polling a control. Checking the latest message allows you to
execute any necessary cleanup code before shutting down the main
While Loop.
• Although you can generate new messages inside the handler code for a
message, it is possible to generate an infinite cascade of messages,
which would effectively hang the user interface. A good guideline is to
require that messages generated by handler code never generate new
messages of their own.
Parallel Loop Design Pattern

For applications that require the program to respond to and run several tasks
concurrently, you can assign a different loop to each task in the main section
of the application. For example, you might have a different loop for each
button on the front panel and for every other kind of task, such as a menu
selection, I/O trigger, and so on. Figure 4-5 shows the parallel loop VI
design pattern.
Figure 4-5. Parallel Loop Design Pattern
Use the parallel loop design pattern for simple menu VIs where you expect
a user to select from one of several buttons that perform different actions.
You can handle multiple, simultaneous, independent processes and
responding to one action does not prevent the VI from responding to another
action. For example, if a user clicks a button that displays a dialog box,
parallel loops can continue to respond to I/O tasks.

The parallel loop VI design pattern requires you to coordinate and

communicate among different loops. You cannot use wires to pass data
between loops because doing so prevents the loops from running in parallel.
Instead, you must use a messaging technique for passing information among
processes. This can lead to race conditions where multiple tasks attempt to
read and modify the same data simultaneously resulting in inconsistent
behavior that is difficult to debug.
Master/Slave Design Pattern

Use the master/slave design pattern to run two or more processes
simultaneously and pass messages among the processes. The master/slave
pattern consists of multiple parallel loops. Each of the loops may execute
tasks at different rates. One loop acts as the master, and the other loops act
as slaves. The master loop controls all the slave loops and communicates
with them using messaging architectures as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6. Master/Slave Design Pattern
Use the master/slave pattern to respond to user interface controls while

simultaneously collecting data. VIs that involve control also benefit from
the use of master/slave design patterns.
The master/slave design pattern separates the data flow of the block diagram
into independent processes and uses globally available shared data to
synchronize data transfer among loops. However, using a global variable to
transfer data among the master and slave loops breaks the LabVIEW
dataflow paradigm, allows for race conditions, and incurs more overhead
than passing the data by wire.

Use a notifier to pass data from the master to the slave to remove any issues
with race conditions. Using notifiers improves synchronization because the
master and slave are timed when data is available. Figure 4-7 shows the
master/slave design pattern using notifiers.
Figure 4-7. Master/Slave Design Pattern Using Notifiers
Using notifiers in the master/slave design pattern results in the following

benefits:
• Both loops are synchronized to the master loop. The slave loop only
executes when the master loop sends a notification.
• You can use notifiers to create globally available data. Thus, it is
possible to send data with a notification.
• Using notifiers creates efficient code. There is no need to use polling to
determine when data is available from the master loop.
With a master/slave design pattern, make sure that no two While Loops
write to the same shared data.
The slave loop should not take too long to respond to the master. If the slave
is processing a signal from the master and the master sends more than one
message to the slave, the slave only receives the latest message. Use a
master/slave design pattern only if you are certain that each slave task
executes faster than the master loop.

Producer/Consumer (Data) Design Pattern

The producer/consumer (data) design pattern enhances data sharing among
multiple loops running at different rates. There are two categories of parallel
loops in the producer/consumer (data) design pattern—those that produce
data and those that consume the data. Data queues communicate data among
the loops. The data queues also buffer data among the producer and
consumer loops.
Use the producer/consumer (data) design pattern to acquire multiple sets of

data that must be processed in order, for example, a VI that accepts data
while processing the data sets in the order they are received. Queuing
(producing) the data occurs much faster than the data can be processed
(consumed). The producer/consumer (data) design pattern queues the data
in the producer loop and processes the data in the consumer loop as shown
in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8. Producer/Consumer (Data) Design Pattern
The consumer loop processes the data at its own pace, while the producer
loop continues to queue additional data. You also can use the
producer/consumer (data) design pattern to create a VI to analyze network
communication where two processes operate at the same time and at
different speeds. The first process constantly polls the network line and
retrieves packets. The second process analyzes the packets retrieved by the

first process. The first process acts as the producer because it supplies data
to the second process, which acts as the consumer. The parallel producer and
consumer loops handle the retrieval and analysis of data off the network, and
the queued communication between the two loops allows buffering of the
network packets retrieved.
B. Event-Based Design Patterns

Event-based design patterns provide efficiency gains because they only
respond when an event occurs. When LabVIEW executes the Event
structure, the VI that contains the Event structure sleeps until a registered
event occurs, or generates. When a registered event generates, the Event
structure automatically wakes up and executes the appropriate subdiagram
to handle the event.
User Interface Event Handler Design Pattern

The user interface event handler design pattern provides a powerful and
efficient architecture for handling user interaction with LabVIEW. Use the
user interface event handler to detect when a user changes the value of a
control, moves or clicks the mouse, or presses a key.
Because the event handler loop wakes up precisely when an event occurs
and sleeps in between events, you do not have to poll or read control values
repeatedly in order to detect when a user clicks a button. The user interface
event handler allows you to minimize processor use without sacrificing
interactivity.
The standard user interface event handler template consists of an Event

structure contained in a While Loop, as shown in Figure 4-9. Configure the
Event structure with one case to respond to each category of event you want
to detect. Each event case contains the handling code that executes
immediately after an event occurs.

1 Event Structure 3 Timeout Terminal

2 While Loop 4 Event Data Node
Figure 4-9. User Interface Event Handler Design Pattern
A common problem when using the user interface event handler is that it
computes the While Loop termination before the Event structure executes.
This can cause the While Loop to iterate one more time than desired. To
avoid this situation, compute the While Loop termination within all your
event handling code.
The event handler code must execute quickly, generally within 200 ms.
Anything slower can seem like the user interface is locked up. Also, if the
event handler code takes a long time to execute, the Event structure might
lock. By default, the front panel locks while an event is handled. You can
disable front panel locking for each event case to make the user interface
more responsive. However, any new events that are generated while an event
is being handled will not be handled immediately. So, the user interface will
still be unresponsive.
Any code that is in an event case cannot be shared with another Event
structure. You must utilize good code design when using the Event structure.
Modularize code that will be shared between multiple Event structure cases.
The Event structure includes a Timeout event. If you set a Timeout of

200 ms, the Timeout event case executes every 200 ms in the absence of
other events. You can use the Timeout event to perform critical timing in
your code.

Producer/Consumer (Events) Design Pattern

One of the most versatile and flexible design patterns combines the
producer/consumer and user interface event handler design patterns.
A VI built using the producer/consumer (events) pattern responds to the
user interface asynchronously, allowing the user interface to continuously
respond to the user. The consumer loop of this pattern responds as events
occur, similar to the consumer loop of the producer/consumer (data) design
pattern.
The producer/consumer (events) design pattern uses the same

implementation as the producer/consumer (data) design pattern except the
producer loop uses an Event structure to respond to user interface events, as
shown in Figure 4-10. The Event structure enables continuous response to
user interaction.
Figure 4-10. Producer/Consumer (Events) Design Pattern
Figure 4-10 shows how you can use Synchronization VIs and functions to
add functionality to the design pattern. Queues have the ability to transfer
any data type. The data type transferred in Figure 4-10 is a string. A string
is not the most efficient data type for passing data in design patterns. A more
efficient data type for passing data in design patterns is a cluster consisting
of an enumerated type control and a variant.

C. Advanced Event-Based Design Patterns

The producer/consumer (events) design pattern efficiently passes messages
from the producer loop to the consumer loop. But what if you want the
consumer loop to send a message to the producer loop? For example, if an
error occurs in the consumer loop, you might need to send a message to the
producer loop about the error. Also, you might want to use the event
handling mechanism in the producer loop to modify the behavior of the
program at run time from the consumer loop. You can add user events to
event-based design patterns to provide advanced functionality and
flexibility. For example, you can define a user event that triggers an event in
the producer loop Event structure from anywhere in the application, as
Producer
User
Queue
Event
Consumer
Figure 4-11. Producer/Consumer Messaging with User Events
This section describes user events and how to use them to create advanced
event-based design patterns.
User Events
You programmatically can create and name your own events, called user
events, to carry user-defined data. Like queues and notifiers, user events
allow different parts of an application to communicate asynchronously. You
can handle both user interface and programmatically generated user events
in the same Event structure.
Creating and Registering User Events

To define a user event, wire a block diagram object, such as a front panel
terminal or block diagram constant, to the Create User Event function. The
data type of the object defines the data type of the user event. The label of
the object becomes the name of the user event. If the data type is a cluster,
the name and type of each field of the cluster define the data the user event
carries. If the data type is not a cluster, the user event carries a single value
of that type, and the label of the object becomes the name of the user event
and of the single data element.

The user event out output of the Create User Event function is a strictly
typed refnum that carries the name and data type of the user event. Wire the
user event out output of the Create User Event function to an event source
input of the Register For Events function.
You cannot register for a user event statically. Handle a user event the same
way you handle a dynamically registered user interface event. Wire the
event registration refnum output of the Register For Events function to the
dynamic event terminal on the left side of the Event structure. Use the Edit
Events dialog box to configure a case in the Event structure to handle the
event. The name of the user event appears under the Dynamic subheading
in the Event Sources section of the dialog box.
The user event data items appear in the Event Data Node on the left border
of the Event structure. User events are notify events and can share the same
event case of an Event structure as user interface events or other user events.
You can wire a combination of user events and user interface events to the
Register For Events function.
Generating User Events

Use the Generate User Event function to deliver the user event and
associated data to other parts of an application through an Event structure
configured to handle the event. The Generate User Event function accepts a
user event refnum and a value for the event data. The data value must match
the data type of the user event.
If the user event is not registered, the Generate User Event function has no
effect. If the user event is registered but no Event structure is waiting on it,
LabVIEW queues the user event and data until an Event structure executes
to handle the event. You can register for the same user event multiple times
by using separate Register For Event functions, in which case each queue
associated with an event registration refnum receives its own copy of the
user event and associated event data each time the Generate User Event
function executes.
Note To simulate user interaction with a front panel, you can create a user event that has
event data items with the same names and data types as an existing user interface event.
For example, you can create a user event called MyValChg by using a cluster of two
Boolean fields named OldVal and NewVal, which are the same event data items the
Value Change user interface event associates with a Boolean control. You can share the
same Event structure case for the simulated MyValChg user event and a real Boolean
Value Change event. The Event structure executes the event case if a Generate User Event
function generates the user event or if a user changes the value of the control.

Unregistering User Events

Unregister user events when you no longer need them. In addition, destroy
the user event by wiring the user event refnum to the user event input of the
Destroy User Event function. Wire the error out output of the Unregister
For Events function to the error in input of the Destroy User Event function
to ensure that the functions execute in the correct order.
LabVIEW unregisters all events and destroys existing user events

automatically when the top-level VI finishes running. However, National
Instruments recommends that you unregister and destroy user events
explicitly, especially in a long-running application, to conserve memory
resources.

Exercise 4-1 User Event Techniques

Goal
Complete a VI that contains a static user interface event and a user event.
Scenario
This VI contains the Fire Event Boolean control that causes an LED to light
when the user clicks the control. In addition, the block diagram contains a
countdown that displays on the slider on the front panel. When the
countdown reaches zero, a programmatic event fires that lights the LED.
Design
1. Modify the block diagram to create and generate a user event for the
LED.
2. Configure the Fire Event event case to handle both the Value Change
event on the Fire Event Boolean control and the User event.
Implementation
1. Open User Event.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\User Event Techniques directory. Figure 4-12
and Figure 4-13 show the front panel and block diagram.
Figure 4-12. User Event VI Front Panel

Figure 4-13. User Event VI Block Diagram
Create and Generate User Event

2. Modify the block diagram to create and generate a user event for the
LED as shown in Figure 4-14. You will add the True state as shown in
Figure 4-14. Wire the user event through the False state.
Figure 4-14. Create and Generate a User Event for LED

❑ Place a Create User Event function, located on the Events palette,

on the block diagram. This VI returns a reference to a user event
whenever Programmatic Count Down to Event... reaches zero.
❑ Place a False constant, located on the Boolean palette, on the block

diagram. Label it LED. Wire the False constant to the user event
data type input of the Create User Event function.
❑ Place a Register For Events node, located on the Events palette, on

the block diagram. Wire the node as shown in Figure 4-14.
❑ Generate the event within the True case of the programmatic loop.
– Place a Generate User Event function, located on the Events
palette, on the block diagram.
– Place a True constant on the block diagram and wire it to the
event data input on the Generate User Event function.
– Complete wiring the Generate User Event function as shown in
Figure 4-14. The True case executes only when the countdown
reaches zero.
Configure Events
3. Place an Event structure, located on the Structures palette, inside the
user interface loop.
❑ Wire the Event Registration Refnum from the Register For Events
node to the dynamic event terminal of the Event structure.
Tip If the dynamic event terminal is not visible, right-click on the border of the Event
structure and select Show Dynamic Event Terminals from the shortcut menu.
❑ Wire the error and Event Count shift registers from the left border of
the User Interface Loop to the left border of the Event structure.

4. Complete the following steps to configure the Fire Event event case to
handle both the Value Change event on the Fire Event Boolean control
and the User event, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15. “Fire Event”: Value Change Event Case
❑ Place the Flash LED VI, located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\User Event Techniques directory, in Event
Case 0. This subVI turns on the LED for 200 ms.
❑ Right-click Event Fired! and select Create»Reference from the

shortcut menu. This creates a reference to the indicator which can be
wired to the Bool Refnum input of the Flash LED subVI.
❑ Move the Fire Event Boolean control into Event Case 0 so the VI
reads the value of the control when the event executes.
❑ Place an Increment function on the block diagram to increment the

event count within the Event structure.
❑ Place a False constant, located on the Boolean palette, on the block

diagram. Label it Loop Continue. Wire the False constant to the
right border of the Event structure.
❑ Right-click the Event structure and select Edit Events Handled

by This Case from the shortcut menu to open the Edit Events
dialog box.
– Select Controls»Fire Event from the Event Sources list and
Value Change from the Events list.
– Click the blue + to add an event.
– Select Dynamic»<LED>:User Event from the Event Sources
list.
– Click the OK button to complete configuration.

5. Create and configure the Stop event case to handle the Value Change
event on the Stop Boolean control as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16. Event Case 1
❑ Right-click the Event structure and select Add Event Case from the
shortcut menu to open the Edit Events dialog box.
❑ Select Stop from the Event Sources list and Value Change from
the Events list.
❑ Move the Stop Boolean control into Event Case 1 and wire the
control to the right border of the Event structure.
6. Complete the block diagram as shown in Figure 4-17 to stop the User
Interface Loop, release the user event resources, and handle any errors
that have occurred. You will use the following items:
❑ Unbundle By Name—Extracts the status Boolean data from the

error cluster. If an error has occurred or the Stop button has been
pressed, then stop the User Interface Loop
❑ Unregister For Events—Frees up resources used to register the user

event
❑ Merge Errors—Combines the error outputs from both loops into a

single error output
❑ Destroy User Event—Releases the resources that were allocated for

the user event
❑ Simple Error Handler—Communicates error information to the user

Figure 4-17. Completed User Event VI Block Diagram
7. Save the VI.
Testing
1. Run the VI. Try to generate a user interface event at the same time as a
programmatic event. Does the VI record both events?
2. Stop the VI and move the Fire Event Boolean control from the event
case to outside the While Loop. Try running the VI again. What
happens? Because the Boolean control is a latch, the VI must read the
control to reset it. When the control is outside the While Loop, the VI
reads it only once during the execution of the VI.
3. Close the VI. Do not save changes.
End of Exercise 4-1

Producer/Consumer (Events) User Event Example

Figure 4-18 shows a modified producer/consumer (events) design pattern in
which a user event sends a message from the consumer loop to the producer
loop. Notice that the data type of the event is the error cluster that is wired
to the Create User Event function. With the addition of user events, the
producer/consumer (events) design pattern becomes a flexible design
pattern that you can use for many types of applications.
Figure 4-18. Producer/Consumer (Events) with User Events
Job Aid
Use Table 4-1 to determine the best uses for the design patterns described in
this lesson.
Table 4-1. Design Pattern Comparisons
Design Pattern Use Advantage Disadvantage

Simple Simple calculations Easily perform N/A
simple calculations
General Standard Control Distinct Initialize, Unable to return to a
Flow Run, and Stop phases previous phase
State Machine Controls the Controls sequences Does not store future
functionality of a VI sequences to execute
by creating a system
sequence

Table 4-1. Design Pattern Comparisons (Continued)
Design Pattern Use Advantage Disadvantage

Queued Message Enhances the state Stores future Does not use memory
Handler machine by storing sequences to execute efficiently
future sequences to
execute
Parallel Loop Process multiple tasks Efficient use of Synchronization and
in the same VI computing resources data passing
Master/Slave Sends messages and Passes messages and Does not lend itself
synchronizes parallel handles loop well to passing data
loops synchronization
Producer/Consumer Processes or analyzes Stores data for later Does not provide loop
(Data) data in parallel with processing synchronization
other data processing
or analysis
User Interface Processes messages Handles user Does not allow for
Event Handler from the user interface messages intensive processing
interface applications
Producer/Consumer Responds to user Separates the user Does not integrate
(Events) interface with interface from non-user interface
processor-intensive processor-intensive events well
applications code

Use Figure 4-19 as a guide to help in determining the best design pattern to
use for an application.
Pre-store Queued
Contains a Yes Yes
Sequence Message
Sequence?
Execution? Handler
No No
State Machine
Intensive Producer/
Responds to Yes Yes
Processing Consumer with
User Interface?
Needed? Events
No No User Interface
Event Handler
Relation Is Timing
Parallel Yes Yes Yes
Between the Loop Master/Slave
Operations?
Loops? Relation?
No No No Producer/
Consumer
Simple VI Parallel Loop

Architecture Architecture
Figure 4-19. Design Pattern Decision Tree
D. Creating a Hierarchical Architecture

Designing a hierarchical architecture involves designing individual VIs that
perform specific functions. In LabVIEW, a module can be a single frame of
a Case structure, a single VI, or a set of VIs. By examining the
characteristics of the modules, you can evaluate the design quality of a VI
by looking at coupling and cohesion. Coupling and cohesion are the primary
characteristics you use to evaluate the design quality of VIs.
Hierarchy
It is good development style to create a good module hierarchy in
LabVIEW. A good module hierarchy has high cohesion and low coupling.
You can graph the VIs that are coupled to other VIs within a hierarchy.
Graphing the hierarchy helps you visualize the coupling among modules.
Modules within an application should appear near each other in the
hierarchy. Select View»VI Hierarchy to display the VI Hierarchy
window. The module hierarchy should have independent sections that are
shaped somewhat like a diamond, as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20. Example of a Module Hierarchy
A top-level VI should call a few major modules, such as acquire, analyze,

and display. Low-level functions, such as string functions, DAQ calls, or
File I/O functions, should appear at the lowest levels of the hierarchy. The
modules at the lowest level of the hierarchy should have small,
detail-oriented goals to achieve.
An application usually includes a broad set of general operations that call

a set of specific tasks. If a module is coupled across rows in the hierarchy,
there is probably a higher level of coupling than is necessary. The function
of a top-level VIs is not clearly defined if it must call all the way down to
the lowest level of the hierarchy. Every software design needs to strike a
balance on the acceptable level of coupling.
Plan your application before you build it. Think about what operations are
necessary. A complex application includes major tasks, such as network
communication or data acquisition, and minor tasks, such as user login or
dialog box display. Most of the smallest tasks, such as string concatenation
and basic mathematics, have existing VIs or functions in LabVIEW. Try to
build modules that have only one goal and accomplish that goal well.
If you are editing an existing VI, understand what function each part of the
block diagram performs before you insert new functionality. Strive to
achieve strong cohesion. Mimic existing organization patterns. If all
existing waveform calculations occur in one module, make sure that you add
any new waveform calculations to the same module.

Job Aid
Use the following checklist to create a hierarchical architecture and
determine if each VI uses the correct level of detail.
❑ Each individual VI performs a single goal
❑ Each VI is loosely coupled
❑ Implementation details of the VI are hidden
❑ You can reuse each VI in other VIs
❑ Each VI has clearly defined inputs and outputs
E. Using the LabVIEW Project and Project Libraries

Use projects and project libraries to manage the files in complex
applications.
Using the LabVIEW Project

Use projects to group together LabVIEW files and files not specific to
LabVIEW, create build specifications, and deploy or download files to
targets. When you save a project, LabVIEW creates a project file
(.lvproj), which includes references to files in the project, configuration
information, build information, deployment information, and so on.
You must use a project to build applications and shared libraries. You also
must use a project to work with an RT, FPGA, Mobile, Touch Panel, DSP,
or embedded target. Refer to the specific module documentation for more
information about using projects with these targets.
If you are using a project with an NI device driver, refer to the specific driver
documentation for more information about using projects with drivers.
Project Explorer Window

Use the Project Explorer window to create and edit LabVIEW projects.
Select File»New Project to display the Project Explorer window. You also
can select Project»New Project or select Empty Project in the New dialog
box to display the Project Explorer window.
The Project Explorer window includes two pages, the Items page and the
Files page. The Items page displays the project items as they exist in the
project tree. The Files page displays the project items that have a
corresponding file on disk. You can organize filenames and folders on this
page. Project operations on the Files page both reflect and update the
contents on disk. You can switch from one page to the other by

right-clicking a folder or item under a target and selecting Show in Items

View or Show in Files View from the shortcut menu.
The Project Explorer window includes the following items by default:

4. Project root—Contains all other items in the Project Explorer
window. This label on the project root includes the filename for the
project.
• My Computer—Represents the local computer as a target in the
project.
• Dependencies—Includes items that VIs under a target require.
• Build Specifications—Includes build configurations for source
distributions and other types of builds available in LabVIEW
toolkits and modules. If you have the LabVIEW Professional
Development System or Application Builder installed, you can use
Build Specifications to configure stand-alone applications, shared
libraries, installers, and zip files.
Creating a LabVIEW Project

Complete the following steps to create a project.
1. Select File»New Project to display the Project Explorer window. You
also can select Project»New Project or select Empty Project in the
New dialog box to display the Project Explorer window.
2. Add items you want to include in the project under a target, such as My
Computer.
3. Select File»Save Project to save the project. Select File»Save All (this
Project) to save all items in the current project.
Note The LabVIEW Real-Time, FPGA, PDA, Touch Panel, and DSP Modules add
functionality to the LabVIEW development system and must be purchased separately.
Adding Items to a Project

Use the Project Explorer window to add LabVIEW files, such as VIs and
libraries, as well as files not specific to LabVIEW, such as text files and
spreadsheets, to a target in a LabVIEW project. When you add files to a
project, LabVIEW creates items in the Project Explorer window to represent
the files on disk. You can create an organizational structure for items in a
project.
An item can appear only once under a target. For example, if you add a file
from a directory on disk to the My Computer target and then add the entire
directory to the My Computer target, LabVIEW does not include the file
again.

From the Items page in the Project Explorer window, you can add items
under a target in a project in the following ways.
• Right-click a target and select New»VI from the shortcut menu to add a
new, blank VI. You also can select File»New VI or Project»Add To
Project»New VI to add a new, blank VI. You also can add a VI to the
project by selecting the VI icon in the upper right corner of a front panel
or block diagram window and dragging the icon to the target. When you
add a VI to the project, LabVIEW automatically adds its entire hierarchy
to the Project Explorer window under Dependencies.
• Right-click a target and select New from the shortcut menu then select
Control, Library, Variable, I/O Server, Class, or XControl from the list
to add one of these items to the project.
• Right-click a target and select New»Virtual Folder from the shortcut
menu to add a virtual folder under a target. A virtual folder is a folder in
the project that organizes project items and does not represent files on
disk. You also can create subfolders by right-clicking a virtual folder and
selecting New»Virtual Folder from the shortcut menu.
• Right-click a target or a folder under the target, select Add»File from the
shortcut menu, and select the file you want to add from the dialog box.
You also can select the target, select Project»Add To Project»File, and
select the file you want to add from the dialog box.
• Right-click a target or a folder under the target, select Add»Folder
(Snapshot) from the shortcut menu, and select the file(s) you want to
add from the dialog box. You also can select the target, select Project»
Add To Project»Folder (Snapshot), and select the file(s) you want to
add from the dialog box.
• Right-click a target or a folder under a target and select Add»Folder
(Auto-populating) from the shortcut menu to display a file dialog box.
You also can select a target and then select Project»Add To Project»
Folder (Auto-populating).
• Right-click a target, or a folder or library under a target, and select Add»
Hyperlink from the shortcut menu. The Hyperlink Properties dialog
box appears. You also can select the target and select Project»Add to
Project»Hyperlink to display the Hyperlink Properties dialog box.
• Use the Add File, Add Item, or Add Item From Memory method to add
items to a project programmatically. Use the HyperLink Address
property to set the address of a hyperlink item.
• (Windows and Mac OS) Select an item or directory on disk and drag it to
the target.
Note You cannot drag and drop items in the Project Explorer window to the file
system.

You also can add new LabVIEW files to a project from the New dialog box.
Select File»New or Project»Add To Project»New to display the New
dialog box. In the New dialog box, select the item you want to add and place
a checkmark in the Add to project checkbox. If you have multiple projects
open, select the project to which you want to add the item from the Projects
list.
Items you add to the Project Explorer window can include icons.
Using Folders in LabVIEW Projects

You can add two types of folders to a LabVIEW project, virtual folders and
auto-populating folders. Virtual folders organize project items. Right-click
a target and select Add»Folder (Snapshot) from the shortcut menu to add
a virtual folder to the project. Auto-populating folders update in real time to
reflect the contents of folders on disk. Add an auto-populating folder to the
project to view project items as they appear on disk. Contents of an
auto-populating folder do not always match disk contents exactly in the case
of project libraries. The Items page of the project displays project library
(.lvlib) contents by library hierarchy and not by disk organization. For
example, if a VI exists in a library file, the VI appears in the project under
the library file. The VI does not appear in the project in the location on disk.
Auto-populating folders are visible only on the Items page of the Project
Explorer window. You can view the disk contents of an auto-populating
folder but you cannot perform disk operations such as renaming,
reorganizing, and removing project items. To perform disk operations of
items in an auto-populating folder, use the Files page of the Project
Explorer window. The Files page displays the location of project folders on
disk. Project operations on the Files page both update and reflect the
contents of the folder on disk. Likewise, LabVIEW automatically updates
the auto-populating folder in the project if you make changes to the folder
on disk outside of LabVIEW.
The advantage of performing file operations on the Files page instead of

using the file system outside of LabVIEW is that LabVIEW can update
referencing files. When you move, remove, or rename items on the Files
page, LabVIEW updates all referencing items to reflect the change.
Performing file operations on the Files page is especially useful for rename
operations. If a project is open and you rename a file on disk that is in an
auto-populating folder, LabVIEW detects the change and the Undo File
Rename? dialog box appears. You can either revert the rename operation or
continue with the operation. However, items in the project that reference that
file do not reference the new name and might result in conflicts because the
rename occurred outside of LabVIEW.

An auto-populating folder can contain a virtual folder only if the virtual

folder is within a library hierarchy. A virtual folder does not represent files
on disk. You can convert an existing virtual folder to an auto-populating
folder by right-clicking a virtual folder on the Items page and selecting
Convert to Auto-populating Folder from the shortcut menu. A file dialog
appears prompting you to select a folder on disk. LabVIEW automatically
renames the virtual folder to match the folder on disk and adds all contents
of the folder on disk to the project. Items in the virtual folder that do not exist
in the directory on disk move to the target.
To disable auto-population, right-click an auto-populating folder and select

Stop Auto-populating from the shortcut menu. The auto-populating folder
becomes a virtual folder.
Note Auto-populating folders can contain virtual items such as variables and hyperlinks
because these items do not have a corresponding item on disk. You can rearrange virtual
items such as variables and hyperlinks within an auto-populating folder because the
movement does not result in a movement on disk. You also can move virtual items into
and out of auto-populating folders.
Project Dependencies
Use Dependencies to view items that VIs under a target require. Each target
in a LabVIEW project includes Dependencies. Dependencies lists the VI
hierarchies of all VIs in the project. LabVIEW organizes Dependencies into
three folders: vi.lib, user.lib, and Items in Memory.
Note If you previously hid Dependencies in the Project Explorer window, you must
display the item again to access it in the Project Explorer window.
Dependencies include VIs, DLLs, LabVIEW project libraries, and

MathScript user-defined functions that a VI calls statically. You cannot add
items directly to Dependencies. Dependencies updates automatically when
you add, remove, or save an item in the project. For example, if you add a
VI that includes a subVI to a target, LabVIEW adds the subVI to
Dependencies. However, if you add a dependent item under a target, the
item does not appear under Dependencies. For example, if you add the VI
and the subVI under the target, LabVIEW does not add the subVI under
Dependencies. You can right-click Dependencies and select Refresh from
the shortcut menu to view the current dependencies. You also can use the
Refresh Dependencies method to refresh Dependencies programmatically.
Note Items that a VI calls dynamically do not appear under Dependencies. You must
add these items under a target to manage them in a project.

LabVIEW tracks subVIs recursively. LabVIEW does not track DLLs

recursively. For example, if a.vi calls b.dll statically and b.dll calls
c.dll statically, LabVIEW only considers b.dll as a dependent item. To
manage c.dll in the project, you must explicitly add c.dll under the
target.
If a dependent item is part of a project library, LabVIEW includes the entire

project library under Dependencies.
You cannot create new items under Dependencies. You cannot drag items
from other places in the Project Explorer window to Dependencies.
Removing Items from Projects

Use the Project Explorer window to remove items from a LabVIEW
project. You can remove items in the following ways:
• Right-click the item you want to remove and select Remove from the
shortcut menu.
• Select the item you want to remove and press the Remove from Project
button on the Standard toolbar.
• From the Items page, select the item you want to remove and press the
<Delete> key.
Note Items in the project may refer to other items. For example, if you remove a subVI
from the project that another VI in the project calls, the subVI will move to
Dependencies.
Using Project Libraries

LabVIEW project libraries are collections of VIs, type definitions, shared
variables, palette files, and other files, including other project libraries.
When you create and save a new project library, LabVIEW creates a project
library file (.lvlib), which includes the properties of the project library
and the references to files that the project library owns.
Project libraries are useful if you want to organize files into a single
hierarchy of items, avoid potential VI name duplication, limit public access
to certain files, limit editing permission for a collection of files, and set a
default palette file for a group of VIs. You can drag items that a project
library owns from the Project Explorer window to the block diagram or front
panel.
You can view the structure of a project library from the Project Explorer
window or in a stand-alone project library window. If you are not in the
Project Explorer window, right-click a project library file and select Open
from the shortcut menu to open it in the project library window.

Note If the project library file you select is not the top-level project library file, the
stand-alone window that opens is the project library window of the top-level project
library. The project library file you select is in the contents tree of the top-level project
library window.
Use project libraries to organize a virtual, logical hierarchy of items. A

project library file does not contain the actual files it owns, unlike an LLB,
which is a physical directory that contains VIs. Files that a project library
owns still appear individually on disk in the directories where you saved
them. A project library might have a different organizational structure than
its files on disk.
Use project libraries to qualify the names of VIs and other LabVIEW files.
LabVIEW identifies VIs by filename, so LabVIEW unintentionally might
load and reference a VI because the VI has the same filename as another VI,
a problem known as cross-linking. When a VI is part of a project library,
LabVIEW qualifies the VI name with the project library name to avoid
cross-linking. A qualified name includes the filename and the qualified
name of the owning project library.
For example, if you build a VI named caller.vi that includes a subVI

named init.vi that library1.lvlib owns, you also can include a
different subVI named init.vi that library2.lvlib owns and avoid
cross-linking problems. The qualified names that LabVIEW records when
you save caller.vi are library1.lvlib:init.vi and
library2.lvlib:init.vi respectively.
Note Only one project library can own a specific VI. However, you can associate a file
not specific to LabVIEW, such as a text file or HTML file, with multiple project libraries.
You can specify version numbers in a project library to distinguish changes

to the collection of files over time. Set version numbers from the General
Settings page of the Project Library Properties dialog box and update the
numbers periodically. The version number does not affect the project library
name.
Caution You must right-click the project library and select Save As or Rename from the
shortcut menu to display the Save As dialog box and rename project libraries. If you
rename a project library outside LabVIEW, you might break the project library.
Use project libraries to limit access to certain types of files. You can
configure access to items and folders in a project library as public or private
to prevent users from accessing certain items. When you set access for a
folder as private, all VIs in that folder also have private access.

You can limit editing permission by locking or password-protecting project

libraries. When you lock a project library, users cannot add or remove items
and cannot view items that you set as private. When you assign a password
to a project library, users cannot add or remove items or edit project library
properties without a password. Users can open the Project Library
Properties dialog box, but all dialog box components except protection
options are disabled. Users must unlock the project library or enter a
password to enable the dialog box components. To unlock the project
library, right-click the project library and select Enter Password from the
shortcut menu.
Note When you enter a password for a library in a LabVIEW project that does not have
a valid license specific to the version of LabVIEW you purchased, you cannot drag and
drop items into or out of the library.
Note Adding password protection to a project library does not add password protection
to the VIs it owns. You must assign password protection to individual VIs.
You can create project libraries from project folders. You also can convert
LLBs to project libraries. LLBs have different features and advantages than
project libraries, so consider the ways in which you might use an LLB
before you decide whether to convert it to a project library. You can include
project library files in an LLB.
If you include a palette file (.mnu) in a project library, you can set it as the
default palette file for all VIs that the project library owns. The default
palette file for a project library is the palette available in the shortcut menu
when you right-click a sub-VI call to any VI that the project library owns,
just as source palettes are available in the shortcut menus for many VIs and
functions placed on the block diagram from the Functions palette.
However, unlike source palettes, the default palette file for a project library
does not have to contain any VIs from the project library it belongs to. From
the General Settings page of the Project Library Properties dialog box,
select the palette file in the Default Palette ring control. You also can set the
default palette file from the Item Settings page. Select the .mnu file in the
Contents tree and place a checkmark in the Default Palette checkbox.
Project libraries that LabVIEW deploys to the Shared Variable Engine

(SVE) are called processes. Making changes to a process or to a shared
variable within a process without affecting the corresponding library is
known as online configuration. Making changes to a library or to a shared
variable in a library without affecting the corresponding process is offline
configuration. If you use offline configuration to change a shared variable,
you must redeploy the library to the SVE before you run any VI within the
library so the SVE can update the shared variable in the process.

Project Sublibraries
Project sublibraries are project libraries that another project library owns.
The settings in the owning project library do not affect access settings and
editing permission for items within the project sublibrary. You can set the
access of a project sublibrary file (.lvlib) as private within the owning
project library, but when you edit the project sublibrary itself, items the
sublibrary owns retain public or private access settings.
Project sublibraries are useful if you want to create a project library that
includes separate areas of functionality. For example, if you are creating a
project library of graphics tools, you might divide the two-dimensional and
three-dimensional drawing tools into separate sublibraries. Each project
sublibrary can include private and public access items and folders.
Creating a Project Library

Complete the following steps to create a project library.
1. From the Project Explorer window, right-click My Computer and select
New»Library from the shortcut menu. LabVIEW creates a project
library file that appears in the Project Explorer window as part of the
LabVIEW project.
From the Getting Started Window or a blank VI, you also can select
File»New to display the New dialog box. In the Other Files folder of the
Create New tree, double-click the Library option. A stand-alone project
library window for the new project library file appears.
2. To add files to a project library, right-click the project library icon and
select Add»File or Add»Folder (Snapshot) from the shortcut menu.
You can add the same types of files that you can add to projects. You also
can drag an item in the project so it appears under the project library.
Only one project library can own a specific VI. However, you can
associate files not specific to LabVIEW, such as a text file or HTML file,
with multiple project libraries.
Note If you add a VI that is not in memory to a project library, a dialog box appears that
prompts you to save changes to the VI. Save changes to the VI so it will link correctly to
the owning project library.
3. Select File»Save All or right-click the project library icon and select
Save»Save As from the shortcut menu to name and save the project
library file.
4. Right-click the project library icon and select Properties from the
shortcut menu to display the Project Library Properties dialog box.
5. From the General Settings page, set the version number, create or select
an icon, and assign security settings to the project library.

Note The icon you select becomes the default icon for any VIs you create from within
the project library. You can create a template icon to edit and use in all VIs that a project
library owns.
6. From the Documentation page, enter information for context help for
the project library.
7. From the Item Settings page, set access options for files in the project
library.
8. Click OK to update the project library with the edited settings and close
the dialog box.
You also can create a project library from a project folder.
Creating a Project Library from a Project Folder

You can create LabVIEW project libraries from virtual folders in a
LabVIEW project. The new project library owns the items that the folder
contained.
From the Project Explorer window, right-click the virtual folder to convert
and select Convert To Library from the shortcut menu. LabVIEW converts
the folder to a project library, which appears in the Project Explorer
window with the items it owns listed under it.
Note You cannot convert an auto-populated folder into a project library.
You can name the new project library file when you save it. Right-click the
project library and select Save from the shortcut menu.
Configuring Access Options in Project Libraries

You can configure access settings for items and folders that a LabVIEW
project library owns as public or private. If you set an item as private and
lock the project library, the item is not visible in the project library or in
palettes. You cannot use a private VI as a subVI in other VIs or applications
that the project library does not own, even if the project library is unlocked.
Determine which items in the project library you want to set as public and
which as private. Public items might include palette VIs, XControls,
instrument drivers, and other tools you want users to find and use. Private
items might include support VIs, copyrighted files, or items you might want
to edit later without taking the risk of breaking users' code.
You can set the access of a project sublibrary file (.lvlib) as private within
the owning project library, but when you edit the project sublibrary itself,
items the sublibrary owns retain public or private access settings.

Complete the following steps to configure access options in a project library.

1. Right-click the project library icon in the Project Explorer window or
stand-alone project library window and select Properties from the
2. From the Item Settings page, click an item in the Contents tree to select
it. The current access settings for the item appear in the Access Scope
box. Click one of the following radio buttons in the Access Scope box
to apply to the item.
• Public—The item is visible when users view the project library.
Other VIs and applications can call public VIs.
• Private—The item does not appear visible when users view the
project library or palettes if you lock the project library. Other VIs
and applications that the project library does not own cannot call a
private VI.
• Not specified—This option appears only when you select a folder.
The folder does not have access items specified. Access is public. By
default, folders in a project library do not have access specified,
which means the folders are publicly accessible.
Note If you specify access options for a folder, the access setting applies to all items in
the folder and overrides access options for individual items in the folder.
Note You can set individual instances of a polymorphic VI as private and set the primary
polymorphic VI as public. The polymorphic VI does not break even though instance VIs
are private. Setting instance VIs as private is useful if you want users to access instances
only through the polymorphic VI selector, so you can edit instance order without causing
user problems.
3. Click OK to incorporate the changes into the project library and close
the dialog box.
Items set as private appear in the Project Explorer window with a private
icon. If you lock the project library, private items do not appear in the
Project Explorer window.
Protecting Project Libraries

You can limit editing permission by locking or password-protecting
LabVIEW project libraries. When you lock a project library, users cannot
add or remove items and cannot view items that you set as private. When
you assign a password to a project library, users cannot add or remove items
or edit project library properties without a password. Users can open the
Project Library Properties dialog box, but all dialog box components
except protection options are disabled. Users must unlock the project library
or enter a password to enable the dialog box components.

Note Adding password protection to a project library does not add password protection
to the VIs it owns. You must assign password protection to individual VIs.
Complete the following steps to set levels of protection for a project library.
1. Right-click the project library icon in the Project Explorer or
stand-alone project library window and select Properties from the
2. From the General Settings page, select one of the following options to
apply to the project library.
• Unlocked (no password)—Users can view public and private items
that the project library owns and can edit the project library and its
properties.
• Locked (no password)—Users cannot add or remove items from
the project library, edit project library properties, or view private
items that the project library owns. For example, if you are
developing a project library and do not want anyone to view private
files, you should lock the project library.
• Password-protected—Users cannot add or remove items from the
project library, edit project library properties, or view private items
that the project library owns. Users must enter a password to edit the
project library. For example, if you are developing a project library
and want only a few people on the development team to have editing
permission, set a password for the project library and give the
password to those people.
3. If you select Password-protected, click the Enter Password button to
enter the password.
4. Enter a password in the Authentication dialog box and click Verify.
5. Click OK to incorporate the changes into the project library and close
the dialog box.
Note Applying a password for a project library automatically stores the password in the
LabVIEW password cache, which gives you access to make changes to the project library
as if you had entered the password to unlock the library. You can remove the password
from the cache by restarting LabVIEW or by clearing the password cache from the
Environment page of the Options dialog box.
Organizing Project Libraries

You can create an organizational structure for files that a LabVIEW project
library owns. A well-organized structure for project library items can make
it easier for you to use source control, avoid filename conflicts, and divide
the project library into public and private access areas.

The following list describes some of the caveats and recommendations to

consider when you organize project libraries and the files that the project
libraries own:
• Create each project library within a separate LabVIEW project that
contains only files related to that project library, including example files
and the files you use to create and test the project library. Give the
project and project library similar filenames. If a project library includes
several separate areas of functionality, consider using project
sublibraries for each area.
• Create a separate directory of files for each project library you create.
You can include the files that the project library owns in the directory. If
you include files for more than one project library in the same directory,
conflicts might occur if you try to include VIs of the same name in
different libraries. Organizing project library files into separate
directories makes it easier to identify files related to specific project
libraries on disk.
• If you move files on disk that a project library owns, reopen and resave
the project library to ensure that the project library links correctly to the
moved items.
• (Windows) If you are building an installer that includes a project library,
make sure you save the files that the project library owns on the same
drive as the project library. If some files are on a different drive, such as
a network drive, project library links will break if you include the project
library in an installer.
• Determine which items in a project library you want to set as private and
which as public. Users cannot use private VIs as subVIs in other VIs or
applications. Public items provide the interface to the project library
functionality and might include palette VIs, XControls, instrument
drivers, and tools you want users to find and use. Private items might
include support VIs, copyrighted files, or items you might want to edit
later without taking the risk of breaking users’ code. Consider the
following recommendations:
– Create a folder in the project library named private. From the
Item Settings page of the Project Library Properties dialog box,
configure the access settings as private for the folder. LabVIEW
automatically sets as private any project library files you add to the
private folder, so you do not have to configure access settings for
individual VIs.

– Assume that all project library files that are not in the private
folder are public. You do not need to create a folder for public files.
– You also can organize public and private items in a project library by
creating folders for each functionality group within a project library
and adding a private subfolder within each functionality group
folder.
• Adding password protection to a project library does not add password
protection to the VIs it owns. You must assign password protection to
individual VIs if you want to limit edits to the block diagrams and front
panels. Consider using the same password for the project library and for
the VIs the project library owns to avoid confusion.

Exercise 4-2 Using the LabVIEW Project

Goal
Create a LabVIEW project for the application.
Scenario
Every large LabVIEW development needs to use a project to control naming
and project hierarchy. Using the LabVIEW Project simplifies the
development of larger applications.
Design
Create a LabVIEW project that includes folders for modules and controls.
Save the project as in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\
Course Project directory.
Implementation
1. Launch LabVIEW.
2. Create a new project.
❑ Select File»New Project to open the Project Explorer window.
3. Create a virtual folder for modules and a virtual folder for controls in the
My Computer hierarchy. You use these virtual folders later in the
course.
❑ Right-click My Computer in the Project Explorer window and

select New»Virtual Folder from the shortcut menu to create a new
virtual folder.
❑ Name the virtual folder Modules.
❑ Repeat the previous steps to create the Controls virtual folder.
4. Save the project as TLC.lvproj.
❑ Select File»Save Project.
❑ Save the project as TLC.lvproj in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project directory.
5. Close the project.
End of Exercise 4-2

Resolving Project Conflicts

Projects can contain items that conflict with other items in the project. A
conflict is a potential cross-link that occurs when LabVIEW tries to load a
VI that has the same qualified name as an item already in the project. A
cross-link occurs when a VI calls a subVI at the incorrect path. For example,
a VI calls an open subVI of the same qualified name as an item already in
the project from a different path. Most conflicts exist because other items in
the project reference a conflicting item. Removing a conflicting subVI from
the project might not resolve the conflict because other VIs in the project
may still reference the conflicting subVI.
Tip Change the qualified name of a conflicting item by adding it to a LabVIEW project
library. When a VI is part of a project library, LabVIEW qualifies the VI name with the
project library name to avoid cross-linking. A qualified name includes the filename and
the qualified name of the owning project library filename. The qualified name changes
without changing the path or filename.
A yellow warning triangle appears on any conflicting items in the Project

Explorer window.
The best way to determine if cross-linking exists is to view the full path to
the item. Right-click the project root and select View»Full Paths from the
shortcut menu to display the Paths column and view the file paths that
correspond to the project items. You either must rename or remove all but
one item with the same qualified name from the project. To view detailed
information about existing conflicts, click the Resolve Conflicts button to
display the Resolve Project Conflicts dialog box. You also can select
Project»Resolve Conflicts from the project menu to display this dialog box
or right-click a conflicting item and select Resolve Conflicts from the
shortcut menu.
You can right-click a specific conflicting item on the Items page and select
Find»Conflicts to view all conflicting items in the Find Conflicts dialog
box. If the item only conflicts with one other item, LabVIEW highlights the
item in the Project Explorer window. You also can use the Find:Conflicts
property to find conflicts in the project programmatically.
When two or more items have the same qualified name, and only one item
exists on disk, you can right-click a conflicting item and select Replace
with Item Found by Project from the shortcut menu. LabVIEW updates
the callers of the incorrect item to reference the item found on disk. If you
do not want to remove the conflicting item and you detect it has the same
qualified name as another item in the project, you can rename the item or
add the item to a project library. Renaming the item loads the callers that
reference the incorrect item path, renames the item, and saves the item and
all callers. The callers reference the new name. If you do not save the callers,

the original item appears under Dependencies because callers still reference
the item.
If you detect that one or more VIs incorrectly refers to the wrong subVI,
redirect all callers to reference a subVI with a different path. Right-click a
conflicting VI in the Project Explorer window and select Replace with
from the shortcut menu to choose the correct subVI on disk. Select a
replacement file from the file dialog that appears. LabVIEW automatically
updates all items that reference the incorrect path to reference the
replacement. You also can load each VI that refers to a conflicting item. The
Resolve Load Conflict dialog box appears. You can choose a specific caller
VI to load.
Note LabVIEW dims Replace with Item Found by Project and Replace with if the
item is a project library or a member of a project library.
If you think that one or more VIs incorrectly refers to an item that LabVIEW
cannot find, right-click the project root and select Find Missing Items from
the shortcut menu. The Find Missing Items dialog box appears. This dialog
box lists all items in the project that reference an item on disk that LabVIEW
cannot find.
You can remove caller VIs from the project to resolve conflicts when a
hierarchy of VIs conflicts with the hierarchy of other contents in the project.
Right-click a VI or type definition and select Find»Callers or Find»
SubVIs from the shortcut menu to highlight the caller or subVI the item
references in the Project Explorer window. If more than one caller or
subVI exists in the project, the Find Callers or Find SubVIs dialog box
appears. Right-click a project root or target and select Find Items with No
Callers from the shortcut menu to display the Find Items with No Callers
dialog box and find all top-level items. If no callers reference a conflicting
subVI, remove the subVI from the project. You also can use the
Find:Callers, Find:SubVIs, or Find:Items with No Callers properties to find
callers, subVIs, and items with no callers programmatically.
If a LabVIEW project library in memory conflicts with another project item,

you must rename at least one conflicting library before loading. Right-click
the library and select Unload from the shortcut menu. After LabVIEW
unloads the library, you can reload the library and the VIs from the correct
paths. If a library conflicts with another project item and is not in memory,
you can right-click the library and select Load from the shortcut menu.
After LabVIEW loads the library, you can edit the library or its contents and
load VIs from the correct paths.

To help prevent conflicts, LabVIEW automatically tracks the hierarchy of

every item you include in the project. For example, when you open a VI,
LabVIEW adds all members of the VI hierarchy to a folder titled Items in
Memory under Dependencies. When an item is not in the project but another
item in the project is dependent on the missing item, the missing item
appears in Dependencies. Dependencies updates when you add, remove, or
save an item in the project. The Hierarchy Conflicts with Project dialog
box appears when you try to load a file that conflicts with items already in
the LabVIEW project. LabVIEW cannot open the file because items in its
hierarchy have the same qualified name as items in the project or
Dependencies. If a dependent item conflicts with another project item,
removing the items that reference it removes the item from Dependencies.
LabVIEW also scans the VI hierarchy when you open the block diagram of
a VI and add a new subVI. The subVI does not load if any members of its
hierarchy have the same qualified name but different paths as an item
already in the project. The Add to Project and Update Dependencies
dialog box appears. You can add the hierarchy or cancel the load and choose
another subVI.
Note Deleting an item that has callers from the project moves the item to Dependencies.
The item is a conflicting item until you remove all callers that call the conflicting item
from the project.

Exercise 4-3 File and Project Management with

Project Explorer Tools
Goal
Use the Project Explorer tools to manage the files and resolve conflicts in a
project.
Scenario
Conflicts can arise within a LabVIEW project if top-level VIs are calling
incorrect versions of nested code. Applications that are saved in multiple
locations as a result of archiving, backup or division of work can lead to the
use of incorrect code and broken applications.
In this exercise, you examine a LabVIEW project that contains conflicts,

and you use the tools in the Project Explorer to resolve the conflicts and
manage the project.
Design
The project in this exercise contains two conflicts:
• Two VIs within the project have the same name, Generate
Signal.vi.
• A VI in the project calls a subVI, Log to File.vi, outside the project
that has the same name as a VI within the project.
Implementation
Part I - Resolving Conflicts

1. Explore a LabVIEW Project containing conflicts.
❑ Open Conflicts.lvproj in the <Exercises>\File and

Project Management directory.
❑ Expand the Sine Wave, Square Wave, File IO, and Dependencies
items in the Project Explorer as shown in Figure 4-21.
Notice that LabVIEW has determined that various VIs have

conflicts. A conflict means it is unclear which VI should be
referenced by the calling VIs.

Figure 4-21. Project Explorer Window Showing Conflicts
❑ Double-click Generate Signal.vi in the Sine Wave virtual folder.
❑ Run the VI and observe that this VI generates a Sine Wave.
❑ Close the VI.
❑ Double-click Generate Signal.vi in the Square Wave virtual folder.
❑ Run the VI and observe that this VI is different because it generates

a square wave.
❑ Close the VI.
2. View the file paths of the items in the Project Explorer.
❑ In the Project Explorer menubar, select Project»Show Item Paths.
Note Viewing filepaths is often the first step when attempting to resolve conflicts that
are caused by cross-linking. You can attempt to rename or move files as needed, but first
you must determine which file is the correct file. Enabling Show Item Paths displays the
file locations in a second column.
3. Examine the conflicts in the Resolve Project Conflicts window.
❑ Click the Resolve Conflicts icon on the Project Explorer toolbar to

launch the Resolve Project Conflicts dialog window.

❑ Examine the Resolve Project Conflicts dialog window which

displays all of the conflicts that exist within the project.
Note You can resolve the project conflicts from the Resolve Project Conflicts dialog
window, but you will resolve the conflicts with various techniques throughout this
exercise.
❑ Close the window.
4. Determine which VIs are being used.
❑ Right-click the Generate Signal.vi in the Sine Wave virtual folder

and select Find»Callers. LabVIEW highlights any VIs that call this
VI as a subVI.
❑ Right-click the Generate Signal.vi in the Square Wave virtual

folder and select Find»Callers. Notice that this VI is not called by
any VIs. However, it is inadvisable to delete this VI because it has
unique functionality. Renaming one or both files is a more
appropriate action.
5. Manually rename the conflicting files.
❑ Select the Files tab in the Project Explorer.
❑ Navigate to Exercises»LabVIEW Intermediate I»File and

Project Management»Working Directory»Sine Wave»Generate
Signal.vi.
❑ Right-click Generate Signal.vi and select Rename.
❑ Rename the VI Sine Wave - Generate Signal.vi and click

OK.
❑ LabVIEW prompts you to save the changes made to the calling VI,
Create and Save Signal.vi, to preserve the links. Click Save.
❑ Navigate to Exercises»LabVIEW Intermediate I»File and

Project Management»Working Directory»Square Wave»
Generate Signal.vi.
❑ Right-click Generate Signal.vi and select Rename.
❑ Rename the VI Square Wave - Generate Signal.vi and click

OK.
❑ LabVIEW prompts you to save the changes made to the calling VI,
Create and Save Signal.vi, to preserve the links. Click Save.

6. Resolve a conflict using the Resolve Conflicts window.
❑ Select the Items tab in the Project Explorer window.
❑ Notice that there is copy of Log to File.vi in the File IO virtual

folder. There is also a second copy of Log to File.vi in the
Dependencies virtual folder which indicates that this second copy is
called by a file within the project. Thus the filepaths of these two VIs
are different.
❑ Double-click Create and Save Signal.vi in the Project Explorer

window. The Resolve Load Conflict window for this file appears as
shown in Figure 4-22. It prompts you to select the subVI the caller
should reference.
Figure 4-22. Resolve Load Conflict Dialog Window
❑ In the Resolve Load Conflict window, select the Log to File VI in the
Working Directory directory and click Load with Selected.
❑ A warning dialog appears informing you that the Log to File subVI
was loaded from a different location. Click Show Details.
❑ Examine the Load and Save Warning List window. Click Close.
All conflicts in the project should now be resolved.
7. Save the project.

Part II - Other File Management Tools

1. Use auto-populating folders in the project.
❑ Right-click the Sine Wave virtual folder in the Project Explorer

window and select Convert to Auto-populating Folder.
❑ Navigate to the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\

File and Project Management\Working Directory\Sine
Wave directory and click Current Folder. Notice that the Sine Wave
folder icon in the Project Explorer changes to indicate that the folder
is now set to Auto-populate.
Note In Auto-populate mode, the contents of the project folder reflect the hierarchy of
the specified folder on disk, as well as any changes that are made outside of the
development environment.
❑ Click the Windows Start button and select All Programs»

Accessories»Notepad to launch the Notepad application.
❑ In the Notepad application, select File»Save and save the file as

Data File.txt in the <Exercises>\
LabVIEW Intermediate I\File and Project
Management\Working Directory\Sine Wave directory.
❑ Close the Notepad application.
❑ Notice that Data File.txt automatically shows up in the Sine

Wave auto-populating folder in the Items tab of the Project Explorer.

2. Search for project items.
❑ In the Project Explorer, select Edit»Find Project Items.
❑ In the Find Project Items window, enter sine in the textbox as

shown in Figure 4-23 and click Find.
Figure 4-23. Find Project Items Window
❑ Select Sine Wave - Generate Signal.vi and click Go To. This item
should now be highlighted in the Project Explorer window.
3. Save and close the project.
End of Exercise 4-3

F. Choosing Data Types

When you develop a software design, it is important to analyze the data that
the application uses and determine how you want to represent the data.
LabVIEW gives you three choices for data representation. You can
represent the data as a scalar, an array, or a cluster. Each of these
representations provides a level of functionality that improves the design of
the software. The appropriate time to determine what data structures you
want to use to represent the data is during the design phase.
Scalars
Scalar data is the most basic data structure in LabVIEW. Scalar data can be
a number or a Boolean value. Use scalar data in your VIs for items that
contain only a single value. For example, if your software requirements
specify the use of a stop button in a VI, design a data structure that uses a
single Boolean stop button. If the VI requires that you use a device number
to specify the hardware to access, design a data structure that contains an
integer numeric to contain the device number. Examine all aspects of a
software requirements document and identify all data elements that are
appropriately represented as scalar data.
Because the dataflow programming model of LabVIEW is tightly integrated

with the data that a VI uses, you must evaluate each data element. If you
know that scalar data will always remain scalar, even as the program
evolves, you can use scalar data structures in the design of the software.
Because scalars are the most basic data structure in LabVIEW, VIs that use
primarily scalar data have the highest levels of efficiency and performance.
However, if you know that an application will evolve over time and require
more advanced data structures to replace the scalars, it may be difficult to
modify the application if you initially build it using scalar data structures.
Arrays
Arrays group data elements of the same type. Arrays are powerful data
structures for storing sets of the same data type where each data element is
associated with the others. Use arrays to contain data that includes more
than one element of the same data type and each element is associated with
one another. For example, if you need to contain data that streams from a
hardware device, such as a DAQ device, design a data structure that includes
an array to handle that data. Storing the streaming data into individual scalar
elements is impractical and results in a VI that is difficult to debug and use.
Clusters
Clusters enable you to create data structures that contain any type of data.
A cluster is useful for storing data about objects. When you create software,
you might need to model real-world items. For example, you might need to

create a model of an employee for a company. In this case, the VI should be

able to store data about the employee, such as their name, social security
number, date of birth, and home address. You can place all the individual
data elements into a single cluster labeled employee. Use clusters to group
data into an individual data type. If you store the data as scalar data and do
not group the data, it is difficult to process the data.
Job Aid
Use the following checklist to help identify appropriate data structures.
❑ Use scalars for data items that are associated with single, non-related
items.
❑ Make sure all scalar data would never need to be a more advanced data
structure.
❑ Use arrays for items of the same type that should be grouped together.
❑ Use clusters for items of different or similar types that can be grouped
to form a single, coherent data item.

Exercise 4-4 Choose Data Types

Goal
Design and create the data types that you need for this application.
Scenario
When you develop a VI, you must identify and design the data types that you
need to use in the application.
Design
Design a cluster called Cue for the cue information that contains the
following data elements:
• Cue Name (string)
• Wait Time (32-bit unsigned integer)
• Fade Time (32-bit unsigned integer)
• Follow Time (32-bit unsigned integer)
• Channels (2D array of channel.ctl)
The final cluster should resemble Figure 4-24. Use controls from the
System palette where appropriate, so your application will look like the
native operating system when moved to different locations.
Figure 4-24. Cue Information Cluster

Implementation
1. Open the TLC project if it is not already open.
2. Add tlc_Cue_Information.ctl to the Controls virtual folder in

the TLC project.
❑ Right-click the Controls virtual folder in the TLC project tree and
select Add»File from the shortcut menu.
❑ Navigate to the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\

Course Project\Controls directory, select
tlc_Cue_Information.ctl and click the Add File button to add
the file.
3. Open tlc_Cue_Information.ctl and verify that the Control Type

pull-down menu is set to Type Def.
4. Create the Cue Name, Wait Time, Fade Time, and Follow Time controls.
Use the System palette to create the controls. Place the controls inside
the cluster.
❑ Place a system string control in the cluster and label the control Cue
Name.
❑ Place a system numeric control in the cluster and label the numeric
Wait Time (s).
❑ Right-click the numeric control and select Representation»

Unsigned Long (U32) from the shortcut menu.
❑ Place two copies of the Wait Time (s) control inside the cluster.
Name one Fade Time (s) and name one Follow Time (s).
5. Create the Channels 2D array shell. Turn off index display for the array.
❑ Place an array from the Modern palette inside the cluster. Change
the label of the array to Channels.
❑ Right-click the array shell and select Add Dimension from the
shortcut menu to make the array 2D.
❑ Right-click the array shell and select Visible Items»Index Display

to turn off index display.
6. Add the channel.ctl file located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls directory to the
Controls virtual folder of the TLC project.

7. Click and drag channel.ctl from the Project Explorer window into
the Channel array shell that you created in step 5.
8. Save the completed control.
9. Close the Control Editor and any open VIs.
End of Exercise 4-4

G. Information Hiding
When you design a data structure, consider whether you need to limit
interaction among components. When you develop a VI, it is important to
protect the data so that other modules or applications can not modify the
data. In academia, protecting the data is often referred to as data
encapsulation or information hiding. In this course, information hiding
refers to preventing or limiting other components from accessing data items
in a module except through some predetermined method. Use information
hiding to create VIs that are highly reliable and easy to maintain.
Consider a VI that accesses data using a global variable. It is possible for any
module to access that same global variable and change its value without any
other module knowing that the global variable has changed, as shown in
Figure 4-25.
1 2
1 VI1 Accesses Data in a Global Variable 2 VI2 Accesses the Same Data in a Global Variable
Figure 4-25. Global Variables Without Information Hiding in Two VIs
If you implement information hiding for this global variable by creating a

VI that accesses it, as shown in Figure 4-26, then you can read from and
write to the global variable by calling the VI. By using information hiding,
you have created a system that protects the data. Information hiding requires
you to be disciplined when you build VIs. You must always access the data
using the system that you created.
Figure 4-26. VIs Used to Access Data
The advantage to using information hiding is that you alleviate the details
from the program. All the work that needs to happen to read from and write
to a data item occurs in a lower-level VI. You can modify the functionality
of the data without breaking the code that calls the VI that hides the
information. The only thing you need to modify is the VI that operates on

the data. This improves reliability when you are working with data in a VI.
Whenever you are working with data in LabVIEW, make sure that you
create an interface that can interact with the data in the system. This
interface is a VI that can read from and/or write to the data.
Functional Global Variables

You can use uninitialized shift registers in For or While Loops to hold data
as long as the VI never goes out of memory. The shift register holds the last
state of the shift register. A loop with an uninitialized shift register is known
as a functional global variable. The advantage of a functional global variable
over a global variable is that you can control access to the data in the shift
register. Also, the functional global variable eliminates the possibility of
race conditions because only one instance of a functional global variable can
be loaded into memory at a time. The general form of a functional global
variable includes an uninitialized shift register with a single iteration For or
While Loop, as shown in Figure 4-27.
1 Uninitialized Shift Register
Figure 4-27. Functional Global Variable Format
A functional global variable usually has an action input parameter that

specifies which task the VI performs. The VI uses an uninitialized shift
register in a While Loop to hold the result of the operation.

Figure 4-28 shows a simple functional global variable with set and get
functionality.
Figure 4-28. Functional Global Variable with Set and Get Functionality
In this example, data passes into the VI and is stored in the shift register if
the enumerated data type is configured to Set. Data is retrieved from the
shift register if the enumerated data type is configured to Get.
Tip Before you use a local or global variable, make sure a functional global variable
would not have worked instead.
Although you can use functional global variables to implement simple

global variables, as shown in the previous example, they are especially
useful when implementing more complex data structures, such as a stack or
a queue buffer. You also can use functional global variables to protect access
to global resources, such as files, instruments, and data acquisition devices,
that you cannot represent with a global variable.

Using Functional Global Variables for Timing

One powerful application of functional global variables is to perform timing
in your VI. Many VIs that perform measurement and automation require
some form of timing. Often an instrument or hardware device needs time to
initialize, and you must build explicit timing into your VI to take into
account the physical time required to initialize a system. You can create a
functional global variable that measures the elapsed time between each time
the VI is called, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29. Elapsed Time Functional Global Variable
The Elapsed Time case gets the current date and time in seconds and
subtracts it from the time that is stored in the shift register. The Reset Time
case initializes the functional global variable with a known time value.
Job Aid
In order to achieve information hiding, ensure that all data items have an
interface to read from and/or write to the data.

Exercise 4-5 Information Hiding

Goal
Design a VI that provides an interface to the data.
Scenario
Build a VI that uses a functional global variable to provide an interface to
the Cue data type you created in Exercise 4-4. The functional global
variable provides a safe way to access the data that the application needs.
Design
To provide an interface to the data in the Cue data type, you need to create
a VI that can access the Cue data type. Create a functional global variable to
access the data.
The functional global variable implements the following functions:

• Initialize
• Add Cue
• Get Cue Values
• Set Cue Values
• Get Number of Cues
• Get Empty Cue
Implementation
2. Create a Cue virtual folder in the Modules virtual folder of the TLC
project.
❑ Right-click the Modules virtual folder in the Project Explorer

window and select New»Virtual Folder from the shortcut menu.
❑ Name the virtual folder Cue.
3. Add tlc_Cue Module.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\Cue directory to the
Cue virtual folder.
❑ Right-click the Cue virtual folder in the Project Explorer window

and select Add»File from the shortcut menu.

❑ Navigate to <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\

Course Project\Modules\Cue, select tlc_Cue Module.vi
and click the Add File button to add the file to the Cue virtual folder.
4. Open tlc_Cue Module.vi. The controls, indicators, and structures

have already been added to the VI. Notice that the VI uses the custom
control that you created in Exercise 4-4.
5. Set the default value of the Fade Time (s) input to 1 second.
❑ Set Fade Time (s) in the Cue Input cluster to 1.
❑ Right-click the Fade Time (s) control and select Data Operations»
Make Current Value Default from the shortcut menu.
6. Complete the Add Cue case as shown in Figure 4-30 using the following
items. This case is used whenever a new cue is being recorded.
❑ Three shift registers—Create a shift register by right-clicking the

border of the loop and selecting Add Shift Register from the
shortcut menu.
❑ Build Array—Resize the function to have two inputs.
Figure 4-30. Functional Global Variable Add Cue Case
Note A True constant is wired to the loop condition terminal so that the loop iterates
only once every time it is called.
7. Complete the Get Cue Values case as shown in Figure 4-31 using the
following item. This case is used to load the next cue from the Cue List.

❑ Index Array
Figure 4-31. Get Cue Values Case
8. Complete the Set Cue Values case as shown in Figure 4-32 using the
following item. This case is called whenever an existing cue is being
modified.
❑ Replace Array Subset
Figure 4-32. Set Cue Values Case
9. Complete the Get Number of Cues case as shown in Figure 4-33 using
the following item. This case is used to retrieve the recorded cues and to
update the cue list on the user interface.

❑ Array Size function
Figure 4-33. Get Number of Cues Case
10. Complete the Initialize case as shown in Figure 4-34 using the following
item. This case is called when the Theatre Light Control software is
started.
Tip To create the cluster constant, right-click the right array tunnel and select Create»
Constant from the shortcut menu.
❑ Unbundle By Name
Figure 4-34. Initialize Case

11. Complete the Get Empty Cue case, as shown in Figure 4-35 using the
following items.
This case is called whenever a blank cue is needed, such as initialization
of the front panel and when recording a new cue. A blank cue consists
of an intensity of zero, a color of black, and the appropriate channel
number.
❑ Two For Loops
Tip Create more working space on the front panel or block diagram by pressing the
<Ctrl> key and using the Positioning tool to drag out a rectangle where you want more
space.
❑ channel.ctl constant—Located in the Controls virtual folder of

the Project Explorer window
Tip Arrange a cluster horizontally, or vertically by right-clicking on the cluster border

and selecting Autosizing»Arrange Horizontally or Autosizing»Arrange Vertically.
This can be used to decrease the size of the cluster.
❑ Two shift registers—These will be used to store the channel number

as you iterate through the 2-D array.
❑ Bundle By Name—This function is used inside of the inner For

Loop to create a blank channel from channel.ctl, replacing the
Channel numeric value.
❑ Bundle By Name—This function is used outside the nested For

Loops to create a new cue from the Cue Input parameter, replacing
the Channels array value.
When you wire the Channel output of the Bundle By Name in the
inner For Loop to the Channels input of the second Bundle By
Name, the tunnels on the For Loops have indexing enabled by
default. This results in the creation of a 2-D array of Channels, with
the outer loop determining the number of rows and the inner loop
determining the number of columns.
❑ I32 numeric constant—This constant ensures that the channel

number starts at zero each time this case is called.
❑ Increment—This function increments the channel number for each

iteration of the loops.
❑ Local variable for the Cue Output

Tip To create a local variable, right-click the outside border of the Cue Output indicator
on the front panel and select Create»Local Variable.
Figure 4-35. Get Empty Cue Case
12. Save the VI.
This VI provides controlled access to the data stored in the cue. With this
type of VI, the data is protected.
Testing
Test the VI to verify its operation.
1. Set the following front panel controls:
❑ Command = Initialize
❑ Rows = 4
❑ Columns = 8
2. Run the VI.
❑ Command = Get Empty Cue
4. Run the VI.

5. Verify that the Cue Output contains a 32 element Channel array.
❑ Right-click the Channels control and select Visible Items»Index

Display.
❑ The array should contain 32 elements because you specified 4 rows

and 8 columns.
Verify that there are 4 rows by increasing the Row Index from
0 to 3. Verify that there are 8 rows by increasing the Column Index
from 0 to 7. The element in row 3, column 7 should be Channel 31.
❑ Right-click the Channels control and deselect Visible Items»Index

Display.
❑ Command = Add Cue
❑ Cue Input = Place dummy data in the Wait Time(s), Fade Time(s),
and Follow Time(s) controls.
7. Run the VI.
❑ Command = Get Number of Cues
9. Run the VI.
10. Verify that the Number of Cues indicator displays 1.
❑ Command = Get Cue Values
❑ Cue Index = 0
12. Run the VI.
13. Verify that the Cue Output matches the information that you placed in
step 6.
End of Exercise 4-5

H. Designing Error Handling Strategies

No matter how confident you are in the VI you create, you cannot predict
every problem a user can encounter. Without a mechanism to check for
errors, you know only that the VI does not work properly. Error checking
tells you why and where errors occur.
During the software design process, you must define a strategy for handling
errors. There are three primary strategies you can use to handle errors in
LabVIEW.
• You can design a proactive system that catches potential errors. For
example, you might need to catch any problems in a configuration
before the system passes the configuration to a data acquisition driver.
The system can prevent the data acquisition driver from executing if
there are errors in the configuration.
• You can design corrective error processing that tries to determine the
error and fix the error. This allows each module to implement error
correcting code. For example, you could develop a Read File I/O VI to
fix errors that occur in the Open/Create/Replace File VI.
• You can design a system that reports errors to the user. If an error occurs,
the individual modules do not execute, and the system notifies the user
what error occurred.
When creating software, you should develop separate error handling code
for two phases of the process—development and deployment. During
development, the error handling code should be noticeable and should
clearly indicate where errors occur. This helps you determine where any
bugs might exist in a VI. During deployment, however, you want the error
handling system to be unobtrusive to the user. This error handling system
should allow a clean exit and provide clear prompts to the user.
When you design the error handling strategy, consider how the system
should respond based on the severity of the error. If the error is only a
warning, it is not necessary to completely stop the system when the error
occurs. For example, consider a File dialog box that contains a Cancel
button the user can click to cancel the selection of a file. If the user clicks
the Cancel button, the entire software system should not stop. It is
preferable to log this type of error as a warning. An exception error indicates
that something drastic has occurred in the system, such as a file logging
system that runs out of storage space. Exception errors should prevent the
rest of the system from operating.

Checking for Errors

When you perform any kind of input and output (I/O), consider the
possibility that errors might occur. Almost all I/O functions return error
information. Include error checking in VIs, especially for I/O operations
(file, serial, instrumentation, data acquisition, and communication), and
provide a mechanism to handle errors appropriately.
Error Handling
You can choose other error handling methods. For example, if an I/O VI on
the block diagram times out, you might not want the entire application to
stop and display an error dialog box. You also might want the VI to retry for
a certain period of time. In LabVIEW, you can make these error handling
decisions on the block diagram of the VI.
Use the LabVIEW error handling VIs and functions on the Dialog & User
Interface palette and the error in and error out parameters of most VIs and
functions to manage errors. For example, if LabVIEW encounters an error,
you can display the error message in different kinds of dialog boxes. Use
error handling in conjunction with the debugging tools to find and manage
errors.
VIs and functions return errors in one of two ways—with numeric error
codes or with an error cluster. Typically, functions use numeric error codes,
and VIs use an error cluster, usually with error inputs and outputs.
Error handling in LabVIEW follows the dataflow model. Just as data values
flow through a VI, so can error information. Wire the error information from
the beginning of the VI to the end. Include an error handler VI at the end of
the VI to determine if the VI ran without errors. Use the error in and error
out clusters in each VI you use or build to pass the error information through
the VI.
As the VI runs, LabVIEW tests for errors at each execution node. If

LabVIEW does not find any errors, the node executes normally. If
LabVIEW detects an error, the node passes the error to the next node
without executing that part of the code. The next node does the same thing,
and so on. At the end of the execution flow, LabVIEW reports the error.
Error Clusters
The error in and error out clusters include the following components of
information:
• status is a Boolean value that reports TRUE if an error occurred.
• code is a 32-bit signed integer that identifies the error numerically. A
nonzero error code coupled with a status of FALSE signals a warning
rather than a error.
• source is a string that identifies where the error occurred.

Error Codes
You can create custom error messages that are meaningful for your own VIs.
Determine where possible errors can occur in the VI, and define error codes
and messages for those errors. National Instruments recommends that you
use the General Error Handler VI to define custom error codes in the range
of 5000 to 9999 and –8999 to –8000. However, you also can define
custom error codes in the same range using the Error Code File Editor
dialog box. Use this method if you want to use the same custom error codes
with several VIs or if you want to distribute custom error codes with an
application or shared library. If you want to distribute the custom error codes
with an application or shared library, you must distribute the error code text
files.
Complete the following steps to define custom error codes using the Error
Code File Editor.
1. Select Tools»Advanced»Edit Error Codes to launch the Error Code
File Editor.
2. In the prompt that appears, click the New button to create a new error
codes file or click the Open button to browse to an existing error codes
file.
3. Enter comments about the error codes file in the Comments about this
file text box.
4. Click the Add button to add an error code and description to the error
codes file.
5. After you create new error codes, you can select and edit the error code
descriptions using the Error code and Error text controls.
6. When you are done editing the error codes file, select File»Save to save
the error codes file in the labview\user.lib\errors directory. You
must save the error codes file in the format xxx-errors.txt, where
xxx is a name that you supply.
You also can define custom error codes in the same range by creating an
XML-based text file. You must name the text file xxx-errors.txt, where
xxx is a name that you supply. The xxx-errors.txt file must use the
following syntax exactly, including capitalization, spacing, and so on. You
supply the italic text:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<nidocument>
<nicomment>
This file describes custom errors for my VI.
</nicomment>
<nierror code="5000">
Memory full.
Add more memory.

</nierror>
<nierror code="5001">
Invalid name. Enter a new name.
</nierror>
</nidocument>
You can add your own comment between the

<nicomment></nicomment> tags. In each <nierror> tag, you must
define the error code number. Define the error code message between the
<nierror></nierror> tags.
Changes to error code text files take effect the next time you start LabVIEW.
Job Aid
Use the following checklist to determine the critical sections of a VI that
require an error handling strategy.
❑ Code that interfaces with hardware
❑ Code that interacts with an external database
❑ Any user input
❑ Code that interacts with and manages files
❑ Code that interfaces with output devices, such as printers
❑ Code that interacts with external applications

Exercise 4-6 Design an Error Handling Strategy

Goal
Develop a strategy to handle errors in the application.
Scenario
Creating an error code that is custom to the application is easy in the
LabVIEW environment. Using the error code in the application provides a
detailed description of the error that occurred. You can use this information
to diagnose the error and where the error occurred. Every application that
contains multiple states must provide a method and strategy for handling
errors.
Design
Use the LabVIEW Error Code File Editor to create the following error code,
based on a possible error that can occur in the application.
Error Code Description

5000 Cue Data Error
Implementation
Part A: Edit the Error Code File
2. Edit the Error Code File.
❑ Open the Error Code File Editor. Select Tools»Advanced»Edit

Error Codes and click the New button to create a new error code
file.
❑ Create the error code as specified in the Design section. Click the
Add button to open the Add Error Code dialog box.
Note LabVIEW automatically sets the New Code value to 5000 and increments it each
time you click the Add button.
❑ Enter the description from the table in the Design section in the New
Description text box. Click OK to add the error code.
❑ Select File»Save As to save the error code file as tlc-errors.txt

in the Labview\user.lib\errors directory.
❑ Close the LabVIEW Error Code File editor.

Part B: Modify the Functional Global Variable

1. In Exercise 4-5, you created a functional global variable to control
access to the cue data. It is possible to pass an invalid index to the
tlc_Cue Module.vi. Modify the functional global variable to handle
the invalid index and generate error 5000.
❑ Open tlc_Cue Module.vi from the Project Explorer window.
❑ Open the block diagram and place a Case structure around the While
Loop.
❑ Wire the error in and error out clusters to the Case structure and the
While Loop.
❑ Run error wires through each case of the block diagram.
2. Modify the Get Cue Values case to determine if the desired cue exists
before attempting to obtain its value. Figure 4-36 shows the True and
False cases for the Get Cue Values case. To build the Get Cue Values
case, use the following items:
❑ Array Size—The Array Size function is used to determine the

number of elements in the cue array and the minimum number of
cues in the array is zero.
❑ In Range And Coerce—When In Range and Coerce is wired to the

limit inputs shown in Figure 4-36, the In Range? output indicates
whether the Cue Index specified is valid for the existing cue array.
If it is not within range, error 5000 is generated.
❑ Two numeric constants
❑ Case Structure
❑ Error Cluster From Error Code VI—Place this cluster in the False
case of the Get Cue Values Case structure.
Note Error Cluster From Error Code VI converts an error or warning code to an error
cluster. This VI is useful when you receive a return value from a DLL call or when you
return user-defined error codes.
❑ True Constant—Connect this constant to the show call chain? input

so that when an error occurs, source includes the chain of callers
from the VI that produced the error or warning to the top-level VI.

Figure 4-36. Modified Get Cue Values Case
3. Modify the Set Cue Values case to determine if the desired cue exists
before attempting to change its value. Figure 4-37 shows the True and
False cases for the Set Cue Values case. To build this case, you use the
same items that you used for Step 2.

Figure 4-37. Modified Set Cue Values Case
4. Save the project and the VI.
Testing
1. Restart LabVIEW to load the error code file.
2. Generate an error with the Cue Module VI.
❑ Open the TLC project.
❑ Open tlc_Cue Module.vi located in the Project Explorer

window.
❑ Enter an invalid Cue Index with Command set to Get Cue Values.
❑ Run the VI.

3. Verify that the error explanation matches what you specified when you
created the error code file.
❑ Verify that an error has been generated in error out.
❑ Right-click the error cluster and select Explain Error from the
shortcut menu.
❑ Verify that in the Explanation text box, Possible reason(s):

displays the description that you specified.
4. Verify that the same error is generated if you enter an invalid Cue Index
with Command set to Set Cue Values.
End of Exercise 4-6

Summary – Quiz
1. Which of the following describes good module hierarchy?
a. High cohesion and high coupling
b. High cohesion and low coupling
c. Low cohesion and high coupling
d. Low cohesion and low coupling
2. Which design pattern is best suited for an application that can be

described using a state transition diagram?
a. State machine
b. Master/slave
c. User Interface Event Handler
d. Producer/Consumer (Data)
3. Which design pattern is best suited for a non-sequential application that

requires that the user interface events and updates be separated from
processor-intensive code?
a. Queued message handler
b. Master/slave
c. Parallel Loop
d. Producer/Consumer (Events)


1. Which of the following describes good module hierarchy?
a. High cohesion and high coupling
b. High cohesion and low coupling
c. Low cohesion and high coupling
d. Low cohesion and low coupling
2. Which design pattern is best suited for an application that can be

described using a state transition diagram?
a. State machine
b. Master/slave
c. User Interface Event Handler
d. Producer/Consumer (Data)
3. Which design pattern is best suited for a non-sequential application that

requires that the user interface events and updates be separated from
processor-intensive code?
a. Queued message handler
b. Master/slave
c. Parallel Loop
d. Producer/Consumer (Events)

Notes

Implementing the User Interface
5
This lesson describes techniques you can use in LabVIEW to improve the
way you implement user interfaces. You use a structured approach to
developing a VI user interface. You learn valuable techniques that improve
the usability of the user interface and improve the development of the VI.
Topics
A. Implementing User Interface-Based Data Types
B. Implementing Meaningful Icons
C. Implementing Appropriate Connector Panes

Lesson 5 Implementing the User Interface
A. Implementing User Interface-Based Data Types

LabVIEW uses user interface-based data types to store data. Unlike
text-based programming languages, where you must declare variables,
LabVIEW stores data as it flows through the VI. LabVIEW stores data in
one of three ways—user interface-based (front panel) data types, block
diagram constants, or shift registers. You can store data on the user interface
as scalar data, arrays, or clusters. A good way to organize the data in a VI is
to group the data, such as in an array or a cluster. Grouping the data
improves the readability of the VI and helps reduce development time
because LabVIEW includes built-in functions for handling grouped data.
Scalar Data
As described in Lesson 3, Designing the User Interface, an example of a
scalar value can be a numeric value or a Boolean value. There are many
ways to organize scalar data to improve the user interface and the usability
of the application. The preferred method for organizing scalar data is to use
a ring control or enumerated type control. These controls associate a
numeric value with a text string that the user sees on the front panel or user
interface.
Ring Controls
Ring controls are numeric objects that associate numeric values with strings
or pictures. Ring controls appear as pull-down menus that users can cycle
through to make selections.
Ring controls are useful for selecting mutually exclusive items, such as
trigger modes. For example, use a ring control for users to select from
continuous, single, and external triggering.
When you configure the list of items for a ring control, you can assign a
specific numeric value to each item. If you do not assign specific numeric
values to the items, LabVIEW assigns sequential values that correspond to
the order of the items in the list, starting with a value of 0 for the first item.
Enumerated Type Controls

Use enumerated type controls to give users a list of items from which to
select. An enumerated type control, or enum, is similar to a text or menu ring
control. However, the data type of an enumerated type control includes
information about the numeric values and the string labels in the control.
The data type of a ring control is numeric.
Enumerated Type Controls Versus Ring Controls

Ring controls are useful for front panels the user interacts with where you
want to programmatically change the string labels. You might want to use a

ring control instead of a Boolean control because if you decide to change the
control to include more than two options, you can add options easily to a
ring control.
You cannot change the string labels in an enumerated type control

programmatically at run time because the string labels are a part of the data
type. When using enumerated type controls, always make a type definition
of the control. Creating type definitions prevents you from needing to
rewrite the code each time you add or remove an item from an enumerated
type control.
Enumerated type controls are useful for making block diagram code easier
to read because when you wire an enumerated type control to a Case
structure, the string labels appear in the selector label of the Case structure.
Numeric Scalar Data

When you use scalar data that is numeric, such as a numeric control, it is
important to choose an appropriate representation for the data type. When
you make a decision on the representation, you must understand and
consider what type of data you want to store in the data type. Try to choose
data types that provide a more accurate range for the data that you want to
store. For example, if you are developing an application that generates
random integers from 0 to 10, it is appropriate to select an 8-bit unsigned
integer (U8) to represent the data because an 8-bit unsigned integer can
represent values from 0 to 255. The representation for the data type more
closely represents the data you want to store. Refer to Table 5-1 to determine
the best representation for a data type.
Table 5-1. Numeric Data Types
Bits of
Storage
Terminal Numeric Data Type on Disk Approximate Range on Disk
Extended-precision, 128 Minimum positive number: 6.48e–4966
floating-point
Maximum positive number: 1.19e+4932
Minimum negative number: –6.48e–4966
Maximum negative number: –1.19e+4932
Double-precision, 64 Minimum positive number: 4.94e–324
floating point

Table 5-1. Numeric Data Types (Continued)
Bits of
Storage
Terminal Numeric Data Type on Disk Approximate Range on Disk
Single-precision, 32 Minimum positive number: 1.40e–45
floating point
long signed integer 32 –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
word signed integer 16 –32,768 to 32,767
byte signed integer 8 –128 to 127
long unsigned integer 32 0 to 4,294,967,295
word unsigned 16 0 to 65,535

integer
byte unsigned integer 8 0 to 255
Complex, 256 Same as extended-precision, floating-point

extended-precision, for each (real and imaginary) part
floating-point
Complex, 128 Same as double-precision, floating-point
double-precision, for each (real and imaginary) part
floating-point
Complex, 64 Same as single-precision, floating-point
single-precision, for each (real and imaginary) part
floating-point
128-bit time stamp <64.64> Minimum time (in seconds):
5.4210108624275221700372640043497e–20
Maximum time (in seconds):
9,223,372,036,854,775,808

Arrays
Arrays group data elements of the same type. You can build arrays of
numeric, Boolean, path, string, waveform, and cluster data types. Consider
using arrays when you work with a collection of similar data and when you
perform repetitive computations. Arrays are ideal for storing data you
collect from waveforms or data generated in loops, where each iteration of
a loop produces one element of the array.
Users can view the data stored in the array using the index display. However,
the best method for displaying the data stored in an array is to output the data
to a graph rather than placing an array on the front panel of a VI. It is much
easier for a user to view the array data in a graph rather than in an array.
Keep in mind the following rules when you work with arrays:
You cannot create:

• An array of arrays
Note You can use a multidimensional array or the Build Cluster Array function to create
an array of clusters where each cluster contains one or more arrays.
• An array of subpanel controls

• An array of tab controls
• An array of ActiveX controls
• An array of charts
• An array of multiplot XY graphs
Clusters
Clusters group data elements of mixed types. An example of a cluster is the
LabVIEW error cluster, which combines a Boolean value, a numeric value,
and a string. Using clusters to store data provides the following advantages:
• Clusters eliminate wire clutter on the block diagram and reduce the
number of connector pane terminals a subVI uses.
• Clusters allow you to create specific, organized data objects.
Clusters are valuable tools for creating readable, maintainable VIs. You can
create clusters that include any data type you choose. When you create a
cluster, you should always create a type definition of the cluster so you can
add new data elements to the cluster. Creating a cluster with a type definition
helps make your data structures and your VIs more scalable, readable, and
maintainable.

Always use the Bundle By Name and Unbundle By Name functions with
clusters in your VIs. The Bundle By Name and Unbundle By Name
functions help make your block diagram more readable because you can
identify the data that you are placing in or using from the cluster. Also, these
functions do not require you to maintain cluster order. By contrast, the
Bundle and Unbundle functions are dependent on the order of items in the
cluster, which can cause problems if you have similar data types in a cluster
and you do not know the cluster order. The Bundle By Name and Unbundle
By Name functions display the owned labels of the items in the cluster on
the function terminals.
Job Aid
Use the following checklist to help develop user interface-based data
structures.
❑ Use a ring control to programmatically change the string labels in the

control.
❑ Use a ring control instead of a Boolean control to improve the scalability

of a VI.
❑ Use an enumerated type control to improve block diagram readability.

When you wire an enumerated type control to a Case structure, the Case
structure displays the values of the enumerated type control in the case
selector.
❑ Use arrays to store data of the same type, but use a graph to display array
data.
❑ Use clusters to eliminate wire clutter and create your own custom data
types.
❑ Always use the Unbundle By Name and Bundle By Name functions for
programmatic control of cluster data.
❑ Always create a type definition for clusters, ring controls, and

enumerated type controls.

Exercise 5-1 Implement User Interface-Based Data Types

Goal
Implement the user interface-based data types.
Scenario
Implement the user interface for the application. The specification from the
customer and the requirements document define the user interface for the
project.
Design
Figure 5-1 shows the user interface from the requirements document.
Figure 5-1. Theatre Light Control User Interface
The user interface includes the following inputs and outputs.
Inputs
• Play button—Input by the user
• Record button—Input by the user
• Stop button—Input by the user
Outputs
• Cue List listbox—Displays a list of all of the recorded cues
• Cue Name string—Displays the name of the currently playing cue
• Wait Time (s) numeric—Displays the wait time for the currently
playing cue
• Fade Time (s) numeric—Displays the fade time for the currently
playing cue

• Follow Time (s) numeric—Displays the follow time for the currently
playing cue
• Channel cluster—Displays the channel number, channel intensity, and
channel color for each channel
Implementation
Create a front panel similar to the user interface shown in Figure 5-1.
2. Create a new VI based on the producer/consumer (events) design

pattern.
❑ Select File»New from the Project Explorer window to open the

New dialog box.
❑ In the New dialog box, select VI»From Template»Frameworks»

Design Patterns»Producer/Consumer Design Pattern(Events)
and make sure a checkmark appears in the Add to Project
checkbox.
❑ Click the OK button to open the design pattern.
❑ Save the VI as TLC Main.vi in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project directory. LabVIEW
automatically adds the file to the project.
3. Delete the Queue Event button and the STOP button.
4. Create the cue list.
❑ Place a system Listbox on the front panel.
❑ Change the label of the Listbox to Cue List.
❑ Right-click the Listbox and select Change to Indicator.
❑ Right-click the Listbox. Select Visible Items and deselect Label to

hide Cue List.
5. Customize a dialog button with a decal to create the play button.
❑ Place a system button on the front panel.
❑ Right-click the button and select Advanced»Customize from the

shortcut menu to open the Control Editor.

❑ Select Edit»Import Picture to Clipboard and select play.gif

located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\
Course Project\Shared\Images directory to place the image
on the clipboard.
❑ Right-click the button in the Control Editor and select Import

Picture from Clipboard»Decal from the shortcut menu to place the
decal on the button.
❑ Right-click the button and deselect Visible Items»Boolean Text

from the shortcut menu to hide the text on the button.
❑ Save the control as Play Button.ctl in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls
directory.
❑ Select Play Button.ctl in the Project Explorer window and

drag the file to the Controls virtual folder in the Project Explorer
window to place the control in the project hierarchy.
❑ Change the label of the control to Play.
❑ Close the Control Editor. When prompted, click Yes to replace the
original control with the custom control.
6. Add Record Button.ctl and Stop Button.ctl to the project and

the front panel:
❑ Right-click the Controls virtual folder, select Add»File from the

shortcut menu and navigate to the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls directory.
❑ Select Record Button.ctl and Stop Button.ctl and click the

Add File button to add the controls to the Controls virtual folder.
Tip Hold the <Ctrl> key down while clicking on the file names to select multiple files.
❑ Click and drag the custom controls from the Project Explorer
window to the front panel.
❑ Arrange the controls on the front panel.
❑ Hide the labels on the controls.

7. Place the typedef that contains the Cue Name, Wait Time, Fade Time,
Follow Time, and array of Channels on the front panel.
❑ Drag tlc_Cue_Information.ctl from the Project Explorer

window to the front panel.
❑ Click and drag the border of tlc_Cue_Information.ctl to

resize the cluster to match the specification in Figure 5-1. Click and
drag the corner of the array until you have a 4x4 array of channels
displayed.
❑ Hide the label on the array.
❑ Right-click the cluster border and select Change to Indicator from

the shortcut menu.
8. Place decorations on the front panel to visibly group objects as shown in

Figure 5-1.
❑ Create a free label above the Listbox that says Cue Control.
❑ Create a free label above the Array that says Cue Information.
Tip Use the System Recessed Frame decoration to create a professional-looking user
interface.
9. Place error in and error out clusters on the front panel to pass error data
through the VI.
10. Resize the window to hide the error clusters.
11. Save the VI.
Note The Run button is broken because you deleted the Queue Event button and the
Stop button. You resolve the broken run button in a later exercise.
End of Exercise 5-1

B. Implementing Meaningful Icons

Use good style techniques when you create the icons and connector panes
for VIs. Following icon and connector pane style techniques can help users
understand the purpose of the VIs and make the VIs easier to use.
Icons
Create a meaningful icon for every VI. The icon represents the VI on a
palette and a block diagram. When subVIs have well-designed icons,
developers can gain a better understanding of the subVI without the need for
excessive documentation.
Use the following suggestions when creating icons.

• The LabVIEW libraries include well-designed icons that you can use as
prototypes. When you do not have a picture for an icon, text is
acceptable. If you localize the application, make sure you also localize
the text on the icon. A good size and font choice for text icons is 8 point
Small Fonts in all caps.
• Always create a black and white icon for printing purposes. Not every
user has access to a color printer.
• Create a unified icon style for related VIs to help users visually
understand what subVIs are associated with the top-level VI.
• Always create standard size (32 × 32 pixels) icons. VIs with smaller
icons can be awkward to select and wire and might look strange when
wired.
• Do not use colloquialisms when making an icon because colloquialisms
are difficult to translate. Users whose native language is not English
might not understand a picture that does not translate well. For example,
do not represent a datalogging VI with a picture of a tree branch or a
lumberjack.
Refer to the Creating an Icon topic of the LabVIEW Help for more
information about creating icons.
Tip You can use the graphics available in the NI Icon Art Glossary to create icons. To
access the Icon Art Glossary, visit ni.com/info and enter the info code rdglos. Each
graphic in the glossary corresponds to an operation, such as aborting an I/O session or
controlling the mode of an instrument.

Examples of Intuitive Icons

The Report Generation VIs are examples of icons designed with good style
techniques.
Figure 5-2. Report Generation VIs
The Report Generation VIs use images of a disk, a printer, a pencil, and a
trashcan to represent what the VIs do. The image of a piece of paper with
text on it represents a report and is a common element in the icons. This
consistency unifies the icon designs. Notice that none of the icons are
language dependent, thus they are suitable for speakers of any language.
You also can create non-square icons that are similar to the built-in
LabVIEW functions, such as the Numeric and Comparison functions. This
style of icon can improve readability of the block diagram. For example, you
can implement non-square icons to represent control theory functions, such
as a summer. To create a non-square icon, create the image in the icon editor,
then remove the border in each color mode of the icon. It is necessary to
remove the border because LabVIEW treats any non-enclosed white space
in the icon as transparent. Keeping the border creates enclosed white space
and results in a square VI icon.

Exercise 5-2 Implement a Meaningful Icon

Goal
Implement a meaningful icon for the VI.
Scenario
Follow the suggestions for creating an icon to develop an icon that describes
the purpose of TLC Main VI.
Design
Create an icon for the TLC Main VI that resembles the icon shown at left.
Implementation
1. Open the front panel of TLC Main VI.
2. Right-click the VI icon in the upper right corner of the front panel and
select Edit Icon from the shortcut menu to open the Icon Editor.
3. Create the 256 Colors icon. You can use bitmap images to create a
meaningful icon.
❑ Select Edit»Import Picture to Clipboard and select

icon background.bmp from the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\Course Project\Shared\Images
directory to place the image on the clipboard.
❑ Click the 256 Colors Icon. Select Edit»Paste to place the image in
the Icon Editor.
❑ Select Edit»Import Picture to Clipboard and select

light bulb.bmp from the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\Course Project\Shared\Images
directory to place the image on the clipboard.
❑ Using the dotted rectangle, select the region in the icon where you
want to paste the picture.
❑ Select Edit»Paste to place the image in the Icon Editor.
❑ Use the Text tool to add text to the icon.

4. Create 16-color version of the icon based on the 256-color version.
❑ Select the 16 Colors icon.
❑ Click the 256 Colors button under Copy from: to copy the image
from the 256 Colors Icon into a 16 color version for 16 Colors Icon.
5. Follow similar steps from Step 4 to create a Black and White Icon.
6. Click OK to close the Icon Editor. Save the VI.
End of Exercise 5-2

C. Implementing Appropriate Connector Panes

A connector pane is the set of terminals that correspond to the controls and
indicators of a VI. Refer to Chapter 7, Creating VIs and SubVIs, of the
LabVIEW User Manual for more information about setting up connector
panes.
Use the following suggestions when creating connector panes:

• Always select a connector pane pattern with more terminals than
necessary; including extra terminals in the VI allows you to add
additional connectors to the VI and makes relinking to the subVI in
calling VIs unnecessary.
• Keep the default 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 connector pane pattern to leave extra
terminals for later development. An example of the 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 pattern
is shown at left. Using the same pattern ensures that all VIs, even VIs
with few inputs, line up correctly and have straight wires connecting
them.
Wire inputs on the left and outputs on the right to follow the standard
left-to-right data flow.
When assigning terminals, keep in mind how the VIs will be wired together.
If you create a group of subVIs that you use together often, give the subVIs
a consistent connector pane with common inputs in the same location to
help you remember where to locate each input. If you create a subVI that
produces an output another subVI uses as the input, such as references, task
IDs, and error clusters, align the input and output connections to simplify
the wiring patterns.
When assigning terminals as inputs and outputs, make sure to split the
terminals of the connector pane consistently. If you need to use the middle
four terminals of the 4 × 2 × 2 × 4, divide them either horizontally or
vertically. For example, assign the inputs to the top two terminals and the
outputs to the bottom two terminals or assign the inputs to the left two
terminals and the outputs to the right two terminals.
• An example of the 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 wiring pattern with terminals assigned
is shown at left.
• Avoid using connector panes with more than 16 terminals.
• Although connector pane patterns with more terminals might seem
useful, they are very difficult to wire. If you need to pass more data, use
clusters.
• The Required, Recommended, Optional setting for connector pane
terminals affects the appearance of the inputs and outputs in the Context
Help window, and prevents users from forgetting to wire subVI

connections. Use the Required setting for inputs that users must wire
for the subVI to run properly. Use the Optional setting for inputs that
have default values that are appropriate for the subVI most of the time.
• Include error in and error out clusters in all subVIs, even if the subVI
does not process errors. error in and error out clusters are helpful for
controlling execution flow. If a subVI has an incoming error, you can use
a Case structure to send the error through the VI without executing any
of the subVI code.
Figure 5-3 shows the recommended style for assigning inputs and outputs to
a connector pane, with the inputs on the left and the outputs on the right,
following the flow of data from left to right.
1 2
1 Inputs 2 Outputs
Figure 5-3. Connector Pane Example
It is important to implement connector panes that provide for scalability and

follow a standard for wiring VIs. The connector pane shown in Figure 5-4
is not appropriate and is difficult to wire.
Figure 5-4. Inappropriate Connector Pane
When you develop VIs that are loosely coupled, it is easier to create an
appropriate connector pane. The 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 connector pane should work
for every loosely coupled VI. The VI shown in Figure 5-4 is not loosely
coupled because it performs work on more than one function.

The connector pane of a loosely coupled VI clearly shows the functionality

of the VI and how you should wire it, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5. Appropriate Connector Pane
In fact, the VI shown in Figure 5-5 uses an enumerated type control to pass
the function that the VI performs. A VI that uses a standard 4 × 2 × 2 × 4
connector pane provides for scalability.

Exercise 5-3 Implement an Appropriate Connector Pane

Goal
Implement an appropriate connector pane for the VI.
Scenario
Build every VI with the 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 connector pane. This connector pane
pattern provides for scalability, maintainability, and readability. The
4 × 2 × 2 × 4 connector pane is very easy to wire on a block diagram.
Design
Modify the TLC Main VI by following the connector pane guidelines in this
lesson to create a 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 connector pane, as shown at left. Connect
the error in and error out clusters on the front panel to the connector pane.
Implementation
1. Open the front panel of TLC Main VI.
2. Right-click the VI icon in the upper right corner of the front panel and
select Show Connector from the shortcut menu to display the connector
pane for the VI.
3. Right-click the connector pane and select Patterns from the shortcut
menu. Verify that the connector pane uses the 4 × 2 × 2 × 4 pattern.
4. Use the Wiring tool to connect the error in and error out clusters on the
front panel to the connector pane.
❑ Click the input on the connector pane you want to connect to the
error in cluster. Notice that your pointer becomes the wiring tool.
❑ Click the error in cluster on the front panel. That input on the
connector pane is now assigned to error in.
❑ Click the output on the connector pane you want to connect to the
error out cluster. Notice that your pointer once again becomes the
wiring tool.
❑ Click the error out cluster on the front panel. That output on the
connector pane is now assigned to error out.
5. Right-click the connector pane and select Show Icon from the shortcut
menu to display the icon for the VI.
6. Save and close the VI.
End of Exercise 5-3

Summary – Quiz
1. Which of the following is a constraint of working with arrays?
a. You cannot create an array of arrays.
b. You cannot create an array of charts.
c. You cannot create an array of tab controls.
d. All of the above are constraints.
2. True or False? You should create a unified icon style for related VIs.
3. Which connector pane terminal setting should be used for inputs that
users must wire for a calling VI to run properly?
a. Required
b. Recommended
c. Optional
d. None of the above


1. Which of the following is a constraint of working with arrays?
a. You cannot create an array of arrays.
b. You cannot create an array of charts.
c. You cannot create an array of tab controls.
d. All of the above are constraints.
2. True or False? You should create a unified icon style for related VIs.
True. This helps users quickly identify which subVI calls are
associated with the top-level VI.
3. Which connector pane terminal setting should be used for inputs that
users must wire for a calling VI to run properly?
a. Required
b. Recommended
c. Optional

Notes

Implementing Code
6
This lesson focuses on creating the algorithms and VIs for your application.
You learn techniques to make modular applications and create VIs that are
readable and easy to maintain.
Topics
A. Configuration Management
B. Implementing a Design Pattern
C. Implementing Code
D. Develop Scalable and Maintainable Modules
E. Implement an Error Handling Strategy

Lesson 6 Implementing Code
A. Configuration Management
Configuration management is the process of controlling changes and
ensuring they are reviewed before they are made. A central focus of the
development models described in Lesson 1, Successful Development
Practices, is to convert software development from a chaotic, unplanned
activity to a controlled process. These models improve software
development by establishing specific, measurable goals at each stage of
development.
Regardless of how well development proceeds, changes that occur later in

the process need to be implemented. For example, customers often
introduce new requirements in the design stage, or performance problems
discovered during development prompt a reevaluation of the design. You
also might need to rewrite a section of code to correct a problem found in
testing. Changes can affect any component of the project from the
requirements and specification to the design, code, and tests. If you do not
make these changes carefully, you can introduce new problems that can
delay development or degrade quality.
Source Control
After you set the project quality requirements, develop a process to deal with
changes. This process is important for projects with multiple developers. As
developers work on VIs, they need a method to collect and share their work.
A simple method to deal with this is to establish a central source repository.
If all the development computers are on the network, you can create a shared
location that serves as a central source for development. When developers
need to modify files, they can retrieve the files from this location. When
developers complete their changes, they can return the files to this location.
Common files and areas of overlap introduce the potential for accidental
loss of work. If two developers decide to work on the same VI at the same
time, only one developer can work on the master copy. The other developer
must compare the VIs to determine the differences and incorporate the
changes into a new version. Avoid this situation by ensuring good
communication among the developers. If each developer notifies the others
when he needs to work on a specific VI, the others know not to work on that
VI.
Using source control in LabVIEW is a good solution to the problem of

sharing VIs and controlling access to avoid accidental loss of data. Source
control makes it easy to set up shared software projects and to retrieve the
latest files from a server. After you create a source control project, you can
check out a file for development. Checking out a file marks it with your
name so other developers know you are working on the file. If you want to
modify a file, you can check out the file from source control, make changes,

test the changes, and check the file back into source control. After you check
in the file, the latest version is available to the development team. Another
developer can check out the file to make further modifications.
Note Source control integration in LabVIEW is available only with the Professional
Development System.
You must select, install, and configure a source control provider in order to
use source control in a software project.
Refer to the KnowledgeBase for the most current list of third-party source
control providers that work with LabVIEW.
Source management of all software project-related files is extremely

important for developing quality software. Source management is a
requirement for certification under existing quality standards, such as
ISO 9000.
Retrieving Old Versions of Files

Sometimes you might need to retrieve an old version of a file. For example,
you might change a file, check it in, and then realize you need to undo the
change. You also might want to send a previous version of the software to a
customer while you continue development. If the customer reports a
problem, you can access a copy of the previous version of the software.
One way to access an old version of a file or project is to keep backup

copies. However, unless you back up the file after every change, you do not
have access to every version.
Source control provides a way to check in new versions of a file and access
previous versions. Depending on how you configure the source control
provider, the tools can store multiple versions of a file.
Tracking Changes
If you are managing a software project, it is important to monitor changes
and track progress toward specific milestone objectives. You can use this
information to determine problem areas of a project by identifying which
components required many changes.
Source control providers maintain a log of all changes made to files and
projects. When checking in a file, the provider prompts the developer to
write a summary of the changes made. The provider adds this summary
information to the log for that file.
You can view the history information for a file or for the system and
generate reports that contain the summary information.

In addition, if you back up files at specific checkpoints, you can compare the
latest version of a file with another version to verify changes.
Change Control
Large software projects can require a formal process for evaluation and
approval each time a developer asks to make changes. A formal process can
be too restrictive, so be selective when selecting the control mechanisms you
introduce into the system.
Source control gives you a degree of control when making changes. You can
track all changes, and you can configure a source control provider to
maintain previous versions so you can undo changes if necessary. Some
source control providers give you more options for controlling software
change. For example, with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe, IBM Rational
ClearCase, or Perforce, you can control which users can modify certain files
and which users can only access those files. You also can control access so
a user has privileges to modify a file only with the approval of the change
request.
Selecting a Source Control Provider

LabVIEW supports several third-party source control providers. Available
source control operations in LabVIEW are the same regardless of which
third-party provider you select. Specific support or functionality for each
operation varies by provider. For example, you cannot create Perforce
configuration files in LabVIEW.
In some cases, you might decide to use a specific source control provider
because your company has standardized on that application. If not, you must
decide which provider you want to use for managing your files. Consult the
source control administrator at your company to find out if you should use
a specific provider.
After you select and install a source control provider, you must configure
LabVIEW to work with that provider. You can configure LabVIEW to work
with only one source control provider at a time.

LabVIEW includes two source control integration interface types. On

Windows, LabVIEW integrates with any source control provider that
supports the Microsoft Source Code Control Interface. On non-Windows
platforms, LabVIEW integrates with Perforce using a command line
interface. National Instruments has tested LabVIEW with the following
third-party providers:
• Perforce
Note The LabVIEW Perforce Command Line offers additional source control
functionality such as VI compare.
• Microsoft Visual SourceSafe

• Microsoft Team System
• MKS Source Integrity
• IBM Rational ClearCase
• Serena Version Manager (PVCS)
• Seapine Surrond SCM
• Borland StarTeam
• Telelogic Synergy
• PushOK (CVS and SVN plugins)
• ionForge Evolution
Note Currently, ionForge Evolution version 2.8 and greater works with LabVIEW.
Refer to the KnowledgeBase for the most current list of third-party source
control providers that work with LabVIEW.
Source Control Operations in LabVIEW

After you configure LabVIEW to work with a third-party source control
provider, you can perform source control operations on any file or folder of
items in a LabVIEW project or on individual VIs. If you perform source
control operations on a folder, all appropriate items within the hierarchy are
affected. For example, if you add files to source control, LabVIEW adds
only files within the folder that you have not yet added to source control.
Access the following operations by selecting Tools»Source Control and
selecting among the available options. Within a LabVIEW project, you also
can use the Source Control toolbar buttons or right-click a file or folder in
the Project Explorer window and select the option from the shortcut menu.
You also can configure source control on individual LabVIEW projects

from the Source Control page of the Project Properties dialog box.
Configure source control for individual LabVIEW projects if you want to

use a different source control project than the one you specify for the
LabVIEW environment, or if you do not want to use source control with a
LabVIEW project. LabVIEW projects use the source control configuration
you specify for the LabVIEW environment by default. Select Project»
Properties or right-click the project root and select Properties from the
shortcut menu to display the Project Properties dialog box. Select Source
Control from the Category list to display the Source Control page.
Refer to the following caveats when you use source control:

• If you use source control with VIs outside of a LabVIEW project, you
cannot perform source control operations on project-specific items, such
as project libraries (.lvlib) or projects (.lvproj).
• If you attempt to perform source control operations on a VI in an LLB,
LabVIEW performs the operations on the LLB that contains the VI, not
on the VI itself. You cannot perform a source control operation on only
one VI in an LLB.
• If a VI is reentrant, you cannot perform source control operations on the
clone of the source VI. LabVIEW dims the source control operation
items in the Tools»Source Control menu of the clone VI.
You can complete the following source control operations in LabVIEW:

• Get Latest Version—Copies the latest version of the selected file from
source control to the local directory to synchronize the two versions. The
latest version of the file in source control overwrites the version in the
local directory.
• Check In—Checks the selected file into source control. The version of
the file in source control is updated to reflect the changes you made. If
the file selected has unsaved changes, the Unsaved Files dialog box
appears. You do not have to save the file to check it into source control.
• Check Out—Checks out the selected file from source control. If you try
to edit a file in source control that you did not check out, LabVIEW
prompts you to check out the file if you configured source control to
enable the prompt.
• Undo Check Out—Cancels a previous check-out operation and
restores the contents of the selected file to the previous version. Any
changes you made to the file are lost.
• Add to Source Control—Adds the selected file to source control.
LabVIEW prompts you to add any dependent files, such as subVIs, to
source control if you configured source control to enable the prompt.
Note This operation is available after you save a file.

• Remove from Source Control—Removes the selected file from source

control.
Caution Be careful when you remove files from source control. Some source control
providers delete the local directory copy of the file, all previous versions of the file that
the provider maintains, and the history log for the file.
• Show History—Displays the source control history of the selected file.

The history contains a record of changes to the file after it was added to
source control. The history provides information about the previous
versions of the file, such as file check-in dates and user actions. You
cannot perform this operation on folders.
• Show Differences—Displays the differences between the local copy of
the selected file and the version in source control. For text files,
LabVIEW uses the default comparison tool of the source control
provider. If you select a VI to compare, LabVIEW displays the results
in the Differences window. You cannot perform this operation on
folders.
Note If LabVIEW and the third-party source control provider are not compatible,
LabVIEW launches the default comparison tool of the third-party source control
provider. Perforce SCM and Rational ClearCase are not compatible with the procedure
LabVIEW uses to complete a graphical differencing of VIs. Refer to the
KnowledgeBase for more information about comparing VIs using Rational ClearCase.
• Properties—Displays the source control properties for the selected file,

including its check-out status and modification dates. You cannot
perform this operation on folders.
• Refresh Status—Updates the source control status of the files in the
LabVIEW project or of the VI if you are working outside a LabVIEW
project.
• Run Source Control Client—Launches the file management client of
the source control provider.
B. Implementing a Design Pattern

Lesson 3, Designing the User Interface, described how to select an
appropriate design pattern to form the underlying scalable architecture for a
VI. When you implement a chosen design pattern to create a scalable
architecture, consider how you want to initialize the VI and pass data in
the VI.

Initializing a Design Pattern

You must initialize any VI you create that is based on a design pattern.
Design patterns such as the state machine or producer/consumer require
some form of initialization to ensure that the VI is in a known state when
execution begins. There are several techniques you can use to initialize a
design pattern.
Initializing with a Single Frame Sequence Structure

The most common technique to initialize a design pattern uses a single
frame Sequence structure that executes before the design pattern executes.
For example, the producer/consumer design pattern shown in Figure 6-1
uses a single frame Sequence structure to initialize the queue and the front
panel controls. Notice that the Sequence structure uses a local variable to
initialize front panel controls. This is an acceptable use of local variables.
Figure 6-1. Producer/Consumer with Initialization
The initialization Sequence structure shown in Figure 6-1 consists of

readable code that you can scale as more objects require initialization. The
Sequence structure guarantees that the flow of data controls the order of
execution. The producer/consumer design pattern executes only after the
Sequence structure completes all the initialization steps. When you use a
single frame Sequence structure to initialize a design pattern, you can
control the execution of objects that do not have dataflow control, such as

local variables. In Figure 6-1, the Timing Control local variable must
initialize to 0 before the producer/consumer design pattern can execute.
If the Timing Control local variable was not enclosed in a structure, you
could not guarantee when the local variable would execute.
Initializing with an Initialization State

Many applications are based on the state machine design pattern. In the
typical flow of a state machine, the application initializes, performs some
work, and performs cleanup operations. To initialize a state machine design
pattern, create an initialization state. Use the initialization state to set up
files, open file references, open data acquisition devices or instruments, or
perform any other initialization necessary for execution to begin. Figure 6-2
shows an initialization state for a state machine design pattern.
Figure 6-2. State Machine with Initialization State
Initializing with Shift Registers

A less specific form of initialization occurs when you initialize shift
registers. Wire any value from outside the loop to the left shift register
terminal to initialize the shift register. If you do not initialize the shift

register, the loop retains the last value written to the register when the loop
last executed or the default value for the data type if the loop has not
executed. The easiest way to initialize a shift register is to right-click the
shift register and select Create»Constant from the shortcut menu. When
you initialize a shift register that contains strings, use a string constant to
perform the initialization.
Always right-click initialization string constants and select ‘\’ Codes

Display from the shortcut menu to instruct LabVIEW to interpret characters
that immediately follow a backslash (\) as a code for non-displayable
characters. This improves block diagram readability by displaying any
hidden characters that are used to initialize the shift register.
Data Types for Passing Data

When you use the producer/consumer (events) design pattern, you often
need to pass more than one type of data within a VI. Using a cluster
containing a variant and an enumerated type control gives you the flexibility
to pass data and commands to the consumer loop. The variant enables you
to pass any data type from the producer to the consumer, and the enumerated
type control enables the producer to control what function the consumer
performs.
Variant Data
Sometimes you may need a VI to handle data of many different types in a
generic way. You could write a different VI for each specific data type, but
having copies of your VI is hard to maintain, since if you change one you
have to remember to change all of them. LabVIEW provides the variant data
type as one solution for these situations. The variant data type is a generic
container for all other types of data in LabVIEW. When you convert other
data to a variant, the variant stores the data and the original data type of the
data, which allows LabVIEW to correctly convert the variant data back to
the original data at a later time. For example, if you convert string data to a
variant, the variant stores the text of the string and an indicator that says that
this data was originally a string (as opposed to a path or an array of bytes, or
other possible LabVIEW types).
Use the Variant functions to create and manipulate variant data. You can
convert any LabVIEW data type to the variant data type to use variant data
in other VIs and functions. Several polymorphic functions return the variant
data type.
Use the variant data type when it is important to manipulate data

independently of data type, such as when you transmit or store data; read
and/or write to unknown devices; or perform operations on a heterogeneous
set of controls.

Using Variant Data Types

Variant data types allow you to create VIs that have a greater degree of
generality. They allow a VI to manipulate data without specifying what kind
of data it is when the VI compiles. Using variant data types with the
producer/consumer design patterns gives you greater flexibility. Use a
cluster with an enumerated type control and variant, shown at left, to
perform two functions at once. The variant data type enables you to pass any
data type from the producer to the consumer, and the enumerated data type
enables the producer to control what function the consumer performs.
Figure 6-3 shows a producer/consumer (events) design pattern that uses a

cluster with an enumerated data type and variant data. In this example, when
the user generates a Configure event, the data that should pass to the
consumer is converted to variant data and bundled with the enumerated data
type to control the function of the consumer. The consumer loop unbundles
the cluster and passes the enumerated data type to the Case structure to
control the function of the consumer. The variant data then passes into the
Case structure, where the variant data is converted to the data type. The
advantage to using this data type is any other event cases can pass any type
or form of data to the consumer. This provides for scalable and readable
code.
Note If you are using the Real-Time platform, replace the variant data type with a string
data type.

Figure 6-3. Producer/Consumer (Events) with Cluster of Enumerated Data Type
Job Aid
Use the following checklist to implement scalable architectures.
❑ Use a single frame Sequence structure to initialize a design pattern.
❑ Make sure that all architectures perform a proper initialization and

cleanup.
❑ Implement the control code using a type defined enumerated type

control.

Exercise 6-1 Implement the Design Pattern

Goal
Use LabVIEW to implement a design pattern as the basis for the application
architecture.
Scenario
Using a design pattern for the architecture makes the application readable,
scalable, and maintainable. Implementing the producer/consumer (events)
design pattern makes the user interface more responsive. Using a variant
data type makes the architecture scalable for future needs.
Design
1. Create a type definition for the functions that the application performs.
2. Use the type definition as the data type to pass data from the producer to
the consumer.
3. Initialize the design pattern.
4. In the consumer loop of the design pattern, verify that a case exists to
process each function in the enumerated data type.
5. Enqueue an element into the producer/consumer with (events) queue

when an event is received in the producer.
6. Create a custom run-time menu to perform the Load, Save, and Exit
functions.
7. Add a case to the Event structure in the producer loop to respond to

menu selections.
8. Create user events that allow the consumer loop to send error data to the
producer loop to stop the producer

Implementation
Implement the architecture for the Producer/Consumer (Events) design
pattern, as shown in Figure 6-5.
1. Open TLC.lvproj in the Project Explorer window.
2. Add tlc_functions.ctl to the project. This type definition is an

enum which contains the functions that consumer loop of the application
will perform. The following functions are included in
tlc_functions.ctl:
• Initialize
• Record
• Load
• Save
• Play
• Stop
• Exit

Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls directory
❑ Select tlc_Functions.ctl and click the Add File button to add

the control to the Controls virtual folder.
3. Create a scalable data type to pass data from the producer loop to the
consumer loop. This data type is a cluster that includes the
tlc_Functions.ctl control and a variant.
❑ Select File»New to open the New dialog box.
❑ Select Other Files»Custom Control from the Create New tree.
❑ Verify Add to project is selected.
❑ Click the OK button to open the Control Editor.
❑ Place a cluster on the front panel of the Control Editor.
❑ Change the label of the cluster to tlc_Consumer Control.ctl,

to correspond to the name of the file. Using the filename of the
control as a label helps you keep track of the controls on the block
diagram.
❑ Drag the tlc_Functions.ctl type definition from the Project

Explorer window to the cluster.

❑ Place a variant control in the cluster.
❑ Change the label of the variant to Data.

Figure 6-4 shows the resulting cluster.
Figure 6-4. Variant and Type Definition Enumerated Control Cluster
❑ Select Type Def. from the Control Type pull-down menu.
❑ Save the type definition as tlc_Consumer Control.ctl in the

<Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\
Controls directory.
❑ Close the Control Editor.
❑ Move the tlc_Consumer Control.ctl control to the Controls

virtual folder in the Project Explorer window.
4. Open the TLC Main VI.
5. Place tlc_Consumer Control.ctl on the block diagram.
❑ Drag the control from the Project Window to the block diagram to
place it as a constant.
❑ Position the constant outside the producer and consumer loops.
❑ Set the value of the enumerated type constant within the cluster to
Initialize.
6. Initialize the producer/consumer design pattern.
❑ Delete the empty string constant that is wired to the Obtain Queue
function.
❑ Wire the tlc_Consumer Control constant to the element data type

input of the Obtain Queue function.

❑ Place the Enqueue Element function on the block diagram. Wire the
cluster constant to the Enqueue Element function to initialize the
design pattern.
7. Add tlc_Consumer Queue Reference.ctl to the project. This

custom control is a reference to the queue created by Obtain Queue. This
control will be used in subsequent exercises as a reference to this queue.
❑ Right-click the Controls virtual folder in the Project Explorer, select

Add»File from the shortcut menu and navigate to the <Exercises>\
LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls
directory
❑ Select tlc_Consumer Queue Reference.ctl and click the

Add File button to add the control to the Controls virtual folder.
8. In the consumer loop of the design pattern, ensure a case exists to

process each function in the enumerated data type. The resulting block
diagram should be similar to Figure 6-5.
❑ Place the Unbundle by Name function outside the Case structure in

the consumer loop.
❑ Wire the element output of the Dequeue Element function to the

input of the Unbundle by Name function.
❑ Delete the error cluster wires connected to the case selector and to
the loop conditional for the consumer loop.
Note You are deleting the initial error handling wiring in preparation for more complex
structures in later exercises. In Exercise 6-4 you build a functional global variable to handle
errors in the application and in Exercise 7-7 you implement it in the main application.
❑ Wire the Command element of the Unbundle by Name function to

the case selector terminal of the Case structure.
❑ Right-click the border of the Case structure and select Add Case
For Every Value from the shortcut menu to populate the Case
structure with the items in the enumerated type control.
❑ Wire a False constant to the loop condition terminal of the While

Loop in each case of the Case structure. Change the constant in the
Exit case to True to enable the Exit case to stop the consumer loop.
❑ Right-click the error cluster tunnel on the consumer loop and select
Replace with Shift Register from the shortcut menu. Place the
other side of the shift register on the right side of the consumer loop.
Repeat this step for the queue reference tunnel.

❑ Wire the queue reference and error cluster through each case of the
consumer loop.
Figure 6-5. Theatre Light Controller Architecture
9. Create an event case in the producer loop to respond to the Value Change
event for the Play button.
❑ Right-click the Event structure and select Add Event Case from the
shortcut menu to open the Edit Events dialog box.
❑ Select the Play button from the Event Sources list and select Value
Change from the Events list.
❑ Click the OK button.
10. Modify the Play event case to send a message to the consumer loop to
execute Play, as shown in Figure 6-6. Delete the Unbundle By Name and
Or functions that are connected to the loop conditional terminal. Add the
following items:
❑ tlc_Consumer Control.ctl
❑ Bundle By Name
❑ tlc_functions.ctl (set to Play)

Tip After you wire the tlc_Consumer Control to the Bundle by Name function, you can
create the tlc_Functions.ctl. Right-click the Command element of the Bundle By
Name function and selecting Create»Constant from the shortcut menu.
❑ Enqueue Element
❑ False constant
Figure 6-6. Producer Play Event
11. Create a Value Change event case for the following controls: Record
and Stop.
❑ Right-click the Play event case, and select Duplicate Event Case
from the shortcut menu.
❑ Select the Record button and the Value Change event and click the
OK button.
❑ Modify the enumerated type constant to send a Record command to

the consumer loop.
❑ Repeat the previous step for the Stop control, changing the
command the producer sends to the consumer to correspond to the
appropriate function.
Table 6-1 shows the appropriate enumerated type control item to place
in the queue when each control receives a value change event.
Table 6-1. Control Items
Control Enum Item

Record button Record
Play button Play
Stop button Stop

12. Place the Record, Play and Stop control terminals in the corresponding
event cases to ensure that the control is read when the control generates
an event. If you duplicate an event case with the terminal in the event
case, you also duplicate the terminal. Placing a terminal in the
corresponding event case is good programming style because it ensures
that LabVIEW reads the terminal when the event occurs.
13. Create a custom run-time menu to perform the Load, Save, and Exit
functions. Figure 6-7 shows the completed menu.
Figure 6-7. LabVIEW Run-Time Menu
❑ Select Edit»Run-Time Menu to display the Menu Editor dialog

box.
❑ Select File»New to create a new run-time menu.
❑ Enter _File in the Item Name textbox.
Tip In the Item Name textbox, enter an underscore (_) before the letter you want to
associate with the <Alt> key for that menu. This creates a shortcut so the user can press
the <Alt> key and the associated key to access the menu.
❑ Clear the contents in the Item Tag textbox.
❑ Change the Item Tag to File. Place your cursor in Shortcut and
press <Ctrl-F>. LabVIEW records the shortcut key combination for
you.
❑ Click the blue + button on the Menu Editor toolbar to add a new item
under the File item.
❑ Click the right arrow button on the toolbar to make the new item a
subitem of the File menu.
❑ Enter _Open... in the Item Name textbox to create a menu item

for Open.
❑ Change the Item Tag to Open. Place your cursor in Shortcut and
press <Ctrl-O>.
Note The Item Tag is passed to LabVIEW so that you can create decision making code
to respond to the selected menu item.

❑ Enter _Save... in the Item Name textbox to create a menu item

for Save.
❑ Change the Item Tag to Save. Place your cursor in Shortcut and
press <Ctrl-S>.
under the File»Save item.
❑ Create a menu separator by selecting Separator from the Item Type

drop-down menu.
❑ Enter E_xit in the Item Name textbox to create a menu item for Exit.
❑ Change Item Tag to Exit. Place your cursor in Shortcut and press
<Ctrl-Q>.
❑ Select File in the Preview section to preview the menu and verify
that it matches Figure 6-7.
❑ Save the run-time menu as tlc_Menu.rtm in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Menu directory.
❑ Close the Menu Editor. When prompted, click the Yes button to
change the run-time menu to the custom menu.
14. Add a case to the Event structure in the producer loop to respond to
menu selections.
❑ Right-click the Event structure border and select Add Event Case
from the shortcut menu to open the Edit Events dialog box.
❑ Select <This VI> from the Event Sources list and Menu Selection
(User) from the Events list to create the Menu Selection (User)
event case. Click the OK button.
❑ Place a Case structure in the Menu Selection (User) event case. Wire
the ItemTag event data node to the case selector terminal.
❑ Create four cases for the Case structure in the Menu Selection (User)
event case to process the ItemTag strings—Open, Save, Exit, and
Default. Be sure the spelling for the case selector matches the
spelling you used for the Item Tag in the Menu Editor.

❑ Delete any unused cases.
❑ Modify the Exit case to stop the VI when the user selects File»Exit,
as shown in Figure 6-8. You use the same items that you used for
Step 10.
Figure 6-8. Menu Selection Event Case
❑ Wire a True constant to the loop conditional terminal in the Exit case
and a False constant for every other case. Set the Command element
to Exit. These values will result in the Exit case stopping both the
producer and the consumer loops.
❑ Wire the queue reference and error cluster wires through the
remaining cases in the Case structure. You build the remaining cases
in later exercises.
Tip To quickly wire through remaining cases, right-click an empty tunnel and select
Linked Input Tunnel»Create and Wire Unwired Cases, then click the opposite
tunnel.

Figure 6-9. Theatre Light Controller Architecture with User Events

15. Complete the block diagram as shown in Figure 6-9 to create user events
that allow the consumer loop to send error data to the producer loop to
stop the producer.
❑ Right-click the border of the Event structure in the producer loop

and select Show Dynamic Event Terminals from the shortcut
menu.
❑ Place the Create User Event function on the block diagram. This
function creates a user event based on the data type passed to it.
Create an error constant from the error in input and wire it to the
user event data type input. Label the error constant error.
❑ Place the Register for Events node on the block diagram. This
function dynamically registers the user event. Wire the event
registration refnum output of the Register for Events node to the
dynamic terminal of the Event structure.
❑ Wire the Create User Event function to the Register for Events node.
❑ Add the Dynamic Event case to the Event structure.

– Right-click the Event structure border and select Add Event
Case from the shortcut menu.
– Select the dynamic <error>: User Event from the Event
Sources list and click the OK button.
– Wire the queue reference and error cluster through each case of
the Event structure.
Note The name of the dynamic event is the same as the owned label for the data
structure that is wired to the Create User Event function.
❑ Wire status output from the event data node to the loop condition
terminal.
❑ Place the Merge Errors function on the block diagram. This function
combines multiple error cluster inputs into a single error cluster
output.
❑ Place the Unregister for Events function on the block diagram. This
function unregisters the dynamic event.
❑ Place the Destroy User Event function on the block diagram. This
function destroys the reference to the user event.

16. Add tlc_User Event Reference.ctl to the project. This custom

control is a reference to a user event created by Create User Event and
will be used in later exercises as a reference to that user event.

Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls directory.
❑ Select tlc_User Event Reference.ctl and click the Add File

button to add the control to the Controls virtual folder.
17. Delete the event cases on the Event structure that are left over from the
design pattern.
18. Wire the Release Queue, Unregister for Events, and Destroy User
Events functions, and the Merge Error VIs as shown in Figure 6-9.
19. Connect the error in and error out clusters to the design pattern as
20. Save the VI.
Testing
1. Place a One Button Dialog function in each case of the consumer loop.
Wire a string constant to the message input of the One Button Dialog
function to open a dialog box indicating that the case executes when the
front panel receives events.
Tip You can use the following code to easily wire the name of the executing case to the
One Button Dialog function. You also can use this technique to convert an enum to a
string.
Figure 6-10. Convert Enumerated Type Control to String

2. Save the VI.
3. Run the VI to verify that all the functions listed in step 2 of the
Implementation section work correctly.
You can test the functionality by clicking a button on the front panel to
cause the Event structure to execute. When the Event structure executes,
it places a message in the queue to cause the consumer to execute.
The only cases that are not functional at this time are the Load, Save, and
Select Cue cases. You implement this functionality in a later exercise.
4. Verify that you can exit the application from the run-time menu.
5. Close the TLC Main VI.
End of Exercise 6-1

C. Implementing Code
Developing code and interfaces is the process of implementing the
actual VI. Good software design techniques ensure that you create
VIs that are scalable, readable, and maintainable. When you implement
code, you also must provide a timing mechanism and document the VI.
Practice LabVIEW Style Guidelines

Practicing good LabVIEW style is one of the best ways to prevent bugs or
errors in the code. Keeping the block diagram clean and easy to read can
minimize the amount of debugging an application requires. Using good
style might increase the time required to implement code, but you actually
save time because using good style can reduce the time you spend
debugging and testing a VI.
Maintain Appropriate Size of Block Diagram

The size of the block diagram window can affect how readable LabVIEW
code is to others. Make the block diagram window no larger than the screen
size. Code that is larger than the window is hard to read because it forces
users to scroll through the window. If the code is too large to fit on one
screen, make sure the user has to scroll only in one direction to view the rest
of the code. If the block diagram requires scrolling, consider using subVIs.
Use Proper Wiring Techniques

Use the Align Objects and Distribute Objects pull-down menus on the
toolbar to arrange objects symmetrically on the block diagram. When
objects are aligned and distributed evenly, you can use straight wires to wire
the objects together. Using straight wires makes the block diagram easier to
read.
The following good wiring tips also help keep the block diagram clean:
• Avoid placing any wires under block diagram objects because
LabVIEW can hide some segments of the resulting wire. Draw wires so
that you can clearly see if a wire correctly connects to a terminal. Delete
any extraneous wires. Do not wire through structures if the data in the
wire is not used in the structure.
• Add as few bends in the wires as possible and keep the wires short.
Avoid creating wires with long complicated paths because long wires
are confusing to follow.
• Avoid using local variables when you can use a wire to transfer data.
Every local variable that reads the data makes a copy of the data. Use
global and local variables as sparingly as possible.

Make sure data flows from left to right and wires enter from the left and
exit to the right.
LabVIEW uses a left-to-right layout so block diagrams need to follow this

convention. Although the positions of program elements do not determine
execution order, avoid wiring from right to left. Only wires and structures
determine execution order.
Document Your Code

Developers who maintain and modify VIs need good documentation on the
block diagram. Without it, modifying the code is more time consuming and
error prone. Use the following suggestions for documenting the block
diagram.
• Use comments on the block diagram to explain what the code is doing.
The free label located on the Decorations palette has a colored
background that works well for block diagram comments. This free
label is the standard for comments. Remember that comments in the
block diagram are more likely to be read than the VI, so it is important
to use correct spelling and grammar.
• Use small free labels with white backgrounds to label long wires to
identify their use. Labeling wires is useful for wires coming from shift
registers and for long wires that span the entire block diagram.
• When using free labels on wires, it is good practice to indicate the flow
of data using the greater than (>) or less than (<) characters.
• Use labels on Call Library Function Nodes to specify what function the
node is calling and the path to the library the node calls.Use free labels
to document algorithms that you use on the block diagrams. If you use
an algorithm from a book or other reference, provide the reference
information.
LabVIEW provides several high-level programming tools, such as

Express VIs, that hide the functionality that the tool performs. These tools
provide built-in functionality but require you to provide more
documentation to explain how the application uses the tools. For example,
the Express VIs allow you to build common measurement tasks without
having to write or debug code. But, to understand how an Express VI is
configured, you must open its configuration page. For example, the
Simulate Signal Express VI shown in Figure 6-11 generates a Sawtooth
wave with a frequency of 1.1 kHz. However, there is no information on the
block diagram that indicates what operation the Simulate Signal Express VI
is configured to perform.

Figure 6-11. Configured Simulate Signal Express VI
You can dramatically improve the readability of the Simulate Signal

Express VI by documenting its configuration. If you idle the mouse over
an Express VI when the Context Help window is open, the current
configuration displays in the Context Help window, as shown in
Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12. Context Help for Simulate Signal Express VI

You can use the information that is located in the Context Help window to
create a free label comment on the block diagram that documents the
configuration of Express VIs, as shown in Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13. Fully Documented Express VI
Data binding is another tool that hides its functionality in a VI. The VIs in
Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 communicate with one another using shared
variables, but there is no indication of that functionality on either block
diagram.
Figure 6-14. Writes Data to a Shared Variable
Figure 6-15. Reads Data from a Shared Variable Server
The VI in Figure 6-15 reads data from the VI in Figure 6-14. There is
nothing on the block diagram to indicate that this VI reads data through a
shared variable. Looking at the VI in Figure 6-15, you would not expect the

waveform graph to update. But, when you run the VI, it receives data. You
should always clearly document VIs that receive data through data binding.
You can use free labels to indicate the behavior and functionality of the VIs,
as shown in Figure 6-16 and Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-16. Commented Shared Variable Writer
Figure 6-17. Commented Shared Variable Reader
When you use the tools that are included with LabVIEW, always provide
block diagram comments to indicate the functions they perform.
Develop Self-Documenting Code

Some LabVIEW code is self-documenting. In other words, you can easily
understand the purpose of the code by simple inspection. When you use
self-documenting code you may not need to provide additional free labels to
describe the functionality.
While LabVIEW code can be self documenting because it is graphical, use

free labels to describe how the diagram functions.

The Bundle by Name and Unbundle By Name functions are examples of

self-documenting code. It is easy to see the data these functions use, as
Figure 6-18. Self-Documentation with the Unbundle by Name and

Bundle by Name Functions
Another example of self-documenting code is an enumerated type control

wired to a Case structure. The items listed in the enumerated type control
populate the case selector of the Case structure. This helps document the
function of each case. Figure 6-18 also shows this use of an enumerated type
control.
Eliminate Constants
Block diagrams that contain numerous constants can become
unmanageable. It also can be difficult to maintain code when numerous
constants are used throughout the application. An alternative to using
constants is to place the values of the constants into configuration files.
Creating Configuration Files

Use the Configuration File VIs to read and create standard Windows
configuration settings (.ini) files and to write platform-specific data, such
as paths, in a platform-independent format so that you can use the files these
VIs generate across multiple platforms. The Configuration File VIs do not
use a standard file format for configuration files. While you can use the
Configuration File VIs on any platform to read and write files created by the
VIs, you cannot use the Configuration File VIs to create or modify
configuration files in a Mac OS or Linux format.

Refer to the labview\examples\file\config.llb for examples of

using the Configuration File VIs.
Note The standard extension for Windows configuration settings files is .ini, but the
Configuration File VIs work with files with any extension, provided the content is in the
correct format.
Refer to the Windows Configuration Settings File Format section of this

lesson for more information about configuring the content.
Configuration Settings Files

A standard Windows configuration settings file is a specific format for
storing data in a text file. You can programmatically access data within the
.ini file easily because it follows a specific format.
For example, consider a configuration settings file with the following

contents:
[Data]
Value=7.2
You can use the Configuration File VIs to read this data, as shown in the
following block diagram. This VI uses the Read Key VI to read the key
named Value from the section called Data. This VI works regardless of how
the file changes, provided the file remains in the Windows configuration
settings file format.
Figure 6-19. Reading Configuration Settings
Windows Configuration Settings File Format

Windows configuration settings files are text files divided into named
sections. Brackets enclose each section name. Every section name in a file
must be unique. The sections contain key/value pairs separated by an equal
sign (=). Within each section, every key name must be unique. The key name

represents a configuration preference, and the value name represents the

setting for that preference. The following example shows the arrangement
of the file:
[Section 1]
key1=value
key2=value
[Section 2]
key1=value
key2=value
Use the following data types with Configuration File VIs for the value
portion of the key parameter:
• String
• Path
• Boolean
• 64-bit double-precision floating-point numeric
• 32-bit signed integer
• 32-bit unsigned integer
The Configuration File VIs can read and write raw or escaped string data.
The VIs read and write raw data byte-for-byte, without converting the data
to ASCII. In converted, or escaped, strings LabVIEW stores any
non-displayable text characters in the configuration settings file with the
equivalent hexadecimal escape codes, such as \0D for a carriage return. In
addition, LabVIEW stores backslash characters in the configuration settings
file as double backslashes, such as \\ for \. Set the read raw string? or
write raw string? inputs of the Configuration File VIs to TRUE for raw
data and to FALSE for escaped data.
When VIs write to a configuration file, they place quotation marks around
any string or path data that contain a space character. If a string contains
quotation marks, LabVIEW stores them as \". If you read and/or write to
configuration files using a text editor, you might notice that LabVIEW
replaced quotation marks with \".
LabVIEW stores path data in a platform-independent format, the standard

Linux format for paths, in .ini files. The VIs interpret the absolute path
/c/temp/data.dat stored in a configuration settings file as follows:
• (Windows) c:\temp\data.dat
• (Mac OS) c:temp:data.dat
• (Linux) /c/temp/data.dat

The VIs interpret the relative path temp/data.dat as follows:

• (Windows) temp\data.dat
• (Mac OS) :temp:data.dat
• (Linux) temp/data.dat
Organize the File Structure

Organize the VIs in the file system to reflect the hierarchical nature of the
software. Make top-level VIs directly accessible. Place subVIs in
subdirectories and group them to reflect any modular components you have
designed, such as instrument drivers, configuration utilities, and file I/O
drivers. Limit the number and levels of directories you use in a project.
Create a directory for all the VIs for one application and give it a meaningful
name. Save the main VIs in this directory and the subVIs in a subdirectory.
If the subVIs have subVIs, continue the directory hierarchy downward.
When you create the directory, organize the VIs and subVIs modularly
according to the functionality of the subVIs.
Figure 6-20 shows a folder, MyApp, containing a VI-based application. The

main VI, MyApp.vi, resides in this folder along with the folders containing
all the subVIs.
Figure 6-20. Directory Hierarchy

If you create a LabVIEW project in the Project Explorer window, the

project hierarchy should be similar to the file organization of the files on the
system. Figure 6-21 shows an example project hierarchy based on the files
in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-21. Project Hierarchy
When naming VIs, LLBs, and directories, avoid using characters not all file
systems accept, such as backslash (\), slash (/), colon (:), and tilde (~).
Most operating systems accept long descriptive filenames up to 255
characters.
Avoid creating files with the same name anywhere within the hierarchy.
Only one VI of a given name can be in memory at a time. If you have a VI
with a specific name in memory and you attempt to load another VI that
references a subVI of the same name, the VI links to the VI in memory. If
you make backup copies of files, be sure to save them into a directory
outside the normal search hierarchy so that LabVIEW does not mistakenly
load them into memory when you open development VIs.
Refer to the Creating VIs and subVIs topic of the LabVIEW Help for more
information about saving VIs individually and in VI libraries.
Timing a Design Pattern

There are two forms of timing you can implement with a scalable
architecture—execution timing and software control timing. Use execution
timing to control how quickly a scalable architecture executes on the
processor. Use software control timing to time a real-world operation to
perform within a set time period.
Execution Timing
You can explicitly time a design pattern or time it based on events that occur
within the VI.

Use explicit timing for design patterns that perform some type of polling while
they execute. The master/slave, producer/consumer (data), queued message
handler, and standard state machine design patterns execute continuously and
monitor external inputs to control the execution of the design pattern. For
example, the master/slave design pattern shown in Figure 6-22 uses a While
Loop and a Case structure to implement the master loop.
Figure 6-22. Master/Slave Design Pattern
The master loop executes continuously and polls for an event to send a
message to the slave loop. You need to time the master loop so it does not
take over the execution of the processor. In this case, you typically use the
Wait (ms) function to regulate how frequently the master loop polls.
Tip Always use a timing function such as the Wait (ms) function or the Wait Until Next
ms Multiple function in any design pattern that continually executes and requires
regulation.
Notice that the slave loop does not contain any form of timing. The use of
Synchronization functions to pass messages provides an inherent form of
timing in the slave loop. The slave loop waits for the Notifier function to
receive a message. After the notifier receives a message, the slave loop
executes on the message. This creates an efficient block diagram that does
not waste processor cycles by needlessly polling for messages.
When you implement design patterns where the timing is based on the
occurrence of events, you do not have to determine the correct timing

frequency because the design pattern executes only when an event occurs.
In other words, the design pattern executes only when it receives an event.
For example, the producer/consumer (events) VI shown in Figure 6-1 does
not require any timing functions. The Event structure in the producer loop
controls when the producer loop executes. The Dequeue Element function
in the consumer loop waits until an item is placed in the queue, thus
controlling the execution of the consumer loop. Design patterns such as the
producer/consumer (events) and the user interface event handler do not
require any timing because external events control their timing.
Software Control Timing

Many applications that you create must be able to perform an operation
within a specified number of seconds. For example, if the specifications
require that the system acquire temperature data for 5 minutes, you must
implement timing so that the VI continually executes for the specified time.
Implementing this timing involves keeping the application executing while
monitoring a real-time clock.
If you use the Wait (ms) function or the Wait Until Next ms Multiple
function to perform software timing, the execution of the VI only occurs
after the wait functions finish. These functions are not the preferred method
for performing software control timing, especially for VIs where the system
must continually execute.
For software control timing, it is important that the design pattern run
continuously without stopping. If the design pattern stops executing, certain
events cannot be captured, such as stopping the VI. The methods for
software control timing are Get Date/Time in Seconds, Event structure
timeout, and the Timed Structures.

Get Date/Time in Seconds

A good pattern to use for software control timing is to cycle the current time
throughout the VI, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23. Software Timing Using the Get Date/Time In Seconds Function
The Get Date/Time In Seconds function, connected to the left terminal of the
shift register, initializes the shift register with the current system time. Each
state uses another Get Date/Time In Seconds function and compares the
current time to the start time. If the difference in these two times is greater
or equal to the wait time, the state finishes executing and the rest of the
application executes. Always use the Get Date/Time In Seconds function
instead of the Tick Count function for this type of comparison because the
value of the Tick Count function can rollover to 0 during execution.

To make the timing functionality modular and reusable, use the functional
global variable design pattern to build a timing VI as shown in Figure 6-24.
Figure 6-24. Timing Functional Global Variable
In this example, the Initialize case retrieves the current time using the Get
Date/Time In Seconds function and places the value into a shift register that
recirculates the time through the functional global variable. The Check Time
case subtracts the current time from the Recirculate Time shift register and
compares that value to the Time to Wait value to determine if the expected
time has elapsed. If the expected time has not elapsed, the Recirculate Time
value passes back into the shift register, otherwise the current time passes to
the shift register and the Time Elapsed Boolean value returns True.

By replacing the timing code in Figure 6-23 with the Timing functional
global variable in Figure 6-24, the VI becomes more readable and easier to
understand, as shown in Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25. Software Timing Using a Functional Global Variable

Synchronization Timeout
All of the synchronization VIs can timeout after a specified number of
milliseconds have elapsed. For example, the Dequeue Element function can
timeout after a specified number of milliseconds. This can help if you want
to execute a function in a queued state machine, or a queue based design
pattern every specified number of milliseconds. Figure 6-26 shows an
example of a synchronization timeout.
Figure 6-26. Producer/Consumer with a 50 Millisecond Consumer Timeout
Event Structure Timeout

Wiring a millisecond value to the Timeout Terminal of an Event structure
wakes the Event structure and executes the code in the Timeout case. You
can use the Timeout case to perform background processing when the Event
structure would otherwise be asleep waiting for an event to occur. If the
Timeout Terminal is unwired, then the Event structure never generates the
Timeout event. Wire a value to the Timeout terminal at the top left of the
Event structure to specify the number of milliseconds the Event structure
should wait for an event to occur before generating a Timeout event. The
time stamp is a millisecond counter you can use to compute the time elapsed
between two events or to determine the order of occurrence.

Timed Structures
Use a Timed Loop or Timed Sequence structure on the block diagram to
execute code with time bounds and delays. A Timed Loop repeatedly
executes code until a stop condition is met. A Timed Sequence structure
executes code once in a specific order. To execute code repeatedly in a
specific order with time bounds and delays, use a Timed Loop with frames.
Timed structures execute at a priority below the time-critical priority of any

VI but above high priority, which means that a timed structure executes in
the data flow of a block diagram ahead of any VI not configured to run at a
time-critical priority.
Timed Sequence Structure

A Timed Sequence structure consists of one or more subdiagrams, or
frames, timed by an internal or external timing source that execute
sequentially. A Timed Sequence structure executes each frame only once
and, unlike a Timed Loop, does not repeat iterations. If you want each frame
to execute more than once, you can right-click the Timed Sequence structure
border and select Replace with Timed Loop. Use the Timed Sequence
structure when you want to develop VIs that execute only once with precise
timing, execution feedback, timing characteristics that change dynamically,
or several levels of execution priority.
You can wire values to the inputs of the Input node to configure a Timed
Sequence structure, or you can right-click the Input node and select
Configure Input Node from the shortcut menu to display the Configure
Timed Sequence dialog box and enter values for the options.
The Left Data node of a Timed Sequence structure frame returns

configuration option values and provides timing and status information
about the current and previous frame, such as the expected start time, actual
start time, and if the previous frame completed late. You can use the
Configure Next Iteration dialog box, available by right-clicking the Right
Data node and selecting Configure Input Node from the shortcut menu, to
enter values for the options. You also can wire values to the Right Data node
to configure the options of the next frame dynamically.
Note The Right Data node of the last frame of a Timed Sequence structure does not
include configuration options because you do not have to configure another frame or
iteration.
The Output node returns error information received in the Error input of the
Input node, error information generated by the structure during execution,
or error information from any subdiagram that executes within a frame of
the Timed Sequence structure. The Output node also returns timing and
status information for the final frame.

Note Adding a VI set to time-critical priority and a Timed Sequence on the same block
diagram can lead to unexpected timing behavior.
Timed Loop
A Timed Loop executes a subdiagram, or frame, at a period you specify for
each iteration. Use a Timed Loop when you want to develop VIs that execute
repeatedly with multirate timing capabilities, precise timing, feedback on
loop execution, timing characteristics that change dynamically, or several
levels of execution priority. Unlike in a While Loop, you do not have to wire
the conditional terminal in a Timed Loop. However, if you do not wire
anything to the conditional terminal in a Timed Loop, the loop runs
interminably.
A Timed Loop executes in the data flow of a block diagram ahead of any VI
not configured to run at a time-critical priority. You can change the priority
of a Timed Loop to change the order in which it executes relative to other
timed structures on the block diagram.
Note Adding a VI configured to run at time-critical priority and a Timed Loop on the
same block diagram can lead to unexpected timing behavior.
Loop, or you can right-click the Input node and select Configure Input
Node from the shortcut menu to display the Configure Timed Loop dialog
box and enter values for the options.
The Left Data node of a Timed Sequence structure frame returns

configuration option values and provides timing and status information
about the current and previous frame, such as the expected start time, actual
start time, and if the previous frame completed late. You can use the
Configure Next Iteration dialog box, available by right-clicking the Right
Data node and selecting Configure Input Node from the shortcut menu, to
enter values for the options. You also can wire values to the inputs of the
Right Data node to configure the options of the next loop iteration
dynamically.
and error information from the subdiagram that executes within the Timed
Loop. For example, if an external source aborts the execution of the Timed
Loop or if more than 128 Timed Loops run at one time, the Output node
returns an error. The Output node also returns timing and status information
for the loop.

Timed Loop with Frames

You can add frames to a Timed Loop to execute multiple subdiagrams
sequentially each iteration of the loop at the period you specify. A Timed
Loop with frames behaves like a regular Timed Loop with an embedded
Sequence structure. If you want each frame to execute only once, right-click
the Timed Loop structure border and select Replace with Timed Sequence.
To convert a Timed Loop to a While Loop, right-click the Timed Loop and
select Replace with While Loop from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the structure border to add, delete, and merge frames.
Each frame of the Timed Loop with frames includes a set of nodes, as shown
in the following illustration. By default, nodes of the Timed Loop do not
display all of the available input and output terminals. You can resize nodes
or right-click a node and use the shortcut menu to display hidden terminals.
Loop with frames, or you can right-click the Input node and select
Configure Input Node from the shortcut menu to display the Configure
Timed Loop with Frames dialog box and enter values for the options.
The Left Data node of a Timed Loop frame returns configuration option
values and provides timing and status information about the previous loop
iteration or frame. You can use the Configure Next Frame Timing dialog
box, available by right-clicking the Right Data node and selecting
Configure Input node from the shortcut menu to enter values for the
options. You also can wire data to the Right Data node of a frame to
configure the next frame dynamically.
and error information from the subdiagrams that execute within the Timed
Loop frames. The Output node also returns timing and status information
for the final frame.
Setting Priorities of a Timed Structure

The priority of a Timed Structure specifies when the structure executes on
the block diagram relative to other objects on the block diagram. Use the
priority setting of a Timed Structure to write applications with multiple
tasks that can preempt each other in the same VI. Each Timed Structure on
the block diagram creates and runs in its own execution system that contains
a single thread, so no parallel tasks can occur. The higher the priority of a
Timed Structure, the higher the priority the structure has relative to other
Timed Structures on the block diagram. The value for the Priority input must
be a positive integer between 1 and 2,147,480,000.

You also can assign a priority for each frame of a Timed Sequence or Timed
Loop with frames. LabVIEW checks the priority of any frame ready to
execute and starts the frame with the highest priority.
The following block diagram contains a Timed Loop and a Timed Sequence
with two frames. The Priority value of the first frame of the Timed Sequence
(200) is higher than the priority of the Timed Loop (100). Because the first
frame of the Timed Sequence has a higher priority, it executes first.
Figure 6-27. Priority of Timed Structures
After the first frame of the Timed Sequence executes, LabVIEW checks the
priority of other structures or frames that are ready to execute. The priority
of the Timed Loop is higher than the priority of the second frame of the
Timed Sequence. LabVIEW executes an iteration of the Timed Loop and
then checks the priority of the structures or frames that are ready to execute.
The Timed Loop priority (100) is higher than the second frame of the Timed
Sequence (50). In this example, the Timed Loop executes completely before
the second frame of the Timed Sequence executes.
You can dynamically set the priority of subsequent iterations of a Timed

Loop or the priority of the next frame of a Timed Loop or Sequence by
wiring a value to the Priority input terminal of the Right Data node in the
current frame. Refer to the Setting the Input Options of a Timed Structure
Dynamically topic of the LabVIEW Help for information about dynamically
configuring priority values.

Selecting a Timing Source for Timed Structures

A timing source determines when a Timed Structure executes a loop or
sequence iteration. You can select from two timing sources to control the
timing of a Timed Structure—internal or external. Internal timing sources
are built-in timing sources that can be selected using the Configuration
dialogs of a Timed Structures. External timing sources require
synchronization with an external hardware target.
Use the Source listbox in the Configure Timed Loop or Configure Timed
Sequence dialog boxes to select an internal timing source or use the Create
Timing Source VI to programmatically select an internal or external timing
source.
Internal Timing Sources

Internal timing sources for controlling a Timed Structure include the 1 KHz
clock of the operating system and the 1 MHz clock of a supported real-time
(RT) target.
• 1 KHz Clock—By default, a Timed Structure uses the 1 kHz clock of
the operating system as the timing source and can execute only once
every 1 ms because that is the fastest speed at which the operating
system timing source operates. All platforms that can run a Timed
Structure support the 1 KHz timing source.
• 1 MHz Clock—Supported RT targets can use the functionality of
microsecond timing with the 1 MHz timing source to control a Timed
Structure. The supported targets include the Compact Vision System,
desktops targets that have a Pentium III or IV processor, FieldPoint,
Compact FieldPoint, 8140, 8170, 8186, and 8156B series controllers. If
the system does not include a supported hardware device, the 1 kHz
clock is the only timing source available.
• 1 KHz Clock <reset at structure start>—A timing source similar to
the 1 KHz clock that resets at every iteration of a Timed Structure.
• 1 MHz Clock <reset at structure start>—A timing source similar to
the 1 MHz clock that resets at every iteration of a Timed Structure.
External Timing Sources

External timing sources for controlling the Timed Structures include
counter/timers, data acquisition sample clocks, and digital change detection.
With NI-DAQmx 7.2 or later, you can use several types of timing sources to
control a Timed Structure such as frequency, digital edge counters, digital
change detection, and signals from task sources.
• Frequency—Creates a timing source that causes a Timed Structure to
execute at a constant frequency.
• Digital Edge Counter—Creates a timing source that causes a Timed
Structure to execute on rising or falling edges of a digital signal.

• Digital Change Detection—Creates a timing source that causes a

Timed Structure to execute on rising and/or falling edges of one or more
digital lines.
• Signal from Task—Creates a timing source that uses the signal you
specify to determine when a Timed Structure executes.
Use the VIs and functions on the Timed Structures and DAQmx palettes
to create external timing sources to control a Timed Structure.
Setting a Timeout
A timeout specifies the maximum amount of time, relative to the timing
source, a Timed Loop or an individual frame can wait to begin execution.
Use the Input Node of a timed structure to set the timeout value for the start
of the timed frame. If the execution of the subdiagram does not begin before
the timing source reaches the specified timeout value, the Timed Loop
returns Timeout in the Wake-up Reason output of the Left Data node.
In the following example, the first frame of the Timed Sequence takes 60 ms
to complete. The second frame is configured to start 50 ms after the start of
the loop and therefore must wait 10 ms. The second frame is configured with
a timeout value of 5 ms before timing out and returns Timeout in the
Wakeup Reason output of the Left Data node for the frame.
Figure 6-28. Setting a Timeout
If a timeout occurs in a timed structure, the structure continues to execute

untimed. If a Timed Loop starts the next iteration or reaches the timeout
frame again, the Timed Loop waits for the same event that it was waiting for
when the timeout occurred.
The default Timeout value for the Input Node is –1, which indicates to wait
indefinitely for the start of the subdiagram or frame. The default Timeout
value in the Left Data nodes of a frame is 0, which indicates that the timeout
is unchanged and equal to the timeout of the previous frame or iteration.
Refer to the Timed Structures topic of the LabVIEW Help for more
information about configuring Timed Structures.

Job Aid
Use the following checklist when determining the timing mechanism to use
for an application.
❑ Use event-based design patterns to simplify execution timing.
❑ Use a functional global variable to perform software control timing.

Exercise 6-2 Timing

Goal
Create a functional global variable that uses the Get Date/Time In Seconds
function in LabVIEW to provide accurate software controlled timing.
Scenario
The Theatre Light Controller requires accurate timing to control the cue
wait, fade, and follow time. The requirements for the Theatre Light
Controller require that the application respond within 100 ms when any
operation is running. So when choosing a method to accurately time the
Theatre Light Controller, the timing method cannot interfere with the
application response. You will develop a functional global variable that will
be used in a later exercise to implement software control timing.
Design
Build a functional global variable that you can use to control the timing of
the Theatre Light Controller. You will use the functional global variable to
control the timing for the wait, fade, and follow times of the Theatre Light
Controller. Use the Get Date/Time In Seconds function to control the
timing.
This application requires a structure that has precise timing characteristics

and does not use the processor. However, the structure also must respond
when necessary for the wait, fade, and follow time requirements. Therefore,
you will use the Get Date/Time In Seconds function in a functional global
variable to implement these timing requirements.
A functional global variable provides for a good architecture to modularize

the timing functionality. The functional global variable has the following
functions:
• Start—Starts a new time from zero which resets the elapsed time.
• Check Time—Checks if the target time has elapsed yet.
Implementation
1. In the project, create a new virtual folder in the Modules virtual folder
called Timing.
2. Add the following files, located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\Timing directory
to the Timing virtual folder.
• tlc_Timing Command Control.ctl
• tlc_Timing Module Unit Test.vi
• tlc_Timing Module.vi

3. Create a new virtual folder in the My Computer project hierarchy called

Shared.
4. Open the tlc_Timing Module.vi.
5. Modify the No Error case to make the tlc_Timing Module VI a

functional global variable that will keep track of elapsed time as shown
in Figure 6-29.
Figure 6-29. tlc_Timing Module VI Block Diagram
❑ Place a While Loop in the No Error case of the case structure.
❑ Right-click the border of the While Loop and select Add Shift
Register.
❑ Right-click the Loop Condition terminal of the While Loop and

select Create»Constant. Set the constant to True.
❑ Place a Case Structure inside the While Loop.
❑ Place the Timer Command control in the No Error case and wire it
to the Case Selector input of the Case Structure inside the While
Loop. The Case Structure should now have a Check Time case and
a Start case.

6. Modify the Start case to store the start time of the VI using the following
items as shown in Figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30. Start Case of tlc_Timing Module VI Block Diagram
❑ Get Date/Time In Seconds
❑ To Double Precision Float
❑ Numeric constant—Right-click and select Representation»DBL
❑ False constant
7. Modify the Check Time case to output the elapsed time since a Start
command has been sent to the tlc_Timing Module VI using the
following items as shown Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31. Check Time Case of tlc_Timing Module VI Block Diagram

❑ Get Date/Time In Seconds
❑ Two To Double Precision Float
❑ Subtract function
❑ Greater Or Equal?
8. Save the VI.
Testing
A unit test VI is provided to verify the functionality of the Timing module.
The Unit Test VI repetitively calls the Timing module and displays the
elapsed time to show how long the execution of the Timing module takes.
1. Use the Unit Test VI to test that the Timing module returns the values
you specify in the Cue control.
❑ Open tlc_Timing Module Unit Test.vi located in the

Timing virtual folder in the Project Explorer window.
❑ Observe the functionality of the Unit Test VI by examining the block

diagram.
❑ Specify a value for the wait time, fade time, and follow time in the
Cue Input control.
❑ Run the VI and verify that the times returned match in the Measured
Test Values what you specified in the Cue Input control.
End of Exercise 6-2

D. Develop Scalable and Maintainable Modules

Modules typically perform a number of different actions, each of which can
be represented by a separate VI, or by a command within a single VI.
General Techniques
Use the techniques and ideas described in this course to create the VIs that
function as modules or subVIs in a larger VI hierarchy. Develop with loose
coupling and strong cohesion to make your implemented VI modules more
scalable and maintainable.
Module Front Panels

The front panel of a module does not have to follow the same user interface
standards as a top-level VI. However, a module front panel should still be
clean and logically organized. Figure 6-32 shows an example of organizing
a module front panel by dividing its controls and indicators into Input,
Local and Output sections using decorations.
Figure 6-32. Module Front Panel
Verifying Inputs and Outputs

Verify all inputs and outputs of a module to ensure that the values do not
generate errors. For example, if you build a module that calculates the
square root of a value, the module should check that its input is a
non-negative number. A module that is designed to store data to a file should
check to make sure that a file is open and ready to store data. Self-verifying
inputs can greatly improve the reliability of a VI.
Before a module generates outputs, the module should check the output data
for correctness. This process ensures that the module functioned as
expected. For example, consider a module that logs data to a database, but

has no inherent verification that the data was logged correctly. You must
explicitly create a mechanism to determine that the module correctly stored
the data in the database, such as reading the value back from the database
and checking it against the original value.
Handling Errors
Whenever possible, correct any errors that occur in a module within the
module where the error occurs. When you cannot correct an error within the
module, return the error to the calling VI so that the calling VI can correct,
ignore, or display the error to the user. When you implement a module, make
sure the module handles any errors that it can. Include error clusters to pass
error information into and out of the module.
Developing Modules Using Organized SubVIs

One technique for developing a module is to create a set of related subVIs
that perform each of the functions required of the module. Some advantages
of this approach are that you can add and remove functions from the module.
Some functions also may be reusable as subVIs outside of the module.
Disadvantages include the need to create and document a large number of
subVIs and large number of files to manage and maintain. When you use
multiple subVIs, more than one function from a module can be called at the
same time. This is an advantage or a disadvantage depending upon the
behavior of the module.
Using a Consistent Style

Use a consistent style when implementing each VI in your module. Also use
a consistent naming convention for each VI, and include the name of the
module as part of the VI name. Use a consistent front panel design for each
VI, such as the one described in the Module Front Panels section. Use a
consistent pattern and color scheme for the VI icons. Also use a consistent
connector pane, whenever possible, so that you can cleanly wire together
different VIs in the same module. A good technique for accomplishing all
of this is to create a template for your module, which has the front panel, part
of the VI icon, a connector pane pattern, and any other common elements
already implemented.
Organizing Files on Disk

Create a directory on disk for each module. This, along with an appropriate
VI naming scheme, helps you to differentiate VIs that belong to one module
from VIs that belong to another. The root module directory contains the VIs
for each of the module functions specified in your design. Include additional
VIs that the module functions call in one or more subdirectories. Also, place
any controls the module uses in subdirectories. Store any VIs or controls
used by multiple modules in a central location, such as a shared or utility
directory.

Using Libraries
LabVIEW Libraries are a powerful tool for organizing your modules. If you
are using libraries, include each module in its own library. Using a library
provides a number of benefits. First, a library allows you to clearly
differentiate between top-level VIs, which should be called by external
code, and low-level VIs, which the module uses as subVIs. The ability to
mark VIs in a library as public and private allows you to specify that no VI
outside of the module can call one of the low-level VIs, preventing
confusion for programmers using the module. Marking VIs as public or
private also allows you to make assumptions or requirements about the use
of a private VI that might not otherwise be safe. Libraries also create a
namespace for your module, thereby preventing difficulties if VIs in your
module have the same name as other VIs in memory. This feature is
particularly useful when distributing modules for use in an unknown
environment. Finally, libraries abstract your module from other VIs and
allow you to easily organize your modules within the project space.
Developing Modules Using a Multi-Functional VI

One way to develop modules with loose coupling and strong cohesion is to
use a multi-functional VI. A common design of a multi-functional VI
consists of a Case structure controlled by an enumerated control. The
enumerated type control defines commands which correspond to each
function of the module. Each command is implemented by a case in the Case
structure and can call lower level subVIs as neccessary.
The multi-functional VI design has several advantages. It improves the

readability of your code because the command is obvious when the subVI
is called. You also can expand this module design to a state machine to allow
for local data storage or automatic command execution. Finally, this module
design prevents you from having to create and manage a subVI for each
function. The disadvantages of this module design are that it is more
difficult to add and remove functions from the module, because the same VI
is called from everywhere that uses the module. Modifying one function can
also have an effect on other functions, especially if the multi-functional VI
uses a state machine design. Multi-functional VIs are non-reentrant VIs,
which means that only a single function within the module can be active at
any given time.
Controlling the Module

Using an enumerated type control for the command input into a module
clearly indicates the functionality of the module. This also makes it much
easier for you to reuse the module in other applications. You should always
create a type definition for the enumerated type control so that you can add,
remove, or rename the commands in a module without having to update
each instance of the enumerated type control.

Storing Data in the Module

You can expand a multi-functional VI by including the Case structure in a
While Loop to create a state machine. In this implementation, the state
machine typically executes a single state each time it is called, and the
enumerated type control determines the state to executed. The advantage of
using a state machine is that you can add shift registers to the While Loop
to store private data within the module. This effectively turns the module
into a functional global variable. Using a module in this way has many
advantages and can greatly simplify the wiring of your program. Because
this module design is a non-reentrant subVI, data cannot be accessed by
more than one process at any given time, providing some inherent protection
against race conditions. When used correctly, this type of implementation is
one of the safest and most elegant techniques for sharing data among parts
of a program. Use this implementation carefully, however, because global
data storage is always dangerous when over-used. Maintaining strong
cohesion in a module becomes particularly important when choosing which
pieces of data to store locally.
The functional global variable implementation for modules is the approach

that forms the foundation for A Software Engineering Approach to
LabVIEW by Jon Conway and Steve Watts. This book provides many more
tips and implementation suggestions for this architecture.
Initializing the Module

Because a functional global variable can store information between
executions of a VI, it is essential that you properly initialize your modules
during each execution of your program. To initialize a module that uses a
functional global variable, create an initialization function.

Figure 6-33. Initialization of a Multi-Functional VI
Note Remember that a VI remains in memory until all references to the VI are closed.
Automatically Calling Commands

One advantage of using a state machine to implement the multi-functional
subVI is that you can override the command control and specify the
execution of states within the machine. For example, the calling VI could
execute one command, but depending upon the state of local data the
module automatically could execute a second command after the first has
completed. Use this capability sparingly, because it hides functionality from
the top-level VI and can make debugging difficult. Two appropriate uses for
this technique are initialization and error handling. You can use the First
Call? VI in conjunction with this technique to automatically initialize the
module the first time the VI is called. This ensures that the shift registers
properly initialize. You also can use this technique for error handling by
creating one error handling state within the state machine, preventing
duplicated code.
Adding and Removing Functions

Using a multi-functional VI as the design for your module can complicate
adding and removing functions than if you use separate subVIs, however it
is still a scalable solution. To add a new function to the module, add a new
case to the Case structure and a new command to the enumerated type
control. Be sure to preserve the state of any local data by wiring it through
the case if it is not used. To remove functionality, a prudent approach is to

delete the case that implements the functionality without deleting the item
in the enumerated type control that corresponds to that case. This allows you
to verify that external VIs that call the module no longer need that state.
Develop for Performance and Memory Efficiency

Although you want to create efficient VIs that do not cause the computer to
hang when they run, performance and memory efficiency should not be your
highest priority during the implementation phase. It is more important that
your VIs be scalable, readable, and maintainable. Refer to Lesson 8,
Evaluating VI Performance, for more information about evaluating
and improving performance.
Job Aid
Use the following checklist when you implement your code.
❑ Avoid creating extremely large block diagrams. Limit the scrolling

necessary to see the entire block diagram to one direction.
❑ Make sure data flows from left to right and wires enter from the left and
exit to the right.
❑ Use free labels to document algorithms that you use on the block
diagrams. If you use an algorithm from a book or other reference,
provide the reference information.
❑ While LabVIEW code can be self-documenting because it is graphical,

use free labels to describe how the block diagram functions.
❑ Organize VIs in a hierarchical directory with easily accessible top-level

VIs and subVIs in subdirectories.
❑ Consider using functional global variables instead of global variables.

Functional global variables do not create extra copies of data and allow
certain actions, such as initialize, read, write, and empty. They also
eliminate race conditions.
❑ Align and distribute functions, terminals, and constants.
❑ Avoid placing block diagram objects, such as subVIs or structures, on

top of wires, and do not wire behind objects.
❑ Use path constants instead of string constants to specify the location of

files or directories.
❑ Make good use of reusable, testable subVIs.
❑ Use error in and error out clusters in all subVIs.

❑ Make sure the program can deal with error conditions and invalid values.
❑ Show name of source code or include source code for any CINs.
❑ Use sequence structures sparingly because they hide code. If

flow-through parameters are not available and you must use a sequence
structure in the VI, consider using a Flat Sequence structure.
❑ Save the VI with the most important frame of multiframed

structures—Case, Stacked Sequence, and Event structures—showing.
❑ Review the VI for efficiency, data copying, and accuracy, especially

parts without data dependency.
❑ Make sure the subVI icon, rather than the connector pane, is visible on
the block diagram.
❑ Use a type definition when you use the same unique control in more than
one location or when you have a very large data structure passing
between several subVIs.
❑ If you open references to a LabVIEW object, such as an application,

control, or VI, close the references by using the Close Reference
function. It is good practice to close any reference you open
programmatically.
❑ Make sure the Name Format for Property Nodes and Invoke Nodes is
set to Short Names to ensure the best readability of the block diagram.
❑ Make sure control and indicator terminals on the connector pane are not
inside structures on the block diagram.

Exercise 6-3 Implement Code

Goal
Observe and implement the VIs that you identified as modules for the
application.
Scenario
When you carefully plan and design an application, your implementation of
the system creates scalable, readable, and maintainable VIs. Implement the
Display, File, and Hardware modules. These are the major modules that you
identified for the Theatre Light Control Software application. You have
already implemented the Cue and Timing modules.
Design
The functional global variable approach you used to implement the cue and
timing modules provides for a very scalable, readable, and maintainable
method to build VIs. Continue to use a functional global variable to
implement the remaining modules for the application.
Display
The tight coupling that exists between the front panel and block diagram in
a VI requires that you update the front panel using terminals on the VI block
diagram, or use references from a subVI. Each of these methods has its
advantages and disadvantages. Updating a front panel directly using a
terminal is a very fast and efficient method of updating front panel controls
and indicators. However, you must have a way to get subVI data to the
top-level VI to update the front panel. You can loosen the tight coupling that
exists between the front panel and the block diagram by sending a message
from subVIs to the top-level VI that contains that control and indicator. An
ideal implementation for this is a functional global variable.
LabVIEW is inherently a parallel programming language. You can take

advantage of the parallelism by using a separate loop to update the user
interface. The separate loop contains a queue that stores commands to
perform inside the loop. You can use a functional global variable to control
the separate loop from anywhere in the application by placing commands in
the queue.
The display module uses a functional global variable to store the reference
for the display queue. This allows the module to be called from anywhere in
the application to control the separate display loop.

File
The file module calls the File I/O VIs. The file module provides the
functionality to initialize, load cues from a file, save cues to a file, and
shutdown. Implement the file module using the functional global variable
architecture.
Hardware
The hardware module calls the Theatre Light Control API. The hardware
module provides the functionality to initialize, write, and shutdown the
hardware.
Implementation
Display
The Display module provides a method to update the front panel controls
and indicators from anywhere in the application. This module populates a
queue that contains both the commands the display module performs and the
data needed to perform these tasks. The display module performs the
Initialize Front Panel, Update Front Panel Channels, Select Cue in Cue List,
Enable/Disable Front Panel Controls, and Update Cue List functions.
To build a system that can perform these functions, you first must modify
the design pattern in TLC Main VI to have a third loop, and then create a
display module that is a functional global variable to send messages to the
third loop.
A queue that is specifically for the display loop controls the third loop. The
third loop only updates the user interface in the top-level VI.
Design Pattern Modification

1. Open the TLC Main VI and open the block diagram.
2. Modify the block diagram to have three loops. Create another queue to
pass data to the display loop as shown in Figure 6-34. To create the
initial structure of the display loop, use the following items:
❑ While Loop—Place this below the consumer loop. This will be the
display loop.
❑ Case Structure—Place this inside the display loop.
❑ Unbundle By Name—Place this inside the display loop.

3. Create a queue to control the display loop, as shown in Figure 6-34. Use
the following items and wiring:
❑ tlc_User Interface Command.ctl—Navigate to

Controls and add this control to the project.
Place the control as a constant on the block diagram. This constant
uses an enumerated type control and variant inside a cluster to
provide a scalable data type for the display loop. Set the enum value
to Initialize.
❑ Obtain Queue
❑ Enqueue Element
❑ Dequeue Element—Wire the element output of the Dequeue

Element function to the Unbundle By Name function.
❑ Wire the Data Type element from the Unbundle By Name to the case
selector terminal.
❑ Right-click the Case structure and select Add Case for Every Value
❑ Boolean constants
– Place a False constant inside each case of the Case structures.
Wire these constants to a single tunnel connected to the
conditional terminal for the display loop.
– Set the constant to True in the Stop case.
❑ Release Queue—This function will close the display loop queue

references.
❑ Wire the queue reference and error cluster through each case on the
case structure.
4. Add tlc_Display Queue Reference.ctl to the project in the

Controls virtual folder. It is located in <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\Course Project\Controls. This control
enqueues items to this queue from subVIs.

Figure 6-34. Display Loop

Display Module
Create a module that stores which function to perform on the display. As the
application runs, update the display. Complete the following steps to create
the Display module.
1. Create a Display virtual folder in the Modules project hierarchy.
2. Add tlc_Display Module.vi and tlc_Display Command

Control.ctl located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\Display directory
to the Display virtual folder.
Open the tlc_Display Module.vi that you just added into the
LabVIEW project.
3. Complete the Initialize case as shown in Figure 6-35 by adding a shift

register. The Initialize case stores the queue reference in a shift register.
Use the following items to complete this case:
4. Wire the shift register through the other cases. Verify that all of the
tunnels are wired in the module.
Figure 6-35. Display Module Initialize Case

5. Modify the Update UI Case to call the Enqueue Element function to pass
the command and data to the display loop in the top-level VI as shown
in Figure 6-36. Use the following items to complete this case:
❑ tlc_User Interface Command.ctl—This constant is located

in the Controls virtual folder in the project.
❑ Bundle By Name
❑ Enqueue Element
Figure 6-36. Display Module Update UI Case
6. Examine the connector pane as shown in Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37. Display Module Icon and Connector Pane

File
The File module saves and loads a file from the application. The File module
accepts an array of cues, a file path, and a command, and returns an array of
cues. The File module performs the Save Cues and Load Cues functions.
1. Create a File virtual folder in the Modules project hierarchy.
2. Add tlc_File Module.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\File directory to
the File virtual folder.
3. Open the tlc_File Module.vi that you just added to the LabVIEW
project.
4. Observe the architecture and design of the File module. Notice that
standard File I/O VIs are used to perform the reading and writing of the
data.
Testing
Test the functionality of the VI with simple hand tests.
1. Set the Command control to Save Cues.
2. Use the Browse button on the Path control to set the name and save
location for your new save file. The Path control has been set to browse
for new or existing files.
3. Place dummy data in the Cue Array Input.
4. Run the VI.
5. Set the Command control to Load Cues.
6. Run the VI.
7. Verify that the Cue Array Output matches the data you placed in the
Cue Array Input.
8. Close the VI.

Hardware
The Hardware module interacts with the Theatre Light Control API. The
Hardware module performs the Write Color and Intensity function.
1. Create a Hardware virtual folder in the Modules project hierarchy.
2. Add tlc_Hardware Module.vi located in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\
Hardware directory to the Hardware virtual folder.
3. Open the tlc_Hardware Module.vi that you just added into the
LabVIEW project.
4. Observe the architecture and design of the hardware module. Notice that
the VI calls the Theatre Light Control API.
5. Close the VI.
End of Exercise 6-3

E. Implement an Error Handling Strategy

The first goal of an error handling strategy is to determine if an error occurs.
There are many ways to determine if an error occurred within a VI. When
you use the state machine design pattern, you can add error handling states
to the state machine. For each state in the state machine, create a
corresponding error state that checks for and handles errors. The error states
provide the highest level of scalability for determining if errors occur.
The next goal of an error handling strategy is to determine what action to

take if a VI generates an error. Because each VI performs different
functions, each VI handles errors differently. Therefore no single error
handling solution works for every VI. To implement an effective error
handling strategy, you must understand the functionality of the VI. There are
two typical strategies for handling errors—passing the error outside the VI
or using a dialog box to inform the user of the error.
Passing an error outside the VI can be ineffective for code with loose
coupling because an external routine handles the error. Use this error
handling strategy for VIs that are part of an API. Many of the built-in
LabVIEW VIs and functions pass the error information out of the VI or
function when an error occurs. For example, if an error occurs in a File I/O
VIs, LabVIEW passes the error out of the VI. It is impractical for an API VI
to display a dialog box when an error occurs unless displaying a dialog box
is a specific feature of that API function. For a set of API VIs, you can create
specific error handling code that filters out expected errors or loops until a
specific error is resolved.
When you implement an API VI, place an error handling Case structure
around the API code. Wire an error cluster to the selector terminal of a Case
structure to create two cases, Error and No Error. The border of the Case
structure is red for Error and green for No Error. If an error occurs, the Case
structure executes the Error subdiagram. This is an effective error handling
strategy for VIs that function as APIs, as shown in Figure 6-33.
The second strategy informs the user of an error by displaying a meaningful

dialog box. This strategy indicates the error to the user, provides a
meaningful description of the error, and a resolution to the error. Use a
modified General Error Handler VI to provide a meaningful dialog box to
the user. The General Error Handler VI indicates if an error occurred. If an
error occurred, the General Error Handler VI returns a description of the
error and optionally displays a dialog box. Modify the General Error
Handler VI as described in the Error Codes section of Lesson 4, Designing
the Project, to create an error handler that is specific to the VI. This allows
you to control when errors display and how to handle the errors.

Exercise 6-4 Implement Error Handling Strategy

Goal
Develop a module that handles the errors in the application.
Scenario
Handling errors is an important part of developing applications in
LabVIEW. When you are developing the application, you can use error
handling to help find bugs in the applications.
A good error handling strategy is to call a module that stores the error
information and safely stops the application if an error occurs.
Design
Using a functional global variable, store the error information in an
uninitialized shift register. If an error occurs, the VI sends a stop message to
the producer to shut the program down.
Implementation
1. Create a Error virtual folder in the Modules project hierarchy.
2. Add the following files located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\Error directory to
the Error virtual folder:
❑ tlc_Error Module.vi
❑ tlc_Error Module Command Control.ctl
3. Open the tlc_Error Module.vi that you added to the LabVIEW

project.
4. Modify the block diagram to stop the producer, consumer, and display
loops if an error occurs. Use the following items to complete the case
where the structures are set to Handle Errors, Error, and True, as shown
in Figure 6-38:
❑ Flush Queue—Use two instances of this function to empty the

queues that control the consumer and display loops in the top-level
VI.
❑ Enqueue Element—Use three instances of this function. After

emptying the consumer and display queues, you need to add two
elements to the consumer queue and add one element to the display
queue to stop the consumer and display loops.

Create constants for the element input of each instance. For the
consumer loop, set the first enum to Stop and set the second enum
to Exit. For the display loop, set the enum to Stop.
❑ Generate User Event function—This function generates a user event

that can be used to stop the producer loop in the top-level VI.
❑ Merge Errors VI
Figure 6-38. Error Handler Error Case
5. Complete all structures by wiring the User Event Reference and Queue
references through all remaining cases.
6. Browse the VI and observe how the VI operates.
End of Exercise 6-4

Summary – Quiz
1. Which of the following should be considered when you have selected a
design pattern for an application?
a. How should the VI be initialized?
b. How should the timing mechanism be implemented?
c. How should the VI be documented?
d. All of the above
2. Which of the following is a valid method for initializing a design

pattern?
a. A single-frame sequence structure
b. An initialization state
c. Shift register
d. All of the above


1. Which of the following should be considered when you have selected a
design pattern for an application?
a. How should the VI be initialized?
b. How should the timing mechanism be implemented?
c. How should the VI be documented?
d. All of the above
2. Which of the following is a valid method for initializing a design

pattern?
a. A single-frame sequence structure
b. An initialization state
c. Shift register
d. All of the above

Notes

Implementing a Test Plan
7
Now that the project is complete, you implement the test plan. Use
techniques described in this lesson to verify code, test individual VIs, test
the integration of individual VIs into a larger system, and test the entire
system for functionality, performance, reliability, and usability.
Topics
A. Verifying the Code
B. Implementing a Test Plan for Individual VIs
C. Implementing a Test Plan for Integrating VIs
D. Implementing a Test Plan for the System

Lesson 7 Implementing a Test Plan
A. Verifying the Code

It is often said that the best way to find a solution to a problem is to ask
someone who knows absolutely nothing about the problem you are trying
to solve. This also is true when you are developing software. When you
develop a VI, you can lose objectivity about the code you produce. The best
way to determine that the code is correct is to perform code reviews.
Code Reviews
A code review is similar to a design review except that it analyzes the code
instead of the design. To perform a code review, give one or more developers
printouts of the VIs to review. You also can perform the review online
because VIs are easier to read and navigate online. Talk through the design
and compare the description to the actual implementation. Consider many
of the same issues included in a design review. During a code review, ask
and answer some of the following questions:
1. What happens if a specific VI or function returns an error? Are errors
dealt with and/or reported correctly?
2. Are there any race conditions? A race condition occurs when two or
more pieces of code that execute in parallel change the value of the same
shared resource. Because the outcome of the VI depends on which
action executes on the shared resource first, race conditions cause
unpredictable outcomes. Race conditions often occur with the use of
local and global variables or an external file, although race conditions
can exist any time more than one action updates the value of the same
stored data.
3. Is the block diagram implemented well? Are the algorithms efficient in
terms of speed and/or memory usage?
4. Is the block diagram easy to maintain? Does the developer make good
use of hierarchy, or is he placing too much functionality in a single VI?
Does the developer adhere to established guidelines?
There are a number of other features you can look for in a code review. Take
notes on the problems you encounter and add them to a list you can use as a
guideline for other walkthroughs.
Focus on technical issues when doing a code review. Remember to review

only the code, not the developer who produced it. Do not focus only on the
negative; be sure to raise positive points as well. Several third-party
resources contain more information about walk-through techniques.

B. Implementing a Test Plan for Individual VIs

It is essential to test each module as you complete it. But how do you know
what to test and if the tests you perform are appropriate? Because there are
so many possible inputs for a VI, it can be incredibly difficult to determine
if a VI has been built correctly and works as you intended. Testing every
possible combination of inputs is an inefficient and ineffective strategy. The
excessive computation time such a test would require is impractical. A more
effective strategy is to develop test cases that can identify the largest number
of errors in the application. The goal of a good test plan is to find the
majority of the errors.
Creating a Test Plan for Individual VIs

You should design a test plan for each module before you build any VIs.
Developing a test plan before you build a VI helps you know exactly what
the VI should accomplish. The test plan also helps you understand the
expected inputs and outputs to each VI.
To develop a test plan, you must determine what you need to test. Use the
following list to help identify what you need to test.
• Test all requirements in the requirements document
• Identify areas that need usability testing, such as the user interface
• Test the error handling and reporting capabilities of the VI
• Test areas of the VI that have performance requirements
It is much easier to develop a test plan when you have a requirements

document because you know you need to test each requirement in the
document. You can begin by writing a test plan that tests each specification
or requirement. However, testing the requirements does not always
guarantee that the software functions based on the requirements. To develop
a complete test plan, include different forms of testing for your VIs. A
comprehensive test plan should include the following forms of testing:
• Functional tests
• Error tests
Functional Tests
Functional tests focus on the most important aspects of a VI. Use functional
tests to determine if a VI works and functions as expected. A functional test
involves more than passing simple test data to a VI and checking that the VI
returns the expected data. Although this is one way to test a VI, you should
develop a more robust test.

A functional test should test for expected functionality as noted in the

requirements document. An easy way to create a functional test plan is to
create a table with three columns. The first column indicates the action that
the VI should perform, as noted in the requirements document. The second
column indicates the expected result, and the third column indicates if the
VI generates the expected result. Using this table is a good way to create a
usable test plan for the listed requirements.
Testing Boundary Conditions

Functional testing also should include tests for boundary conditions, which
can be a common source of functional errors. A boundary condition is a
value that is above or below a set maximum. For example, if a requirement
calls for a maximum value, you should test (maximum value +1),
(maximum value –1), and maximum value. Creating tests this way
exercises each boundary condition.
Hand Checking
Another common form of functional testing is simple hand checking. This
type of testing occurs during the development of the VI but can help during
the testing phase. If you know the value that a VI should return when a
certain set of inputs are used, use those values as a test. For example, if you
build a VI that calculates the trigonometric sine function, you could pass an
input of 0 to the VI and expect the VI to generate a result of 0. Hand
checking works well to test that a VI functions.
Be careful that hand checks do not become too difficult to work with. For
example, if you pass the value 253.4569090 to the sine function, it would be
difficult to determine if the VI generated the correct results. You increase the
possibility of incorrectly determining the expected value of a VI when you
hand check with values that appear to add complexity to the test. In general,
passing more complex numbers to a VI does not provide better test results
than passing values such as 0 or 3.14. Make sure to pass data that is of the
same data type but do not complicate the test plan by using numbers that
make it difficult for you to calculate the expected result.
Error Tests
Error tests help you determine if the error handling strategy you designed
works correctly and make sure the error handling code performs as you
expect. Test the error handling code by creating test plans that force errors.
The error test should verify that the proper errors are reported and recovered.
The error test plan also should verify that the error handling code handles
errors gracefully.

Job Aid
Use the following checklist to help generate a test plan for a VI.
❑ Develop the test plan before developing any code.
❑ Develop a test plan for each requirement in the requirements document.
❑ Test each boundary condition.
❑ Test all the error handling capabilities of the VI.
❑ Pass test data that you know is incorrect.
The individual component VI you want to test is referred to as the unit under
test (UUT). You must perform unit testing before you perform system
integration testing. System integration testing evaluates how your VIs
perform with devices and software external to LabVIEW. The output of unit
testing is useful in performing system integration because it provides
structure information about the LabVIEW code. Use unit testing as one of
the many tools, methods, and activities to help ensure quality software.
C. Implementing a Test Plan for Integrating VIs

Use integration testing to test the individual VIs as you integrate them into
a larger system. Use a top-down, bottom-up, or sandwich integration testing
technique.
Creating a Test Plan for Integrating VIs

As you develop VIs for the modules of your application, you integrate those
VIs into a higher-level VI. You must test the integrated VIs to make sure the
integration does not change the expected behavior of the individually tested
VIs. Many things can go wrong when you begin to integrate subVIs in a
system. An advantage of integration testing is that you know that the newly
integrated VI causes the error. Integration testing is important because as a
VI becomes a subVI in a larger system, many more interfacing interactions
can occur. These interactions can cause data to be lost or scrambled as it
crosses the interface to the VI. Integration also can affect the ability of a VI
to access distributed features. Another common integration bug can occur
when a VI attempts to access a resource that another VI locked.
Integration Testing
You perform integration testing on a combination of units. Unit testing
usually finds most bugs, but integration testing can reveal unanticipated
problems. Modules might not work together as expected. They can interact
in unexpected ways because of the way they manipulate shared data.

Note You can perform integration testing only in the LabVIEW Full and Professional
Development Systems.
You also can perform integration testing in earlier stages before you put the
whole system together. For example, if a developer creates a set of VIs that
communicates with an instrument, he can develop unit tests to verify that
each subVI correctly sends the appropriate commands. He also can develop
integration tests that use several of the subVIs in conjunction with each
other to verify that there are no unexpected interactions.
Do not perform integration testing as a comprehensive test in which you

combine all the components and try to test the top-level program. This
method can be expensive because it is difficult to determine the specific
source of problems within a large set of VIs. Instead, consider testing
incrementally with a top-down or bottom-up testing approach.
The bottom-up approach consists of tests that gradually increase in scope,

while the top-down approach consists of tests that are gradually refined as
new components are added.
Two other integration testing approaches are big-bang integration and

sandwich integration.
Big-Bang Integration Testing

Big-bang integration testing involves the following steps:
1. Single VI Testing—Tests each VI to ensure that the VI meets the final
requirements as described in the Creating a Test Plan for Individual VIs
section of this lesson.
2. VI Integration Testing—Integrates all the VIs into a single system
of VIs.
3. Final System Testing—Tests the complete system.
This form of testing is called big-bang testing because you put the system
together and click the Run button to begin testing the components. Big-bang
testing is dangerous because it is difficult to determine and locate where
errors occur in the system. Also, there is no way to test the system until all
the components are complete. This form of testing can be effective for small
projects, but for most projects, this form of testing is not practical.

Top-Down Integration Testing

Top-down integration testing involves testing VIs that are on the top of the
hierarchy and then working down the hierarchy levels. In order to test a
top-level VI, you must build a stub VI that can respond to the top-level VI.
As you continue integrating VIs, you replace the stub VIs with actual VI
components. Conduct tests as you integrate each VI. As the tests move
downward in the hierarchy, remove the stub VIs. Top-down integration
testing allows you to identify major control errors with the VI early in the
testing process. The biggest disadvantage to top-down testing is the time and
effort required to build stub VIs. Figure 7-1 shows an example of top-down
testing.
Figure 7-1. Top-Down Testing Process

Bottom-Up Integration Testing

Bottom-up integration testing involves integrating and testing the
lower-level VIs in the hierarchy and moving up the hierarchy. This form of
integration testing requires you to first test the individual VI, then create a
driver VI or a control program to coordinate the inputs and outputs of the VI
you are integrating. As you continue this process, you can replace the
control program with VIs that are higher in the hierarchy. The advantage to
bottom-up testing is that you interact with the lowest level components in
the system early on in the testing phase. For example, you can test the VI
that interacts with the data acquisition device early on to make sure that the
device works as required. Another advantage is that as you add a VI to the
system, you know if that VI caused an error because you are testing a single
VI in the integration of the system. A disadvantage to this integration testing
method is that you do not test the top-level control and decision algorithms
until the end of testing phase. Figure 7-2 shows an example of bottom-up
testing.
Figure 7-2. Bottom-Up Testing Process

Sandwich Testing
Sandwich testing is a combination of bottom-up and top-down integration
testing. This method uses top-down tests to test the upper-level control.
Bottom-up tests are used to test the low-level hardware and system
functionality. This method takes advantage of the benefits that both
integration testing methods use, while minimizing their disadvantages.
Figure 7-3 shows an example of sandwich testing.
Figure 7-3. Sandwich Testing Process
Regardless of the approach you take, you must perform regression testing at
each step to verify that the previously tested features still work. Regression
testing consists of repeating some or all previous tests. If you need to
perform the same tests numerous times, consider developing representative
subsets of tests to use for frequent regression tests. You can run these subsets
of tests at each stage. You can run the more detailed tests to test an individual
set of modules if problems arise or as part of a more detailed regression test
that periodically occurs during development.

Job Aid
Each of the integration testing methods except the big-bang method
emphasizes that units should be tested before they are integrated. Also, each
of the methods encourages you to test with incremental integration and to
test the system as components are added. Incremental integration enables
you to quickly identify and isolate which VIs generate errors. There is no
single incremental testing method that is best for testing a VI. However,
incremental integration saves time and helps you create more reliable
applications. Use the following checklist to determine if the incremental
testing strategy you use is adequate.
❑ The strategy requires you to write fewer stub or driver VIs.
❑ The strategy accurately tests if the VI meets the project requirements.
❑ The strategy enables you to easily determine and locate errors.
❑ The strategy does not introduce errors into the VI.
❑ The strategy is repeatable.
❑ The strategy is specific to the requirement.

Exercise 7-1 Integrate Initialize and Shutdown Functions

Goal
Initialize and shutdown a set of code modules.
Scenario
The Initialize function places the application into a stable mode by
initializing all of the modules and clearing the user interface.
When the user selects the File»Exit menu, the application should safely
shutdown. Safely shutting down an application requires closing all open
memory references.
Design
The Initialize function outlined in the requirements document performs the
following actions:
• Initialize Error Module
• Initialize Cue Module
• Initialize File Module
• Initialize Hardware Module
• Initialize Display Module
• Disable Front Panel Controls
• Initialize Front Panel
• Update Cue List
Because you design the modules to close open memory references, the
Shutdown VI accesses the function on the module to shutdown the module.
Also, Shutdown needs to send a Stop message to the display loop. Sending
a Stop message to the display loop causes that loop to finish executing. The
following modules need to shutdown: Display, Hardware, and File. You can
re-initialize the Cue module to delete any Cues that are stored in the
persistent shift register.
Implementation
The implementation of the Initialize VI involves calling the modules that
you built and wiring the correct data type to them. There is not a specific
order in which you must call the VIs. Follow the order in the Design section
to be complete.

Initialize
1. Create an Integration folder in the My Computer project hierarchy.
2. Add tlc_Initialize.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Integration directory to the
Integration folder.
3. Open the tlc_Initialize.vi.
4. Complete the block diagram as shown in Figure 7-4. This VI will

initialize the modules that you have already created. The block diagram
already includes these modules. To initialize them, use the following
items:
❑ Numeric constant—Create this constant with a representation of U8

and set its value to zero. This constant specifies whether the front
panel controls of the main user interface are enabled or disabled. A
value of zero corresponds to enabling the controls.
❑ To Variant—This function converts a numeric into the Variant

datatype so that it can be passed to the Data input of tlc_Display
Module.vi.
Note In later instances the Data input of tlc_Display Module.vi will be set to 2,
which corresponds to disabling the front panel controls.
❑ Right-click the Command input of tlc_Error Module.vi.

Select Create»Constant and set it to Initialize. Repeat for each
of the following modules as shown in Figure 7-4:
– tlc_Cue Module.vi
– tlc_File Module.vi
– tlc_Hardware Module.vi
– tlc_Display Module.vi
❑ Right click the Data Type input of the second instance of

tlc_Display Module.vi. Select Create Constant and set the
value as shown in Figure 7-4. Repeat this step for the third and
fourth instances of tlc_Display Module.vi.

Figure 7-4. Initialize Function

Figure 7-5. Initialize Function Icon and Connector Pane
5. Modify the connector pane for the VI, as shown in Figure 7-5.
7. Open TLC Main.vi.
8. Integrate tlc_Initialize.vi into the consumer loop of the TLC

Main VI as shown in Figure 7-6. This case is called when the application
starts. To build the case, use the following items:
Note As you integrate each function into the application, delete the One Button Dialog
function in the corresponding case of the Case structure.
❑ tlc_Initialize.vi—Place this VI in the Initialize case of the

consumer loop.
❑ Number of Channels—Create this constant from the Number of

Channels input of tlc_Initialize.vi. This determines the
number of rows and channels that will be initialized in the Cue
Information indicator on the front panel. Set the values of this
constant to initialize four rows and four columns.
Note The labels for the cluster constants in Figure 7-6 have been made visible to
differentiate between the parameters in each cluster.
9. Wire the Initialize case of the consumer loop as shown in Figure 7-6.
❑ Wire the user event out output of the Create User Event function
outside the while loops to the tlc_User Event Reference.ctl input of
the tlc_Initialize.vi.
❑ Wire the queue out output of the Obtain Queue function outside the
Display loop to tlc_Display Queue Reference.ctl input of the
tlc_Initialize.vi.
❑ Wire the queue out output of the Dequeue Element function inside
of the consumer loop to the tlc_Consumer Queue Reference.ctl
input of the tlc_Initialize.vi.

Figure 7-6. Initialize Case in Consumer
10. Save the VI.
Shutdown
1. Add tlc_Shutdown.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW
Integration folder.
2. Open tlc_Shutdown.vi. Complete the block diagram as shown in

Figure 7-7.
3. The Cue module is set to Initialize, which causes the shift register in the
Cue module to reinitialize with an empty Cue array.
Figure 7-7. Shutdown Function
5. Open TLC Main VI and place the tlc_Shutdown.vi in the Exit case
of the consumer loop. Run the error wire through tlc_Shutdown.vi.
6. Save the VI.
Testing
1. Run the TLC Main VI and select File»Exit. Verify that the Shutdown
function causes the application to end. After you integrate the Display
functionality, you also can verify that the Initialize function executes.
End of Exercise 7-1

Exercise 7-2 Integrate Display Module

Goal
Update the controls on the front panel.
Scenario
The design of this application splits the functionality into three separate
loops. The producer loop uses an Event structure to monitor changes to the
front panel. The consumer loop handles all of the processing for the
application. The display loop updates the user interface. The advantage of
this three loop architecture is that functionality is contained within
individual parallel processes. This increases performance and stability of
the application. Using the three loops also improves the maintainability and
scalability of the application.
Implement the code in the display loop to update the user interface.
Design
In order to perform the functions specified in the requirements document,
you need to have the following display functions: Initialize Front Panel,
Update Front Panel Channels, Select Cue in Cue List, Enable/Disable Front
Panel Controls, and Update Cue List. Implement these functions in the
display loop of the top-level VI. The advantage to implementing this code
on the top-level VI is that you have direct access to the terminals on the front
panel.
Implementation
Open the TLC Main VI block diagram and edit the display loop. Modify the
following cases in the Case structure.
Initialize Front Panel

This case initializes the 2D array of channels in Cue Information to the color
black and the intensity zero. It also increments channel numbers across the
array.
1. Modify the Initialize Front Panel case as shown in Figure 7-8 using the
following items.
❑ tlc_Cue Module.vi—This VI is used to initialize the 2D array of

channels in Cue Information.
❑ Cue Information local variable—Right-click the outer edge of the

Cue Information indicator on the front panel and select Create»
Local Variable from the shortcut menu.

❑ tlc_Cue Information Command.ctl—Create this enum

constant from the command input of the Cue Module and set its
value to Get Empty Cue. This sets the Cue Module to return an
empty cue with an intensity of zero, a color of black, and configured
channel numbers.
Figure 7-8. Initialize Front Panel
2. Save the VI.
Select Cue in Cue List

This case highlights a row in the cue list when a cue is selected either by the
user or by the application iterating through cues.
1. Modify the Select Cue in Cue List case of the display loop as shown in
Figure 7-9 using the following items.
❑ Variant To Data—This function converts the Variant datatype of

Data into the datatype specified by its type input.
❑ I32 Numeric constant—Data is converted into this datatype.
❑ Cue List indicator
Figure 7-9. Select Cue in Cue List Case
2. Save the VI.

Enable/Disable Front Panel Controls

This case enables or disables the Record button and Cue List listbox on the
front panel.
1. Modify the Enable/Disable Front Panel Controls case to enable or

disable Record and Cue List as shown in Figure 7-10 using the
following items:
❑ Cue List Property Node—Right-click the Cue List control on the

front panel and select Create»Property Node»Disabled.
Right-click the Property Node and select Change All To Write.
❑ Record Property Node—Create in the same manner as the Cue List

Property Node.
❑ Variant to Data
❑ U8 Numeric constant—Connect this constant to the type input of

Variant to Data so that the data output is the correct datatype for Cue
List. If the data output of Variant to Data is 0, the controls will be
enabled. If the value is 1, they will be disabled. If it is 2, they will be
disabled and dimmed.
Figure 7-10. Enable/Disable Front Panel Controls Case
2. Save the VI.

Update Cue List

This case retrieves the recorded cues and updates the Cue List. First you
must determine the number of cues, then you need to obtain and display the
names of the cues in order.
1. Modify the Update Cue List case of the display loop as shown in
Figure 7-11. To do this, use the following items:
Figure 7-11. Update Cue List Case
❑ For Loop
❑ First tlc_Cue_Module.vi
– Place the VI inside the while loop and outside the For Loop.
– Wire the Number of Cues output to the count terminal of the For
Loop. Wiring the count terminal this way executes the loop once
for each cue in the list.
– Right-click the command input of the Cue Module. Select
Create Constant and set its value to Get Number of Cues.
This value results in the Cue Module returning the number of
cues in the current Cue List.
❑ Second tlc_Cue_Module.vi
– Place the VI inside the For Loop.
– Right-click the Cue Module and select Create Constant. Set
this enum constant’s value to Get Cue Values. This value
results in the Cue Module returning a cluster containing the
name of the cue, its wait time, fade time, follow time, and the 2D
array of channels associated with that cue.
❑ Unbundle By Name—Wire Cue Output from the Cue module to the

input cluster to retrieve the Cue Name element.

❑ Cue List Property Node—Create a Property Node to modify the

Item Names property of the Cue List control.
– Right-click the Property Node and select Change All To Write
– Wire the Cue Name output of the Unbundle By Name function
to the ItemNames input of the Cue List Property Node.
– Verify that auto-indexing is enabled for the tunnel created on the
For Loop.
2. Save the VI.
Update Front Panel Channels

This case updates the value of the 2D array of channels on the front panel.
This case will be called every time that the channel data changes, such as
when a cue is playing and the channel intensities and colors are changing.
This case is also called when the user selects a cue from the Cue List so that
the information for the selected cue is displayed.
1. Modify the block diagram for the Update Front Panel Channels
case of the display loop as shown in Figure 7-12 using the following
items.
❑ Variant To Data
❑ tlc_Cue_Information.ctl—Place this control on the block

diagram as a constant and wire it to the type input of Variant to Data.
This converts the variant input of Variant to Data into a cue so that
the cue information can be displayed on the front panel.
❑ Cue Information control—Move this control into the Update

Front Panel Channels case of the display loop. Right-click the
control and select Change to Indicator from the shortcut menu.
Figure 7-12. Update Front Panel Channels Case

2. Save the VI.

Testing
1. Run the VI.
2. The VI calls the Initialize function. The function initializes the front
panel. All of the channels on the front panel should initialize with the
correct channel numbers.
End of Exercise 7-2

Exercise 7-3 Integrate Record Function

Goal
Pass data from the user interface to the rest of the application. Use an Event
structure to create a dialog box.
Scenario
The record function needs to prompt the user for the Cue Name, Wait Time,
Fade Time, Follow Time, and the settings for the channels. Prompt the user
with a modal dialog box where the user can enter values. After the user
enters the values, the values are placed into the Cue module, and the user
interface updates.
Design
A Record dialog box has been created, based upon the Dialog Based Events
framework. This framework uses an Event structure to monitor events on the
user interface. Complete the functionality to retrieve the inputs from the
user. Pass a Cue Data type that was created from the producer loop into the
consumer loop to store the recorded cue in the application. Using a variant
for the design pattern makes it easier to perform this functionality.
Implementation
1. Add tlc_Record Dialog Box.vi located in the <Exercises>\
LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Integration
directory to the Integration folder. This VI will be used to obtain
information about the cue recorded by the user.
2. Open the tlc_Record Dialog Box.vi. Open the front panel of the
VI and expand the input cluster, align the interface items, and hide the
error clusters to improve the usability of the VI. When complete, it
should be similar to Figure 7-13.
When this dialog box displays, the user enters values for Cue Name,
Wait Time (s), Fade Time (s), and Follow Time (s). The user
then configures the channel array for the intensities and colors for the
cue.
3. Set the minimum value for Fade Time (s) to be one second.
❑ Right-click the control and select Data Entry.
❑ Deselect Use Default Limits and enter 1 as the Minimum value.
❑ Click OK.

Figure 7-13. Front Panel of Record Dialog Box
4. Open the block diagram and create a constant from the command input
of the Cue module. Set the command to Get Empty Cue, as shown in
Figure 7-14.
Figure 7-14. Record Function Dialog Box

5. Modify the Connector Pane to pass the Cue indicator that you created on
the tunnel of the While Loop, as shown in Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15. Record Dialog Box Connector Pane
6. Prepare the VI for use as a modal dialog box.
❑ Resize the front panel to show only the buttons and the
tlc_Cue_Information.ctl.
❑ Select File»VI Properties, and select Window Appearance from

the Category pull-down menu. Change the Window Title to Cue
Record and click the OK button.
8. Modify the TLC Main VI to call tlc_Record Dialog Box.vi in the

producer loop and pass the Cue data to the Record function in the
consumer loop as shown in Figure 7-16. Use the following items:
❑ tlc_Record Dialog Box.vi—This VI obtains the cue that is to

be recorded from the user.
❑ Case structure—Place the Case structure around the Enqueue

Element and Bundle By Name functions, and make this case False.
Wire the Cancelled? terminal of tlc_Record Dialog Box.vi
to the case selector terminal. If the user cancels or closes the dialog
box, no cue should be recorded.
❑ To Variant—Wire the Output Cue of the dialog box VI to the

anything input of this VI to convert it into the variant datatype
needed for the Bundle By Name function.
❑ In the True case, wire the queue refnum and error wires across the
Case structure.

Figure 7-16. Record Event Case
9. Test the TLC Main VI. Verify that the Record Dialog Box appears when
you click on the Record button. After clicking OK in the Record Dialog
Box, a One Button Dialog should appear indicating that you are in the
Record case of the consumer loop. Click OK and stop the VI.
10. Add the tlc_Record.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Integration folder.
11. Open the tlc_Record.vi and examine the block diagram. The VI first
uses the Display Module to update the 2D array of channels on the user
interface. Next, it calls the Cue Module to add the new cue to the
functional global variable cue array. Finally, it calls the Display Module
again to update the cue list on the user interface.
13. Modify the consumer loop to call the Record VI and convert the variant
data into data that the Record VI can accept. Figure 7-17 shows the
completed Record case in the consumer loop. Use the following items to
modify this case:
❑ Variant To Data
❑ tlc_Cue_Information.ctl constant
❑ tlc_Record.vi

Figure 7-17. Record Case in Consumer
14. Save the VI.
Testing
1. Run the TLC Main VI.
2. Click the Record button and record a Cue.
3. If the application is running correctly, you should see that the front panel
channels update with the Cue you recorded, and the Cue List updates
with the name of the cue that you entered in the Record Dialog Box.
4. Stop the VI by selecting File»Exit.
End of Exercise 7-3

Exercise 7-4 Integrate Play Function

Goal
Execute a state machine design pattern in a producer/consumer (events)
design pattern.
Scenario
The Play functionality for the Theatre Light Controller is best implemented
as a state machine. Figure 7-18 shows the states of the Play function.
Start
Cue
Exists
Initialize Begin Play Load Cue Wait Time
Cue Does Not Exist Cue Exists
Cue
Does Not
Exist Check for
End Follow Time Fade Time
Next Cue
Figure 7-18. Play Function Flowchart
Implementing a state machine inside a producer/consumer (events) design

pattern requires some insight into how the producer/consumer (events)
design pattern operates. As you have seen in previous exercises, the design
pattern receives an event in the producer loop, and sends a message to the
consumer loop to do some computation on the event. The consumer loop is
designed to compute a single message from the producer. Implementing a
state machine requires a looping mechanism that is not native to the
producer/consumer (events) design pattern. You can imitate a loop with the
producer/consumer (events) design pattern by placing a message in the
consumer queue. In your application, you want to stay in the Play function
to implement the wait, fade, and follow timing requirements for the
application. Place messages in the consumer queue to stay in the Play case
in the consumer loop until the Play function completes. This method of
implementing a state machine inside the producer/consumer (events) design
pattern introduces some complexities when you implement the capability to
stop a play.

Design
The Play function uses the Timing module to implement the wait, fade, and
follow timing requirements.
After you develop the Play module, integrate the Play function into the TLC
Main VI. At this point in the exercise, you see how you can implement a
state machine in a producer/consumer design pattern.
Implementation
Build the play functionality to place in the consumer loop. Start by
examining the play VIs.
1. Add tlc_Play_Update Cue.vi located in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Integration
directory to the Integration folder.
2. Open the tlc_Play_Update Cue.vi and examine how the VI
operates.
❑ Notice that the VI calls the Light Color Controller VI, which
calculates a color based on desired color, desired intensity, elapsed
time, and target time.
❑ Notice also how the VI sends a message to the Hardware module and
Display module.
❑ Close the VI.
3. Examine the state machine tlc_Play.vi that will perform the Wait,
Fade, and Follow timing requirements for the application.
❑ Add tlc_Play.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Integration directory
to the Integration folder.
Open the tlc_Play.vi and notice that the VI is implemented using the
state machine design pattern. Also notice that the VI has a True constant
wired to the loop conditional terminal. This VI is designed to be called
repeatedly in order to move from one state to the next. In order to control the
VI, the state machine returns a Boolean indicating whether it is done.
Examine how the Initialize, Begin Play, and Load Cue states operate.

4. Modify the Wait Time state in tlc_Play.vi to use the tlc_Timing

Module functional global variable to control the timing as shown in
Figure 7-19. Use the following items:
❑ Unbundle By Name—Connect the Current Cue wire to this function

and set the cluster element to Wait Time (s).
❑ tlc_Timing Module.vi
– Place two Timing Module VIs inside the Wait Time state.
– Right-click each Timing Module VI and select Create»
Constant. Set each constant as shown in Figure 7-19.
Figure 7-19. Play Module Wait Time Case
❑ Case structure
– Place the Case structure around the second tlc_Timing Module
VI and ensure that this VI is in the True case.
– Wire the Done? terminal of tlc_Timing Module.vi to the
case selector terminal. If the tlc_Timing Module VI outputs True
from the Done terminal, then the Case structure will send the
tlc_Timing module a Start command to set a new start time.
– In the False case, pass the error wire through the Case structure.

❑ Select function—Wire the Select function output to the outer Case

structure output tunnel connected to the topmost shift register on the
While Loop. When the tlc_Timing Module VI outputs True from the
Done terminal, the Select function will transition the state machine
to the Fade Time state.
❑ Wait (ms) function
5. Modify the Fade Time state in tlc_Play.vi to use the tlc_Timing


and set the cluster element to Fade Time (s).
❑ tlc_Timing Module.vi
– Place two copies of this VI inside the Fade Time state.
– Right-click each Timing Module VI and select Create»
Constant. Set each constant as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20. Play Module Fade Time Case

❑ tlc_Play_Update Cue.vi—Wire the terminals of this VI as

shown in Figure 7-20. When complete, there are seven connections
to this VI.
❑ Case structure
– Place the Case structure around the second tlc_Timing Module
VI, and ensure that this VI is in the True case.
– Wire the Done? terminal of tlc_Timing Module.vi to the
case selector terminal. If the tlc_Timing Module VI outputs True
from the Done terminal, then the Case structure will send the
tlc_Timing module a Start command to set a new start time.
– In the False case, wire the error wire across the Case structure.
❑ Select function—Wire the Select function output to the Case

structure output tunnel connected to the uppermost shift register on
the While Loop. When the tlc_Timing Module VI outputs True from
the Done terminal, the Select function will transition the state
machine to the Follow Time state.
6. Modify the Wait Time state in tlc_Play.vi to use the tlc_Timing


and set the cluster element to Wait Time (s).
❑ tlc_Timing Module.vi—Right-click the Timing Module VI

and select Create»Constant. Set the constant to Check Time.
❑ Select function—Wire the Select function output to the Case

structure output tunnel connected to the topmost shift register on the
While Loop. When the tlc_Timing Module VI outputs True from the
Done terminal, the Select function will transition the state machine
to the Check for Next Cue state.

Figure 7-21. Play Module Follow Time Case
7. Open TLC Main.vi and modify the Play state in the consumer loop to
call tlc_Play.vi, and add the functionality to repeatedly call
tlc_Play.vi, as shown in Figure 7-22. Use the following items to
modify this case:
Figure 7-22. Play Case in Consumer Loop
❑ Case Structure—Wire the Stop? output of tlc_Play.vi to the

case selector terminal.
❑ Enqueue Element

❑ tlc_Consumer Control.ctl constant—Set the enum on the

constant to Play.
❑ Run wires through the True case.
8. Save the VI.
Testing
At this point, you can run the VI, record a cue, and play back the cue.
1. Run the VI.
2. Record a cue with a single channel that contains a color other than black,
and an intensity of 100. Set the Wait time to 0, Fade time to 10, and
follow time to 0.
3. Click the Play button on the front panel of the VI.
4. The channel that you recorded should begin to fade from 0% intensity to
100% intensity within 10 seconds.
5. Try recording another cue and observe the response of the system.
End of Exercise 7-4

Exercise 7-5 Integrate Stop Function

Goal
Flush a queue to guarantee when a command is sent.
Scenario
The requirements for the application state that the user can stop a playing
cue by clicking the Stop button on the front panel. This exercise implements
that capability.
Design
When the user clicks the Stop button, the Event structure generates an event
to process the Stop button. To guarantee that the application responds to the
Stop button, flush the queue that controls the consumer to remove any
messages stored in the queue. Also, stop the Timed Loops.
To do this, you must make the following changes to the TLC Main VI:
• In the producer loop, modify the Stop event case to flush the queue and
call the tlc_Timing Stop Module.vi.
• In the consumer loop, modify the Stop case to enable the front panel
controls.
Implementation
2. In the producer loop, modify the Stop event case to flush the queue as
shown in Figure 7-23. Use the following items to complete this event
case:
❑ Flush Queue
Figure 7-23. Producer Stop Event Case

3. Add tlc_Stop.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Integration folder. This VI clears any play commands that remain in
the consumer queue after the Stop case executes.
Because the consumer loop runs in parallel with the producer loop, it is
possible that the Play case of the consumer loop could enqueue a play
command after the user clicks on the Stop button and the queue is
flushed in the producer loop.
To address this, tlc_Stop.vi previews the next queue element

without removing it. If the next element is Play, then the element is
removed from the queue. If not, then execution continues normally.
4. In the consumer loop, modify the Stop case as shown in Figure 7-24.
This case should stop execution of the cue list and enable the user
interface controls. Use the following items to modify the case:
❑ tlc_Stop.vi—This VI previews the next element in the consumer

queue. If the next element is a play command, then that element is
removed so that the cue list execution stops completely.
❑ tlc_Play.vi—Create the Reset True constant from the Reset

input of tlc_Play.vi. This causes tlc_Play.vi to behave as if
the cue list had completed execution. It resets all of its functional
global variables and enables the front panel controls.
Figure 7-24. Consumer Stop Case
5. Save the VI.
Testing
2. Record a cue, and play the cue. Verify that the stop functionality works
by clicking the Stop button during play.
End of Exercise 7-5

Exercise 7-6 Integrate Save and Load Functions

Goal
Use a scalable data type to pass data from the consumer to the producer.
Scenario
The file save and load functionality are important for the lighting designers
who use the software. Most theatres orchestrate a lighting scene during
dress rehearsals, and the lighting designer re-uses the lighting design from
dress rehearsal for opening night and beyond. Save and load functionality is
important for any large scale application.
Design
Modify the producer loop in the TLC Main VI to prompt the user for the file
name. Several checks need to occur to determine if the user cancels the file
operation or tries to open a file that does not exist.
Modify the Save case in the consumer loop to get the values stored in the
Cue module and pass the recorded Cues to the File module.
Modify the Load case in the consumer loop to open the file and extract the
saved cues, while populating the Cue module with the saved cues.
Implementation
Modify the Save case in the consumer loop to get the values stored in the
Cue module and pass the recorded Cues to the File module.
Save
1. Add Clear Specific Error.vi located in the <Exercises>\
LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Shared directory
to the Shared virtual folder.
2. Open TLC Main VI.
3. Modify the Save case in the Menu Selection event of the producer loop,
as shown in Figure 7-25. Use the following items:
❑ File Dialog Express VI

– Launches a dialog box to select a file to be loaded. Verify that
Limit selection to single item is selected. Select File and New.
Click OK.
– Right-click the File Dialog Express VI and select View As Icon.

If the user selects an existing file, the File Dialog Express VI

prompts the user to replace the file. The File Dialog Express VI
returns a True on the exists output if the user replaced the file. If
the user cancels a save operation, the cancelled output returns
True.
❑ Compound Arithmetic
– Set the function to OR the two inputs.
– Invert the bottom terminal.
– Using the Compound Arithmetic function returns a True if the
user replaces the file or does not cancel the file save operation.
❑ Case structure
❑ Enqueue Element—Place this function in the True case of the Case

structure.
❑ tlc_Consumer Control.ctl constant —Place this constant in

the True case.
❑ To Variant—Wire the Path output of the File Dialog Express VI to

the anything input of To Variant.
❑ Bundle By Name function—Wire the tlc_Consumer

Control.ctl constant to the Bundle By Name function. Wire the
variant output of To Variant to the Data input of the Bundle By
Name function.
Figure 7-25. Producer Save Case True Case

❑ Clear Specific Error.vi

– Place this VI in the False case of the Case structure.
– Create a numeric constant with the value of 43 and wire it to the
code input of Clear Specific Error.vi. Error 43 is generated by
the File Dialog Express VI if the user selects Cancel in the file
dialog window.
❑ Wire the queue reference through the False case.
Figure 7-26. Producer Save Case False Case

4. Modify the Save Consumer case to perform the Save function as shown
in Figure 7-27.
❑ Variant to Data
❑ For Loop—This loop is used to iterate through all the cues in the Cue
List.
❑ tlc_Cue Module.vi
– Place the first instance of this VI outside the For Loop and set it
to Get Number of Cues.
– Wire the Number of cues output to the count terminal of the For
Loop to determine the number of iterations needed to save all the
Cue List data.
❑ tlc_Cue Module.vi
– Place the second instance inside the For Loop and set the
command to Get Cue Values.
– Wire the iteration terminal to the Cue Index on the Cue module
so that each cue in the list is retrieved.

❑ tlc_ File Module.vi—Set the command input to Save Cues.
❑ Wire the Cue Output output of the Cue Module to the Cue Array
Input of the File module. Verify that indexing is enabled on the For
Loop tunnel.
Figure 7-27. Consumer Save Case

5. Save the VI.
Load
Modify the Load case in the consumer loop to open the file and extract the
saved cues, while populating the Cue module with the saved cues.
1. Create the Open case in the Producer Menu Selection event as shown in
Figure 7-28. To do this, we will duplicate the Save case and modify the
File Dialog Express VI.
❑ Right-click the Save case, and select Duplicate Case from the
shortcut menu.
❑ Enter Open in the case selector label.
❑ Double-click the File Dialog Express VI to configure it. Select File

and Existing. Click OK.
❑ Change the tlc_Consumer Control.ctl constant enum to

Load.

Figure 7-28. Producer Open Case True Case
❑ Delete the Open case that you created earlier in the course to test the
menu handling capability of the application.
2. Build the Load functionality into the consumer loop.
❑ Add tlc_Load.vi located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Integration directory
to the Integration folder.
3. Open the tlc_Load.vi and examine how the VI operates. First, the VI
loads the cues from the specified file. Then it initializes the front panel
and adds the cues from the file to the cue module. Next, it updates the
cue list and deselects any selection in the cue list.
❑ Place the tlc_Load.vi in the Load case of the consumer loop in

TLC Main VI as shown in Figure 7-29. Right-click the type input
and select Create»Constant from the shortcut menu to create a path
constant.
Figure 7-29. Load Function
❑ Place the Variant to Data function in the Load case and complete the
wiring of the case.
4. Save the VI.

Testing
2. Record several Cues.
3. Select File»Save from the menu.
4. Save the data file as File Test.dat in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I directory.
7. Load the file you just saved by selecting File»Open and navigating to
File Test.dat in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I
directory. Play the loaded cue list and verify that the cues are the ones
you saved earlier.
End of Exercise 7-6

Exercise 7-7 Integrate Error Module

Goal
Integrate an error handling module into the design pattern.
Scenario
The Error module that you built is designed to safely shutdown the
application if an error occurs. Shutting down the producer loop requires
sending a user event to the producer loop. Shutting down the consumer loop
requires placing a Exit message in the queue. Shutting down the display
loop requires placing a Stop message in the queue.
When designing and developing an application, it is always important to be

mindful of how the application should respond when an error occurs. With
the Theatre Light Controller, an error should cause the system to gracefully
shut down by executing the cases in each of the application loops that cause
the loops to stop.
If an error occurs, the Timed Loops inside the Timing module should also
be stopped by calling the tlc_Timing Stop Module.vi.
Design
Modify the TLC Main VI to call the Error module after each computation in
the producer, consumer, and display loop.
Implementation
1. Modify the TLC Main VI to call the Error module after each
computation in the producer, consumer, and display loop as shown in
❑ tlc_Error Module.vi—Place an Error module into each loop.

These handle any errors that occur and stop all loops in the event of
any error. Place another instance after the Destroy User Event
function.
❑ tlc_Error Module Command Control.ctl—Set the

command of the last Error module to Report Errors because this
instance returns any errors that occurred. The previous instances of
the Error module do not pass error data through their error out
terminals.
❑ Simple Error Handler VI—This VI provides a pop-up dialog box in

the event that an error has occurred. The dialog box returns a
description of the error that occurred.

Figure 7-30. Producer/Consumer Design Pattern with Error Module

2. Save the VI.
Testing
1. Test the error handling capability by placing a Diagram Disable
Structure over the Clear Specific Error VI in the producer loop.
You can use the Diagram Disable Structure to comment out code on the
Block Diagram. It is a useful tool for testing functionality or for trying
to isolate problem areas on the block diagram.
❑ In the producer loop, navigate to the Menu Selection event case

Open case False case shown in the following figure.
❑ Place the Diagram Disable structure located on the Structures

palette over the Clear Specific Error VI as shown in Figure 7-31.
Figure 7-31. Producer Loop with Diagram Disable Structure

❑ Switch to the Enabled case in the Diagram Disable structure, and

wire the error cluster through the case as shown in Figure 7-32.
Figure 7-32. Enabled Case of Producer Loop with Diagram Disable Structure
2. Save the VI.
3. Run the VI.
❑ Select File»Open from the menu.
❑ Click the Cancel button in the file dialog window.
❑ The Simple Error Handler should display a dialog box indicating

that Error 43 occurred, and the application should stop after you
close the dialog box. If the application stops, the Error Module
works correctly, because it is designed to stop each loop in the
application.
4. Enable the case of the Diagram Disable structure that contains the Clear
Specific Error VI.
❑ On the block diagram, go to the Disabled case of the Diagram

Disable structure.
❑ Right-click the border of the Diagram Disable structure and select

Enable This Subdiagram.
5. Save the VI.

Challenge
Integrate the Select Cue function to update the user interface with the values
in a selected recorded cue. There are two primary tasks that must be
implemented to build the Select Cue functionality. The Select Cue function
must acquire the cue values for the selected cue and update the front panel
with the cue values.
1. Modify tlc_functions.ctl to contain a Select Cue item.

2. Change the Cue List indicator to a control.
3. Modify the Event structure in the producer loop to contain a “Cue
List”:Value Change event case.
4. Modify the producer loop to pass the index of the selected cue to the
consumer loop.
5. Modify the consumer loop to get the selected cue value and update the
front panel.
6. To test your changes, record several cues. Click each row in the cue list.
The Cue Information cluster on the front panel of the VI should update
with the information for each cue that you select.
End of Exercise 7-7

D. Implementing a Test Plan for the System

System testing happens after integration to determine if the product meets
customer expectations and to make sure the software works as expected
within the hardware system. You can test the system using a set of black box
tests to verify that you have met the requirements. With system testing, you
test the software to make sure it fits into the overall system as expected.
Most LabVIEW applications perform some kind of I/O and also
communicate with other applications. Make sure you test how the
application communicates with other applications.
When testing the system, consider the following questions:

• Are performance requirements met?
• If my application communicates with another application, does it deal
with an unexpected failure of that application well?
Implementing System Testing

System testing is necessary to ensure that the customer receives the VI they
expect. System testing also helps you move the project toward a final sign
off on the VI. System tests focus on the following areas:
• Configuration
• Performance
• Stress/load
• Functionality
• Reliability
• Usability
Note Every individual or company has its own method for testing a system. The
guidelines described in this section are suggestions for system testing, not requirements.
Do not change your existing testing strategy unless it is deficient.
Configuration Tests
Use configuration tests to test variations in system and software
configurations. Include testing on multiple operating systems unless the
requirements document clearly specifies the operating system for the VI.
Configuration testing also includes running the VI on different screen
resolutions. Make sure the VI can display the required information on the
minimum screen resolution stated in the requirements document. Also, test
the VI on higher screen resolutions to ensure that the user interface items
remain proportional and are not distorted.

Performance Tests
Performance tests define and verify performance benchmarks on the
features that exist in the VI. Performance tests include tests for execution
time, memory usage, and file sizes. The requirements document should
indicate any performance requirements for the VI. Make sure you test each
performance requirement in the requirements document.
The final implementation of the system must be able to meet the

performance requirements. The system should respond to the user within the
predefined limits specified in the requirements. Performance testing also
tests how well the software performs with external hardware and interfaces.
Check all interfaces outside the system to make sure the software responds
within set limits. You can use benchmarking in performance tests to evaluate
the performance of the system.
Stress/Load Tests
The stress/load tests define ways to push a VI beyond the required limits in
the specification. Typical stress/load tests include large quantities of data,
extended time testing, and running a large number of applications
concurrently with the VI. Stress/load testing helps guarantee that a VI
performs as required when it is deployed.
Functional Tests
The final implementation of a system must be functional to the level stated
in the requirements document. The easiest way to test for functionality is to
refer to the original requirements document. Check that there is a functional
implementation of each requirement listed in the requirements document.
Functional testing also must involve the customer at some point to guarantee
that the software functions at the level stated in the requirements. After you
complete functional testing and the software passes the software test, you
can verify the software as functional.
Reliability Tests
Testing the reliability of the system often involves using pilot testing to test
the system in a non-development environment. There are two forms of pilot
testing—alpha and beta testing. Schedule alpha testing to begin when the
software first reaches a stage where it can run as a system. Alpha testing
typically involves a developer running the system on another computer. Beta
testing begins when most of the system is operational and implemented and
ready for user feedback. Pilot testing provides a good indication of how
reliable the software is when it is deployed on computers other than the
development computer. Pilot testing helps identify issues with hardware and
operating system compatibility.

You can complete this testing with alpha and beta testing. Alpha and beta
testing serve to catch test cases that developers did not consider or complete.
During alpha testing, test a functionally complete product in-house to see if
any problems arise. Beta testing occurs after alpha testing is complete.
During beta testing, the customers in the field test the product.
Alpha and beta testing are the only testing mechanisms for some companies.
Unfortunately, alpha and beta testing actually can be inexact and are not a
substitute for other forms of testing that rigorously test each component to
verify that the component meets stated objectives. When this type of testing
is done late in the development process, it is difficult and costly to
incorporate changes suggested as a result.
Alpha Tests
The main focus of alpha testing is to execute system tests, fix errors, and
produce beta-quality software. Beta-quality software is defined as software
ready for external customer use.
System tests should verify behavior from a user-interaction perspective.

Usually a developer does not test his or her own features. Execute system
tests and any relevant regression tests from previous releases. You also may
want to test existing features that have not been modified but that are
affected by new functionality.
Alpha testing usually involves making the software available to other

internal departments for testing, including departments whose products
interact with or depend on the software.
Beta Tests
Beta testing involves sending a beta version of the software to a select list of
customers for testing. Include a test plan that asks the users to test certain
aspects of the software.
Write additional systems tests to execute during the beta phase. Include
performance and usability tests. The tests executed during the alpha phase
should be executed again as part of beta testing. Also include time to test the
product by freely developing applications like users do. Consider that you
might need to create more test cases or update existing tests.
Usability
Usability measures the potential of a system to accomplish the goals of the
user. Some factors that determine system usability are ease-of-use, visual
consistency, and a clear, defined process for evolution.
Systems that are usable enable users to concentrate on their tasks and do real
work rather than focusing on the tools they use to perform tasks.

Usable VIs have the following characteristics:

• Easy to learn
• Efficient to use
• Provide quick recovery from errors
• Easy to remember
• Enjoyable to use
• Visually pleasing
Usability applies to every aspect of a VI with which a user interacts,

including hardware, software, menus, icons, messages, documentation,
and training. Every design and development decision made throughout the
VI lifecycle has an effect on usability. As users depend more and more on
software to get their jobs done and become more critical consumers of
software, usability can be a critical factor that ensures that VIs are used.
Usability Heuristics
Use the following usability heuristics1 when evaluating the usability of
software. Not meeting one or more of these guidelines may result in a
usability issue.
• Visibility of system status—The system should always keep users
informed about what is going on, through appropriate feedback within a
reasonable time.
• Match between system and the real world—The system should speak
the users’ language, with words, phrases, and concepts familiar to the
user, rather than system-oriented terms. Follow real-world conventions,
making information appear in a natural and logical order.
• User control and freedom—Users often choose system functions by
mistake and need a clearly marked “emergency exit” to leave the
unwanted state without having to go through an extended dialogue.
Support undo and redo.
• Consistency and standards—Users should not have to wonder whether
different words, situations, or actions mean the same thing. Follow
platform conventions.
• Error prevention—Even better than good error messages is a careful
design which prevents a problem from occurring in the first place.
• Recognition rather than recall—Make objects, actions, and options
visible. The user should not have to remember information from one part
of the dialog to another. Instructions for use of the system should be
visible or easily retrievable whenever appropriate.
1. Heuristics for User Interface Design, Jakob Nielsen, www.useit.com/papers/heuristic/heuristic_list.html.

• Flexibility and efficiency of use—Accelerators, unseen by the novice

user, may often speed up the interaction for the expert user such that the
system can cater to both inexperienced and experienced users. Allow
users to tailor frequent actions.
• Aesthetic and minimalist design—Dialogs should not contain
information which is irrelevant or rarely needed. Every extra unit of
information in a dialog competes with the relevant units of information
and diminishes their relative visibility.
• Helps users recognize, diagnose, and recover from errors—Error
messages should be expressed in plain language (no codes), precisely
indicate the problem, and constructively suggest a solution.
• Help and documentation—Even though its better if the system can be
used without documentation, it may be necessary to provide help and
documentation. Any such information should be easy to search, focused
on the user’s task, list concrete steps to be carried out, and not be too
large.
Usability Testing
Usability testing is a cyclic process, resulting in several iterations of design
and test. A typical usability study includes three iterations and a final
meeting. Each iteration includes three steps—meeting, testing, and report.
• Meeting—Gather information, consider the different issues
encountered, and determine guidelines. Set goals and purposes during
this step.
• Testing—Test, analyze, or evaluate the product. Depending on the
iteration of usability testing, conduct a usability evaluation, cognitive
walkthrough, or formal study of the software.
• Report—Present the test results. Issues are typically listed by priority.
Reports increase in detail and complexity with each stage.
Usability Engineering Techniques

Usability engineering involves a variety of techniques that can provide
important information about how customers work with your application.
Different techniques are used at different stages of development.
For example, as you develop requirements and processes, observations and

interviews might be appropriate techniques. Later in the development cycle,
as you develop the look and feel of the product, benchmarking, prototyping,
and participatory design might be useful techniques. Once you have
completed the design, usability testing can be used more effectively. You
can even test a paper prototype for usability before you write any code.
There are many techniques you can apply to the usability process. No single
technique can ensure the usability of a product. Usability is an iterative

process that works best when it occurs in partnership with software

development.
Consider incorporating the following usability techniques into the

development and testing process:
• User and Task Observations—Observing users at their jobs,
identifying their typical work tasks and procedures, analyzing their
work processes, and understanding people in the context of their work.
• Interviews, Focus Groups, and Questionnaires—Meeting with users,
finding out about their preferences, experiences, and needs.
• Benchmarking and Competitive Analysis—Evaluating the usability
of similar products in the marketplace.
• Paper Prototyping—Including users early in the development process,
before coding begins, through prototypes prepared on paper.
• Creation of Guidelines—Helping to assure consistency in design
through development of standards and guidelines.
• Heuristic Evaluations—Evaluating software against accepted usability
principles and making recommendations to enhance usability.
• Usability Testing—Observing users performing real tasks with the
application, recording what they do, analyzing the results, and
recommending appropriate changes.
Usability engineering provides important benefits in terms of cost, product

quality, and customer satisfaction. It can improve development productivity
through more efficient design and fewer code revisions. It can help eliminate
over-design by emphasizing the functionality required to meet the needs of
real users. Design problems can be detected earlier in the development
process, saving time and money. It can provide further cost savings through
reduced support costs, reduced training requirements, and greater user
productivity.

Exercise 7-8 Stress and Load Testing

Goal
Perform stress and load testing on the application.
Scenario
Before releasing an application, a set of system level tests must take place.
These tests can consist of usability testing, performance testing, stress, and
load testing.
Design
Create a large set of cues stored in a file that contain random wait times, fade
times, follow times, and channel colors and intensities. The VI used to
create the large set of cues requests from the user the maximum times to use
for the wait, fade, and follow so that it is easier to analyze the functionality
of the application.
Implementation
1. Open the System Testing Driver.vi located in the
System Testing folder.
2. Open the block diagram and examine how this VI uses the modules that
you created to create a large set of Cues.
3. Switch to the front panel and set the following front panel controls:
• Number of Cues = 2000
• Wait Time = 0
• Fade Time = 5
• Follow Time = 0
4. Run the VI.
5. When prompted, save the file as Stress Load Test.dat in the

7. Select File»Open to load the file Stress Load Test.dat located in

the <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\

8. Click the Play button.
9. Open the Windows Task Manager and monitor the memory usage and
performance of the Theatre Light Controller. Running TLC Main VI
with a large number of cues can indicate if there is a memory or
performance issue with the application.
End of Exercise 7-8

Summary – Quiz
1. Top-Down, bottom-up, big-bang, and sandwich are all methods of
performing what kind of test?
a. Regression
b. Integration
c. Performance
d. Usability
2. Which type of test involves testing at each step of integration to verify

that previously tested features still work?
a. Regression
b. Stress/load
c. Performance
d. Configuration
3. Which of the following is a focus of system testing?

a. Performance
b. Stress/load
c. Functionality
d. Usability
e. All of the above


1. Top-Down, bottom-up, big-bang, and sandwich are all methods of
performing what kind of test?
a. Regression
b. Integration
c. Performance
d. Usability
2. Which type of test involves testing at each step of integration to verify

that previously tested features still work?
a. Regression
b. Stress/load
c. Performance
d. Configuration
3. Which of the following is a focus of system testing?

a. Performance
b. Stress/load
c. Functionality
d. Usability
e. All of the above

Notes

Evaluating VI Performance
8
“Make it Right, Then Make It Fast” — Anonymous
As you develop your VI, you might want to focus on its performance;
however, during development, it is more effective for you to focus on using
good design principles. Wait to identify and improve performance issues
after you have a stable, working application. Consider that the rapid rate of
improvement in computer technology can compensate for some
performance issues. This lesson describes methods to evaluate and improve
VI performance.
Topics
A. Steps to Improving Performance
B. Using VI Metrics to Identify VI Issues
C. Identifying VI Issues with VI Analyzer (Optional)
D. Identifying Performance Problems
E. Fixing Performance Problems

Lesson 8 Evaluating VI Performance
A. Steps to Improving Performance

Computer technology is changing at an exponential rate. In 1965, Gordon
Moore observed that the number of transistors per integrated circuit would
double every few years. This observation has been called Moore’s Law1.
This pace has been consistent over time, and the increase in processing
power has followed the rate of miniaturization of integrated circuits.
Because of these advances in technology, the price of computer equipment
continues to fall, while processing power continues to rise. However, the
effort required to develop software that runs on the integrated circuit
continues to be challenging and time consuming. In fact, the cost of the
developer far exceeds the cost of the computer that runs the program.
Therefore, it makes sense to focus your development time on writing
correct, well-designed code.
Developing VIs that are scalable, readable, and maintainable helps you
create VIs that are correct, thus saving costs over time. However, there are
times when VIs are too slow, and purchasing a newer computer to run the
VI might not be an option. In this case, there are techniques you can use to
identify areas of the code that are causing performance problems. Minimize
the time you spend identifying and correcting performance problems
because processor technology advances so rapidly that by the time you fix
performance problems, a faster computer may be available that compensates
for slow VI performance.
To improve performance, identify the location of the performance problem

in the VI and fix the problem.
B. Using VI Metrics to Identify VI Issues

The VI Metrics window, available in the LabVIEW Professional
Development System, provides a way to measure the complexity of an
application similar to the widely used source lines of code (SLOC) metrics
for text-based programming languages. With the VI Metrics window you
can view metrics about VIs, which can be useful in finding areas of a VI that
are too complex. You also can use those metrics to establish baselines for
estimating future projects.
Remember that any metric, including SLOC, is a crude measurement of

complexity. The VI Metrics window gives you access to many metrics
because you might find that some are more valuable than others in certain
cases. For example, you might decide that for user interface VIs you can
combine certain metrics to get a better idea of the complexity of a VI. In that
case, you can make your own metric by saving the information about a VI
1. Intel Corporation, Moore’s Law, 2003, www.intel.com/research/silicon/mooreslaw.htm, Silicon.

and writing VIs to parse the results, combining fields to produce a new
measurement of the complexity of a VI.
Use the VI metrics tool to identify the following issues:

• Inappropriate use of local variables
• Deep nesting of the block diagram and overuse of structures
• Oversized block diagrams
For more information about VI metrics, refer to Using the VI Metrics

Window in the LabVIEW Help.

Exercise 8-1 Identify VI Issues with VI Metrics

Goal
Determine the complexity of the VI.
Scenario
Using VI Metrics can determine the complexity of the VI to help in being
able to identify issues with the application.
Design
Run the VI Metrics tool to determine the complexity of the VI.
Implementation
2. Select Tools»Profile»VI Metrics.
3. In the Show statistics for section, place checkmarks in the checkboxes

for Diagram, User interface, Globals/locals, CINs/shared lib calls,
and SubVI interface.
4. Notice that by using the modular approach to developing the application

that the max diag depth remains very low. This statistic indicates how
deeply a VI is nested. Also, notice the number of global and local
variables that this application uses.
5. When you finish viewing the VI Metrics, click the Done button.
End of Exercise 8-1

C. Identifying VI Issues with VI Analyzer (Optional)

The LabVIEW VI Analyzer Toolkit provides you with the ability to run tests
on VIs interactively or programmatically to check them for style, efficiency,
and other aspects of LabVIEW programming.
Note The VI Analyzer Toolkit is not included in the LabVIEW Professional

Development System. It is available for purchase from ni.com.
The toolkit organizes the tests into the following main categories:
• Block Diagram—Tests analyze VI performance and style related to the
block diagram.
• Documentation—Tests check for documentation issues within VIs.
• Front Panel—Tests analyze front panel design and style.
• General—Tests analyze aspects of VIs not covered in the Block
Diagram, Documentation, or Front Panel categories.
Block Diagram Tests

The VI Analyzer groups the block diagram tests into three subcategories:
Performance, Style, and Warnings.
Performance
The tests in the following list analyze coding conventions that affect VI
performance.
• Arrays and Strings in Loops—Checks loops to see if they contain
Build Array or Concatenate Strings functions. Avoid using these
functions in loops because each call to them requires a dynamic resizing
of the array or string, which can affect memory and processor time. This
test does not check timed loops.
• Coercion Dots—Checks the total number of coercion dots on the block
diagram and the number of coercion dots on individual wires and
compares them to user-specified limits.
• Enabled Debugging—Checks whether debugging is enabled or
disabled. Disabling debugging improves VI performance.
• Wait in While Loop—Checks While Loops with front panel control
terminals for structures or functions other than I/O functions that
regulate the speed of the While Loop.
• Wired Terminals in Subdiagrams—Checks to see if any control or
indicator that is wired on the connector pane does not reside within the
top-level diagram. In order to avoid unnecessary memory copies, place
control and indicator terminals that are wired on the connector pane
should be placed on the top-level diagram.

Style
The tests in the following list analyze block diagrams for issues related to
LabVIEW style. Refer to the LabVIEW Style Checklist for information
about LabVIEW style.
• Backwards Wires—Checks whether wires flow from left to right.
• Control Terminal Label Visible—Checks if labels of block diagram
control terminals are visible. To easily identify control terminals on the
block diagram, always make labels visible.
• Control Terminal Wiring—Checks whether wires exit control
terminals from the right side and enter indicator terminals on the left
side.
• Sequence Structure Usage—Checks whether the block diagram
includes Stacked Sequence structures that contain more than the
user-specified maximum number of frames. The test does not check Flat
Sequence structures.
• String Constant Style—Checks the style of string constants on the
block diagram. String constants containing no characters fail the test.
Replace them with an empty string constant. String constants set to
Normal Display that contain only white space—such as spaces, tabs, or
line feeds—fail the test. Set the constants to '\' Codes Display to
improve block diagram readability.
• Unused Code—Checks for unnecessary code on the block diagram.
• Wire Bends—Compares the total number of bends on a wire and wire
segments and compares them to user-specified limits.
• Wires Under Objects—Checks for wires that run under objects or
other wires.
Warnings
The tests in the following list analyze block diagrams for potential design
problems.
• Adding Array Size Elements—Checks whether the Add Array
Elements function connects to the output of the Array Size function to
determine the size of a multidimensional array. Wire the Multiply Array
Elements function to the size(s) output of the Array Size function to
determine whether a multidimensional array is empty.
• Breakpoint Detection—Checks for breakpoints on the block diagram,
including breakpoints on wires, nodes, and subdiagrams.
• Bundling Duplicate Names—Checks element names in the Bundle By
Name and Unbundle By Name functions for duplicates. Duplicate
elements can cause confusing and sometimes incorrect block diagram
behavior.

• Error Cluster Wired—Checks that the error output on a block diagram

node is wired. You can set the test to ignore VIs with automatic error
handling disabled. You also can ignore nodes that usually have unwired
error outputs.
• For Loop Iteration Count—Checks For Loops to ensure that the VI
does not use both auto-indexing arrays and the N terminal to govern the
number of iterations the For Loop runs. You also can check for multiple
auto-indexing arrays governing the iteration count.
• Globals and Locals—Checks whether a block diagram contains global
and local variables.
• Hidden Objects in Structures—Checks whether any objects in
structures are hidden outside the visible bounds of the structure.
• Hidden Tunnels—Checks tunnels, shift registers, and other structure
border elements to see if they overlap. Overlapping tunnels can make a
block diagram difficult to read. The test does not check dynamic event
tunnels or tunnels on the inner borders of Flat Sequence structures.
• Indexer Datatype—Checks functions that index array elements and
string characters to ensure that a signed or unsigned 32-bit integer data
type indexes the elements. The test fails if a signed or unsigned 8-bit or
16-bit integer data type indexes string or array elements. The test ignores
functions that use constants for indexing.
• Pattern Label—Checks whether a file dialog box that uses file patterns
specifies a pattern label. The two items you can check are the File Dialog
function and the browse options on a path control.
• Reentrant VI Issues—Checks for control references, implicit Property
Nodes, or implicit Invoke Nodes in a reentrant VI. Because reentrant VIs
maintain multiple data spaces but share a single front panel, unexpected
results can occur when attempting to read or manipulate properties of
controls on the shared front panel.
• Typedef Cluster Constants—Checks cluster constants on the block
diagram that are linked to typedef controls to determine whether their
values match the default value of the typedef control. If a constant has a
non-default value and the structure of the typedef changes, the value of
the constant might reset. Use the Bundle By Name function to change
the value of any elements inside a cluster constant linked to a typedef
control.
Documentation Tests
The VI Analyzer groups the Documentation tests into the Developer and
User subcategories.

Developer
The tests in the following list ensure that VIs contain documentation that
benefits other developers.
• Comment Usage—Checks whether the block diagram contains a
minimum user-specified number of comments. The test also can check
whether all subdiagrams of multiframe structures, such as Case, Event,
and sequence structures, contain at least one comment.
• Label Call Library Nodes—Checks Call Library Function Nodes on
the block diagram for labels. You can improve the readability of a VI by
using the label of a Call Library Function Node to describe the function
you are calling in a shared library. The test fails if a Call Library
Function Node has no label or the default label.
• Revision History—Checks for revision history comments. Clear the
revision history when you complete a VI so users cannot see developer
comments.
User
The tests in the following list ensure that VIs contain documentation that
benefits users.
• Spell Check—Spell checks VIs, front panels, and block diagrams.
• VI Documentation—Checks for text in the VI description, control
description, and/or tip strip fields on all controls.
Front Panel Tests

The VI Analyzer groups the front panel tests into the SubVI and User
Interface subcategories.
SubVI
The tests in the following list check the appearance and arrangement of front
panel controls on VIs used as subVIs.
• Array Default Values—Checks charts, graphs, and arrays on a front
panel for empty default values. Saving non-empty default values inside
charts, graphs, or arrays uses memory unnecessarily. When the VI runs,
it overwrites values wired to indicators on the block diagram. If the VI
is used as a subVI, the VI overwrites values wired to controls connected
to the connector pane.
• Cluster Sized to Fit—Checks that front panel clusters are set to Size to
Fit, Arrange Horizontally, or Arrange Vertically. If you do not select one
of these autosizing options, cluster objects might not be visible to the
user.
• Control Alignment—Checks that the alignment of controls on the front
panel roughly matches the alignment of controls on the connector pane.

User Interface
The tests in the following list analyze user interface design.
• Clipped Text—Checks that any visible text on the front panel is not cut
off. This includes text in control labels, control captions, free labels, and
text controls such as strings and paths. The test cannot check the text
inside listboxes, tables, tree controls, and tab controls.
• Dialog Controls—Checks that the front panel controls are on the
System palette. The test ignores controls that do not have a dialog
counterpart.
• Duplicate Control Labels—Checks that controls on the front panel do
not share the same label.
• Empty List Items—Checks listbox, multicolumn listbox, table, and
tree controls to ensure that they are empty. LabVIEW populates the
contents of these controls when a VI runs, so saving a with these controls
populated wastes memory.
• Font Usage—Checks that front panel controls, indicators, and free
labels use user-specified symbolic fonts, such as application, system, or
dialog fonts. The test cannot check fonts for text within listboxes, tables,
tree controls, and tab controls.
• Overlapping Controls—Checks that front panel controls do not
overlap. The test does not analyze front panel decorations.
• Panel Size and Position—Checks that a front panel completely resides
within the bounds of the screen. The test also checks whether the front
panel is larger than the maximum specified width and height. If you are
using a multi-monitor system, the test fails if the panel does not reside
entirely within the bounds of the primary monitor. This test works only
on standard, control, and global VIs.
• Transparent Labels—Checks that free labels, control labels, and
control captions all have transparent backgrounds.
General Tests
The VI Analyzer groups the General tests into three subcategories: File
Properties, Icon and Connector Pane, and VI Properties.
File Properties
The tests in the following list analyze properties of the VI as a file, such as
filename and size.
• SubVI and TypeDef Locations—Checks that subVIs and TypeDefs
reside in one of an arbitrary number of user-specified locations (paths
and LLBs). If you do not specify a location, the VI passes the test. The
test does not check Express VIs on a block diagram.

• VI Extension—Checks the filename extension. The test fails for any VI

that does not have a .vi or .vit extension, or for any custom control
that does not have a .ctl or .ctt extension. The test is case insensitive.
• VI Name—Checks the name of a VI for potentially invalid characters.
• VI Saved Version—Checks that the VI is saved in the most current
version of LabVIEW.
• VI Size—Compares the file size of a VI to the maximum allowable size
the user specifies.
Icon and Connector Pane

The tests in the following list analyze VI icon and connector pane style
issues.
• Connected Pane Terminals—Checks that control and indicator
terminals on the connector pane are wired on the block diagram.
• Connector Pane Alignment—Checks that inputs wire to connector
pane terminals on the left side and that outputs wire to connector pane
terminals on the right side.
• Connector Pane Pattern—Checks that the connector pane pattern,
regardless of rotation, matches one of the user-specified connector pane
patterns.
• Default Icon—Checks that VI icons are neither default nor empty.
• Error Style—Checks that error connections appear in the lower-left and
lower-right corners of the connector pane. This part of the test runs only
if the connector pane wires a single error in and a single error out
terminal. The test also checks whether an error case appears around the
contents of the block diagram.
• Icon Size and Border—Checks that the icon image is 32 × 32 pixels in
size and has a solid border. The test does not check the icons of control
or global VIs.
• Polymorphic Terminals—Checks that terminals on all instances of a
polymorphic VI appear in the same position on the connector pane of the
instance VI. The test does not analyze broken polymorphic VIs.
• Terminal Connection Type—Checks that controls and indicators on
the connector pane that match user-specified names or patterns include
the user-specified terminal connection type, such as required,
recommended, or optional.
• Terminal Positions—Checks that controls and indicators connected to
a connector pane that match user-specified names or patterns are located
in certain positions.

VI Properties
The tests in the following list analyze the overall setup of a VI.
• Broken VI—Checks for broken VIs.
• Driver Usage—Checks for subVIs, functions, or Property Nodes that
are part of National Instruments driver software packages.
• Platform Portability—Checks for potential problems that might occur
when you attempt to port a VI from one operating system to another.
• Removed Diagram—Checks whether the block diagram is present. Do
not remove a block diagram from a VI because you cannot recover it.
You can password protect a VI if you do not want users to view the block
diagram.
• Toolkit Usage—Checks whether subVIs are National Instrument
toolkit VIs. When you distribute a VI that includes toolkit VIs as subVIs,
each computer that runs the VI must have the toolkit VIs installed or the
VI does not run correctly.
• VI Lock State—Checks the lock state of a VI. The test fails if the lock
state matches the user-specified lock state(s).

Exercise 8-2 Identify VI Issues with VI Analyzer (Optional)

Goal
Learn how to use the VI Analyzer to interactively test the style of a VI.
Scenario
Before deploying an application, it is important to verify that the code is
scalable, readable, and maintainable. Using the VI Analyzer can automate
this verification process.
Design
Run the VI Analyzer on the TLC Main VI.
Implementation
2. Select Tools»VI Analyzer»Analyze VIs.
3. Select the Analyze the VI you are currently editing option. Click
Next.
4. Configure options for the tests. Click Analyze. Review your results.
Click Done when you are finished. Click Yes to restart the Analyzer or
click No to close the Analyzer.
5. Identify style issues that are of a concern in the application with the
VI Analyzer.
End of Exercise 8-2

D. Identifying Performance Problems

Software performance and execution tends to follow the 80/20 rule. This
rule states that 80% of the execution time is spent in 20% of the code. Thus,
there is little benefit to optimizing code that is not part of the 20% of code
that performs 80% of the work. However, it is not easy to predict which
sections of code make up that 20%. Therefore, it is important to use a
profiling tool to help identify the 20% of the code where most of the
execution time occurs.
VI Performance Profiling
Use the VI Profile Window to identify the location of performance problems
in the VI. The Profile Performance and Memory window is a powerful
tool for determining where your application is spending its time and how it
is using memory. The Profile Performance and Memory window has an
interactive tabular display of time and memory usage for each VI in your
system. Each row of the table contains information for a specific VI. The
time spent by each VI is divided into several categories and summarized.
The Profile Performance and Memory window calculates the minimum,
maximum, and average time spent per run of a VI.
You can use the interactive tabular display to view all or part of this
information, sort it by different categories, and look at the performance
data of subVIs when called from a specific VI. Select Tools»Advanced»
Profile VIs to display the Profile window.
The collection of memory usage information is optional because the

collection process can add a significant amount of overhead to the running
time of your VIs. You must choose whether to collect this data before
starting the Profile Performance and Memory window by checking the
Profile memory usage checkbox appropriately. This checkbox cannot be
changed once a profiling session is in progress.
Refer to the Using the VI Profile Window to Monitor VI Performance topic

in the LabVIEW Help for more information using the VI Profile Window.

E. Fixing Performance Problems

Memory and speed of execution are the most common performance issues.
This section describes techniques and suggestions for addressing these
issues.
Memory
In text-based programming languages, memory allocation, reallocation, and
deallocation cause many bugs and performance bottlenecks. In text-based
languages, you must allocate memory before you use it and deallocate
memory when you finish using it. Bounds checking does not occur when
you write to this memory, so you have to create your own tests to make sure
you do not corrupt memory.
The dataflow paradigm for LabVIEW removes much of the difficulty of

managing memory. In LabVIEW, you do not allocate variables, nor assign
values to and from them. Instead, you create a block diagram with
connections representing the transition of data.
Memory allocation still occurs, but it is not explicit on the block diagram.
This allows you to focus on developing the code to solve a problem rather
than allocating and deallocating memory. But, it is important to understand
how LabVIEW handles memory. Memory reallocation buffers and coercion
can affect memory in LabVIEW.
Memory Reallocation Buffers

LabVIEW tries to minimize the reallocation of memory. Reallocating
memory is an expensive operation because it involves allocating a larger
memory location and moving the contents from the previously allocated
memory to the new location. You can often fix memory issues by reducing
or preventing situations where LabVIEW must reallocate memory.
Consider the block diagram shown in Figure 8-1, which is used to create an
array of data. This block diagram creates an array in a loop by constantly
calling Build Array to concatenate a new element. The input array is reused
by Build Array. The VI continually resizes the buffer in each iteration to
make room for the new array and appends the new element. The resulting
execution speed is slow, especially if the loop is executed many times.
Note When you manipulate arrays, clusters, waveforms, and variants, you can use the
In Place Element structure to improve memory usage in VIs.

Figure 8-1. Creating an Array
If you want to add a value to the array with every iteration of the loop, you
can see the best performance by using auto-indexing on the edge of a loop.
With For Loops, the VI can predetermine the size of the array (based on the
value wired to N), and resize the buffer only once.
Figure 8-2. Creating an Array with Indexing in a For Loop
With While Loops, auto-indexing is not quite as efficient, because the end
size of the array is not known. However, While Loop auto-indexing avoids
resizing the output array with every iteration by increasing the output array
size in large increments. When the loop is finished, the output array is
resized to the correct size. The performance of While Loop auto-indexing is
nearly identical to For Loop auto-indexing.

Figure 8-3. Creating an Array with Indexing in a While Loop
Auto-indexing assumes you are going to add a value to the resulting array
with each iteration of the loop. If you must conditionally add values to an
array but can determine an upper limit on the array size, you might consider
preallocating the array and using Replace Array Subset to fill the array.
When you finish filling the array values, you can resize the array to the
correct size. The array is created only once, and Replace Array Subset can
reuse the input buffer for the output buffer. The performance of this is very
similar to the performance of loops using auto-indexing. If you use this
technique, be careful the array in which you are replacing values is large
enough to hold the resulting data, because Replace Array Subset does not
resize arrays for you.

An example of this process is shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4. Preallocating the Array
Using the technique shown in Figure 8-4 avoids an expensive memory

reallocation. The Replace Array Subset function operates efficiently
because it replaces the values in an array that has been preallocated. The best
way to prevent a memory reallocation is to know how many elements an
array needs to contain and allocate sufficient memory.

Coercion
Minor changes in data types can dramatically affect memory allocation for
a VI. The VI in Figure 8-5 allocates a memory buffer for the output tunnel
on the For Loop and for the array indicator. In total, the VI allocates 160 KB
to store the array.
Figure 8-5. VI without Coercion
The small modification of coercing the numeric value from a

double-precision to an extended-precision value causes the memory
allocation to increase to 340 KB, as shown in Figure 8-6.
Note The number of bytes for extended-precision values varies for each platform.
Figure 8-6. VI with Coercion
You can coerce values in a VI, but the effects of coercion on memory can be
extreme. To improve memory use of a VI, minimize coercion, or eliminate
coercion entirely.

VI Execution Speed
Although LabVIEW compiles VIs and produces code that generally
executes very quickly, you want to obtain the best performance possible
when working on time-critical VIs. This section discusses factors that affect
execution speed and suggests some programming techniques to help you
obtain the best performance possible.
Examine the following items to determine the causes of slow performance:

• Input/Output (files, GPIB, data acquisition, networking)
• Screen Display (large controls, overlapping controls, too many displays)
• Memory Management (inefficient usage of arrays and strings,
inefficient data structures)
Other factors, such as execution overhead and subVI call overhead, usually
have minimal effects on execution speed.
Input/Output
Input/Output (I/O) calls generally incur a large amount of overhead. They
often take much more time than a computational operation. For example, a
simple serial port read operation might have an associated overhead of
several milliseconds. This overhead occurs in any application that uses
serial ports because an I/O call involves transferring information through
several layers of an operating system.
The best way to address too much overhead is to minimize the number of
I/O calls you make. Performance improves if you can structure the VI so that
you transfer a large amount of data with each call, instead of making
multiple I/O calls that transfer smaller amounts of data.
Screen Display
Frequently updating controls on a front panel can be one of the most
time-consuming operations in an application. This is especially true if you
use some of the more complicated displays, such as graphs and charts.
Although most indicators do not redraw when they receive new data that is
the same as the old data, graphs and charts always redraw. If redraw rate
becomes a problem, the best solutions are to reduce the number of front
panel objects and keep the front panel displays as simple as possible. In the
case of graphs and charts, you can turn off autoscaling, scale markers,
anti-aliased line drawing, and grids to speed up displays.
As with other kinds of I/O, there is a certain amount of fixed overhead in the
display of a control. You can pass multiple points to an indicator at one time
using certain controls, such as charts. You can minimize the number of chart
updates you make by passing more data to the chart each time. You can see
much higher data display rates if you collect your chart data into arrays to
display multiple points at a time, instead of displaying each point as it comes in.

When you design subVIs whose front panels are closed during execution, do
not be concerned about display overhead. If the front panel is closed, you do
not have the drawing overhead for controls, so graphs are no more expensive
than arrays.
In multithreaded systems, you can use the Advanced»Synchronous

Display shortcut menu item to set whether to defer updates for controls and
indicators. By default, controls and indicators use asynchronous displays,
which means that after the execution system passes data to front panel
controls and indicators, it can immediately continue execution. At some
point thereafter, the user interface system notices that the control or
indicator needs to be updated, and it redraws to show the new data. If the
execution system attempts to update the control multiple times in rapid
succession, you might not see some of the intervening updates.
In most applications, asynchronous displays significantly speed up

execution without affecting what the user sees. For example, you can update
a Boolean value hundreds of times in a second, which is more updates than
the human eye can discern. Asynchronous displays permit the execution
system to spend more time executing VIs, with updates automatically
reduced to a slower rate by the user interface thread.
If you want synchronous displays, right-click the control or indicator and

select Advanced»Synchronous Display from the shortcut menu to place a
checkmark next to the menu item.
Note Turn on synchronous display only when it is necessary to display every data value.
Using synchronous display results in a large performance penalty on multithreaded
systems.
You also can use the Defer Panel Updates property to defer all new requests
for front panel updates.
Defer Panel Updates Property

Typically, you use Property Nodes in VIs to change the appearance of the
front panel. You might use several Property Nodes chained together. When
using multiple Property Nodes, it is good practice to also use the Defer Panel
Updates property, as shown in Figure 8-7. When you set this property to
TRUE, LabVIEW redraws any front panel objects with pending changes
then defers all new requests for front panel updates. For example, controls
and indicators do not redraw when their properties or values change. If the
operating system requests a redraw, such as if the window is no longer
behind another window, LabVIEW redraws the front panel with the current
properties instead of the original properties. If you set this property to
FALSE, LabVIEW immediately redraws the changed elements of the front
panel.

Figure 8-7. Defer Panel Updates Property
Reentrant Execution and SubVI Memory Use

Another setting you should remember when you are concerned with
memory use in a subVI is the Reentrant Execution option on the
Execution page of the VI Properties window. By default, VIs are not
reentrant and the execution system will not run multiple calls to the same
subVI simultaneously. If you try to call a subVI that is not reentrant from
more than one place, one call runs and the other call waits for the first to
finish before running. In reentrant execution, calls to multiple instances of a
subVI can execute in parallel with distinct and separate data storage. If the
subVI is reentrant, the second call can start before the first call finishes
running. In a reentrant VI, each instance of the call maintains its own state
of information. Then, the execution system runs the same subVI
simultaneously from multiple places. Reentrant execution is useful in the
following situations:
• When a VI waits for a specified length of time or until a timeout occurs
• When a VI contains data that should not be shared among multiple
instances of the same VI
To make a VI reentrant, select File»VI Properties, select Execution in the

VI Properties dialog box, and place a checkmark in the Reentrant
execution checkbox.
Note (FPGA Module) FPGA VIs are reentrant by default.
When you interactively open a reentrant subVI from the block diagram,
LabVIEW opens a clone of the VI instead of the source VI. The title bar of
the VI contains (clone) to indicate that it is a clone of the source VI.
Note Because you cannot perform source control operations on the clone of a source VI,
LabVIEW dims the source control operation items in the Tools»Source Control menu
of the clone VI.

You can use the front panels of reentrant VIs the same way you can use the
front panels of other VIs. To view the original front panel of a reentrant VI
from a clone of the reentrant VI, select View»Browse Relationships»
Reentrant Original. Each instance of a reentrant VI has a front panel. You
can use the VI Properties dialog box to set a reentrant VI to open the front
panel during execution and optionally reclose it after the reentrant VI runs.
You also can configure an Event structure case to handle events for front
panel objects of a reentrant VI. The front panel of a reentrant VI also can be
a subpanel.
You can use the VI Server to programmatically control the front panel
controls and indicators on a reentrant VI at run time; however, you cannot
edit the controls and indicators at run time. You also can use the VI Server
to create a new reentrant instance of the front panel of a reentrant VI at run
time. To open a new instance of the front panel of a reentrant VI, use the
Open VI Reference function by wiring a strictly typed VI reference to the
type specifier input. Use the Run VI method to prepare a VI for reentrant
run by wiring 0x08 to the options input.
Types of Reentrant Execution

Note (FPGA Module) The LabVIEW FPGA Module does not support these VI types. If
you use a reentrant subVI in an FPGA VI, each instance of the subVI on the block
diagram becomes a separate hardware resource.
LabVIEW supports two types of reentrant VIs. On the Execution page of

the VI Properties dialog box, place a checkmark in the Reentrant
execution checkbox to enable the two reentrant VI options. Select the
Preallocate clone for each instance option if you want to create a clone VI
for each call to the reentrant VI before LabVIEW calls the reentrant VI, or
if a clone VI must preserve state information across calls. For example, if a
reentrant VI contains an uninitialized shift register or a local variable,
property, or method that contains values that must remain for future calls to
the clone VI, select the Preallocate clone for each instance option. Also
select the Preallocate clone for each instance option if the reentrant VI
contains the First Call? function. You also can use this option for VIs that
are to run with low jitter on LabVIEW Real-Time.
Select the Share clones between instances option to reduce the memory
usage associated with preallocating a large amount of clone VIs. Sharing
clone VIs reduces memory usage because LabVIEW does not preallocate a
clone for each call to the reentrant VI. When you select the Share clones
between instances option, LabVIEW does not create the clone VI until a VI
makes a call to the reentrant VI. With this option, LabVIEW creates the
clone VIs on demand, potentially introducing jitter into the execution of the
VI. LabVIEW does not preserve state information across calls to the
reentrant VI. Sharing clone VIs can reduce VI execution speed.

The following table explains the memory usage and execution speed effects
to consider when you select a reentrant VI type.
Reentrant VI Type Memory Usage Execution Speed

Preallocate clone for Creates a clone VI for Execution speed is
each instance each call to the constant.
reentrant VI.
Increases memory
usage.
Share clones between Only allocates clone Creates clone VIs on
instances VIs for the maximum demand. Slightly
number of decreases execution
simultaneous calls to speed and speed may
the reentrant VI. vary per call.
Decreases memory
usage.
The memory monitoring tools in LabVIEW do not report information

on reentrant VIs. You must keep track of which subVIs have this feature
enabled. Reentrant execution is typically used when you are calling a subVI
in different locations at the same time and that subVI is storing data in an
uninitialized shift register between each call. Otherwise, you might not need
to configure subVIs for reentrant execution.

Exercise 8-3 Methods of Updating Indicators

Goal
Investigate the performance of different methods used to update indicators.
Description
There are three primary methods of updating a value on a user interface:
• Wire data directly to an indicator—Fastest and preferred method of
passing data to the user interface.
• Wire data to a local variable—Creating a local variable for the indicator
and wiring data to the local variable is a good method for initializing
data that is in a control.
• Wire data to a Value Property Node of the indicator—Use this method
when you update the control or indicator through a control reference.
Each of these methods has performance differences. This VI demonstrates

the performance differences of each of these methods.
Implementation
1. Open Methods of Updating Indicators.vi located in the
<Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\Methods of
Updating Indicators directory.
2. Open the block diagram and observe how this VI operates.
3. Run the VI for each of the methods by setting the Method enum, and
running the VI. Observe how long the VI takes to run for each method.
End of Exercise 8-3

Job Aid
Use the following checklist to identify and fix performance issues.
❑ Ensure that the code is correct before trying to improve performance.
❑ Use the Profile window to identify slow parts of the VI.
❑ Minimize memory reallocations.
❑ Minimize coercion dots.
❑ Minimize I/O overhead.
❑ Minimize front panel updates.

Summary – Quiz
1. Which tool is best suited to identifying performance problems?
a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer
2. Which tool is best suited for viewing statistics about VIs?

a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer
3. Which tool is best suited to interactively testing performance and style

issues?
a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer


1. Which tool is best suited to identifying performance problems?
a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer
2. Which tool is best suited for viewing statistics about VIs?

a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer
3. Which tool is best suited to interactively testing performance and style

issues?
a. Profile Window
b. VI Metrics
c. VI Analyzer

Notes

Implementing Documentation
9
This lesson describes techniques to implement documentation for the VI.
It is important to provide meaningful documentation to support the users of
the VI and other developers who might inherit the VI. You learn ideas for
creating documentation standards for your own organization.
Topics
A. Designing Documentation
B. Developing User Documentation
C. Creating Help Files
D. Describing VIs, Controls, and Indicators

Lesson 9 Implementing Documentation
A. Designing Documentation
The quality goals of the project determine the format and detail level of the
documentation you develop for requirements, specifications, and other
design-related documentation. If the project must meet a quality standard
such as the ISO 9000, the format and detail level of the documentation is
different from the format and detail level of an internal project.
Several third-party resources contain more information about the types of

documents to prepare as part of the development process.
LabVIEW includes the following features that simplify the process of

creating documentation for the VIs you design:
• History window—Use this window to record changes to a VI as you
make them.
• Print dialog box—Use this dialog box to create printouts of the front
panel, block diagram, connector pane, and description of a VI. You also
can use it to print the names and descriptions of controls and indicators
for the VI and the names and paths of any subVIs. You can print this
information, generate text files, or generate HTML or RTF files that you
can use to create compiled help files.
B. Developing User Documentation

Organizing the documentation systematically helps users learn about the
product, VI, or application. Different users have different documentation
needs. End users of VIs fall into the following two classes—end users of
top-level VIs and end users of subVIs. Each of these users has different
documentation needs.
This section addresses techniques for creating and organizing

documentation that helps both of these classes of users. The format
of user documentation depends on the type of product you create.
Systematically Organizing Documentation

To make documentation more helpful for the user, consider organizing the
documentation in a systematic way. Divide the documentation into three
categories—concepts, procedures, and reference material. Create
documentation that reflects these three categories.

Documenting a Library of VIs

If the software you are creating is a library of VIs for use by other
developers, such as an instrument driver or add-on package, create
documents with a format similar to the LabVIEW Help. Because the
audience is other developers, assume the audience has a working knowledge
of LabVIEW. Create documentation that contains an overview of the
contents of the package, examples of how to use the subVIs, and a detailed
description of each subVI.
For each subVI, include information such as the VI name and description, a
picture of the connector pane, and a picture of the data type description for
each control and indicator on the connector pane.
To generate most of the documentation for VIs and controls, select File»VI
Properties and select Documentation from the Category pull-down menu.
Select File»Print to print VI documentation in a format almost identical to

the format used in the VI and function reference information in the
LabVIEW Help. Use the Print dialog box to save the documentation to a file
and to create documentation for multiple VIs at once.
Documenting an Application
If you are developing an application for users who are unfamiliar with
LabVIEW, the documentation requires more introductory material. Create a
document that provides system requirements, basic installation instructions,
and an overview about how the package works. If the package uses I/O,
include hardware requirements and any configuration instructions the user
must complete before using the application.
For each front panel with which the user interacts, provide a picture of the
front panel and a description of the major controls and indicators. Organize
the front panel descriptions in a top-down fashion, with the front panel the
user sees first documented first. You also can use the Print dialog box to
create this documentation.
Documenting a Design Pattern

When you implement a scalable architecture, always consider what
scalability issues could arise. After you implement an architecture for an
application, it is difficult to change the fundamental architecture. Choose
good programming techniques to implement the scalable architecture
because it is inevitable that you or another developer will need to change or
modify the VI in the future. Applications and their uses evolve. To ensure
that your chosen architecture does not need to be completely re-architected
or re-written when you make changes, create proper documentation on the
functionality of the architecture.

Place a diagram or description of the chosen architecture on the block

diagram to illustrate its functionality and increase the readability of the
design pattern. For example, embed an image of the state machine diagram
inside the block diagram of a state machine design pattern to improve the
readability of the VI, as shown in Figure 9-1.
Start
User
Configure Interface
System
Error
Configuration
Error? Handler
Error?
Configure Error?
Hardware
Error?
Acquire
Data
Hardware Save File Read

Analyzer
Component Data Handler Data
Figure 9-1. Embedding State Diagram into Block Diagram
Commenting the design pattern also is extremely important. Comments

should always indicate the reason you chose a particular design pattern.
Documenting the Development History

Use the History window to display the development history of a VI,
including revision numbers. As you make changes to the VI, record and
track them in the History window. Select Edit»VI Revision History to
display the History window. You also can print the revision history or save
it to an HTML, RTF, or text file.
You can set options for, add comments to, view, and reset the revision
history.
Revision Numbers
The revision number is an easy way to track changes to a VI. The revision
number starts at zero and increases incrementally every time you save the
VI. To display the current revision number in the title bar of the VI and the
title bar of the History window, select Tools»Options, select Revision
History from the Category list, and place a checkmark in the Show
revision number in titlebar checkbox.
The number LabVIEW displays in the History window is the next revision
number, which is the current revision number plus one. When you add a
comment to the history, the header of the comment includes the next
revision number. The revision number does not increase when you save a VI
if you change only the history.

Revision numbers are independent of comments in the History window.

Gaps in revision numbers between comments indicate that you saved the VI
without a comment.
Because the history is strictly a development tool, LabVIEW automatically

removes the history when you remove the block diagram of a VI. The
History window is not available in the run-time version of a VI. The
General page of the VI Properties dialog box displays the revision number,
even for VIs without block diagrams. Click the Reset button in the History
window to erase the revision history and reset the revision number to zero.
C. Describing VIs, Controls, and Indicators

Integrate information for the user in each VI you create by using the VI
description feature, by adding instructions to the front panel, and by
including descriptions for each control and indicator.
Creating VI Descriptions
Create and edit VI descriptions by selecting File»VI Properties and
selecting Documentation from the Category pull-down menu. The VI
description is often the only source of information about a VI available to
the user. The VI description appears in the Context Help window when you
move the cursor over the VI icon and in any VI documentation you generate.
Include the following items in a VI description:

• An overview of the VI
• Instructions for using the VI
• Descriptions of the inputs and outputs
You also can link from the VI to an HTML file or compiled help file.
Documenting Front Panels

One way of providing important instructions is to add a block of text to the
front panel. A list of important steps is valuable. Include instructions such
as, “Select File»VI Properties for instructions” or “Select Help»Show
Context Help.” For long instructions, use a scrolling string control instead
of a free label. When you finish entering the text, right-click the control and
select Data Operations»Make Current Value Default from the shortcut
menu to save the text.
If a text block takes up too much space on the front panel, add a Help button
to the front panel instead. Include the instruction string in the help window
that appears when the user clicks the Help button. Use the Window
Appearance page in the VI Properties dialog box to configure this help

window as either a dialog box that requires the user to click an OK button
to close it and continue, or as a window the user can move anywhere and
close anytime.
You also can use a Help button to open an entry in an online help file. Use
the Help functions to open the Context Help window or to open a help file
and link to a specific topic.
Creating Control and Indicator Descriptions

Include a description for every control and indicator. To create, edit, and
view object descriptions, right-click the object and select Description and
Tip from the shortcut menu. The object description appears in the Context
Help window when you move the cursor over the object and in any VI
documentation you generate.
Unless every object has a description, the user looking at a new VI has no
choice but to guess the function of each control and indicator. Remember to
enter a description when you create the object.
Note If you copy the object to another VI, you also copy the description. You might need
to change the description for the new object.
Every control and indicator needs a description that includes the following
information:
• Functionality
• Data type
• Valid range (for inputs)
• Default value (for inputs)—You also can list the default value in
parentheses as part of the control or indicator name.
• Behavior for special values (0, empty array, empty string, and so on)
• Additional information, such as if the user must set this value always,
often, or rarely
Designate which inputs and outputs are required, recommended, and

optional to prevent users from forgetting to wire subVI connections. To
indicate the required, recommended, and optional inputs and outputs,
right-click the connector pane, select This Connection Is from the shortcut
menu, and select Required, Recommended, or Optional.
Note For dynamic dispatch member VIs, you can select Dynamic Dispatch Input
(Required) or Dynamic Dispatch Output (Recommended).

Exercise 9-1 Document User Interface

Goal
Document the user interface.
Scenario
Document the user interface. You must document the front panel of every
VI that you create.
Design
Document the TLC Main VI. Documentation needs to include a VI
description, and each control and indicator needs a meaningful description
and tip.
Implementation
2. Select File»VI Properties and select Documentation from the

Category list. Insert the following documentation in the VI description
section:
❑ Enter an overview of the VI.
❑ Enter instructions about how to use the VI.
❑ Click the OK button to close the Documentation page.
3. Include a description for every control and indicator. Right-click the

object and select Description and Tip from the shortcut menu to create,
edit, and view object descriptions. The object descriptions appear in the
Context Help window when you move the cursor over the object and in
any VI documentation you create.
Every control and indicator needs a description that includes the

following information:
❑ Functionality
❑ Data type
❑ Valid range (for inputs)

❑ Default value (for inputs)
You also can list the default value in parentheses as part of the
control or indicator label.
❑ Behavior for special values (0, empty array, empty string, and so on)
4. Save the VI.
End of Exercise 9-1

D. Creating Help Files

If you have the right development tools, create online help or reference
documents.
Use the Print dialog box to help you create the source material for the help
documents.
After creating the source documents, use a help compiler to create the help
document. If you need help files on multiple platforms, use a help compiler
for the specific platform for which you want to generate help files.
You also can link to the help files directly from a VI.
Link VIs to the Help menu using the Documentation page of the VI
Properties dialog box. You also can use the Help functions to link to topics
in specific help files programmatically.

Exercise 9-2 Implement Documentation

Goal
Use features in LabVIEW to create professional documentation for the
application.
Scenario
Documentation is an important part of developing applications that are
scalable, readable, and maintainable. Also, the end user of the application
requires documentation in order to use the system. LabVIEW assists in
developing documentation. LabVIEW can automatically generate HTML,
or RTF documents that document the functionality of the application. After
LabVIEW generates the documentation, the developer can edit and expand
on the documentation for other developers who maintain the application,
and for the end user.
Design
Use the Print dialog box to generate an HTML document that you can link
to the VI Properties of the TLC Main VI.
Implementation
2. Select File»Print and select TLC Main.vi. Click Next.
3. Click Next in the Print dialog box.
4. Select Complete for the VI Documentation Style and click Next.
5. Select HTML file in the Destination section and click Next.
6. Click Save on the HTML page.
7. Save the documentation as TLC Main.htm in the <Exercises>\

LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course Project\Documentation
directory.
8. Select File»VI Properties and select Documentation from the

Category list.
9. Enter <Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course

Project\Documentation\TLC Main.htm in the Help Path
textbox and click OK. This loads the help HTML file if the user selects
Detailed Help from the Context Help window.

Testing
1. Open the Context Help window.
2. Idle your mouse over the icon/connector pane of the TLC Main VI.
3. Click the Detailed help link in the Context Help window to load the
documentation for the application.
End of Exercise 9-2

Summary – Quiz
1. Which type of information should be included in descriptions of
controls and indicators?
a. Functionality
b. Data type
c. Valid range
d. Default value
e. All of the above
2. Which type of information should NOT be included in a VI description?

a. Overview of the VI
b. Name of the developer
c. Instructions for using the VI
d. Descriptions of inputs and outputs


1. Which type of information should be included in descriptions of
controls and indicators?
a. Functionality
b. Data type
c. Valid range
d. Default value
e. All of the above
2. Which type of information should NOT be included in a VI description?

a. Overview of the VI
b. Name of the developer
c. Instructions for using the VI
d. Descriptions of inputs and outputs

Notes

Deploying the Application
10
This lesson describes techniques to improve the process of building
a stand-alone LabVIEW application. This lesson provides a further
exploration of the concepts covered in the LabVIEW Basics II: Development
course on creating stand-alone applications. The focus of this lesson is to
improve stand-alone applications, create professional applications, and
provide a professional interface for deploying the application to other
computers.
Topics
A. Implementing Code for Stand-Alone Applications
B. Building a Stand-Alone Application
C. Building an Installer

Lesson 10 Deploying the Application
A. Implementing Code for Stand-Alone Applications

When you build a stand-alone LabVIEW application, there are several
issues that you should consider to improve the experience of the user with
the application. Because the LabVIEW development environment handles
many of the resources used by VIs, stand-alone applications have the
following differences from VIs that you run in the development
environment:
• Paths used by stand-alone applications can change.
• The behavior of stand-alone applications is similar to standard
applications that the user launches directly from the operating system.
• Users of stand-alone applications need not recognize that the
applications are LabVIEW VIs.
With these differences in mind, this section describes techniques you can
use when you create stand-alone applications to improve the application and
and conform to licensing requirements.
Relative File Path Handling

Some VIs store temporary files or load support files while the VI executes.
These types of VIs should use relative file paths that are independent of
where the VI resides. Using relative file paths instead of absolute file paths
prevents problems that could arise if a VI attempts to locate files and the
application was installed in a different directory structure than the one
where the VI was developed.
The Current VI’s Path function returns the path to the file of the current VI.
If the VI never has been saved, this function returns <Not A Path>. This
function always returns the current location of the VI. If you move the VI,
the value returned changes. If you build the VI into an application, this
function returns the path to the VI in the application file and treats the
application file as a VI library. Figure 10-1 shows the output of the
Current VI’s Path function for each of the different locations where a
VI can reside.
1 Single VI 2 VI in a Library 3 VI in an Application
Figure 10-1. How Current VI’s Path Returns VI Location

If a VI uses the Current VI’s Path function, make sure the function works as
expected in the application or shared library. In an application or shared
library, the Current VI’s Path function returns the path to the VI in the
application file and treats the application file as an LLB. For example, if you
build foo.vi into an application, the function returns a path of
C:\..\Application.exe\foo.vi, where C:\..\Application.exe
represents the path to the application and its filename.
You must build code that has a relative file path independent of where the
VI resides so that LabVIEW can access the necessary support and data files.
One method to do this is to use the VI Server to return information about the
properties of the LabVIEW application as shown in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2. Relative File Path VI
In Figure 10-2, VI Server determines the type of environment the VI is

running in—as a stand-alone application or in the LabVIEW development
environment. The Property Node returns the system type as an enumerated
type. The Strip Path function strips the output of Current VI’s Path function
by removing all the path information after the last backslash (\). Then the
stripped path is placed into the Case structure where it is processed further.
If the VI is running in the Run-Time Engine, which is necessary to execute
LabVIEW-built applications and shared libraries, the name of the
application is stripped. The stripped path is passed to the Build Path
function, which appends a name (or relative path) to the existing path. If the
VI is running in the development environment, there is no need to strip the
path. Using relative file paths gives you more flexibility for deploying the
application on other computers.
About Dialog Box

Most applications have an About dialog box that displays information about
the application and the user or company that designed it. You can create a VI
that LabVIEW runs when a user selects Help»About to display information
about the stand-alone application you create. After the VI runs, LabVIEW
closes the dialog box.

You can have only one About VI per application. If you do not supply an
About VI, LabVIEW displays a default dialog box similar to the dialog box
that appears in the LabVIEW development system when you select Help»
About.
Complete the following steps to create an About VI and include it in a

stand-alone application.
1. Build a VI with a front panel that contains the information you want to
display in the About dialog box, such as the version number, company
name, and copyright information. The About VI you create can share
subVIs with other VIs you include in the application. However, you
cannot use the About VI as a subVI because the About VI cannot run
while other VIs in the application run.
Note The front panel window must include a National Instruments copyright notice.
Refer to the National Instruments Software License Agreement located on the LabVIEW
DVD or CD for more information about the requirements for any About dialog box you
create for a LabVIEW application.
2. Build the block diagram of the About VI. For example, if you want the
About dialog box to appear until the user clicks a button, use a While
Loop on the block diagram.
3. Save the VI. The name of the VI must start with About.
4. Add the VI to the project from which you are building the application.
5. When you configure the application build settings, add the About VI to
the Always Included list on the Source Files page of the Application
Properties dialog box.
6. From the Source File Settings page, select the About VI in the Project
Files tree. In the Use default save settings section, make sure a
checkmark does not appear in the Remove front panel checkbox and
that the destination is the application.
7. Configure the remaining application build settings and build the
application.
Figure 10-3 shows an example of an About dialog box that would satisfy the
National Instruments Software License Agreement.
Figure 10-3. About Dialog Box

Figure 10-4 shows one method for implementing an About VI. The block
diagram uses an Event structure with one event case set to capture the
Mouse Down event. When the user clicks the About dialog box with the
mouse, the VI stops and closes.
Figure 10-4. About VI Block Diagram
Caveats and Recommendations for Build Specifications and Builds

consider when you prepare files for build specifications and distribute
builds.
Preparing Files for Build Specifications

• Save changes to VIs in memory before you create or edit a build
specification to ensure that the preview is accurate.
• Make sure that the settings in the VI Properties dialog box are correct.
For example, you might want to configure a VI to hide scroll bars, or you
might want to hide the buttons on the toolbar.
• Files with the same name cannot go to the same destination. If you have two
files with the same name, even if they belong to different libraries including
LabVIEW classes, consider renaming these files on the Source File Settings
page when you configure the build. If you don’t rename the files,
Application Builder moves the files to different folders for you to avoid a file
name collision. Any renaming of files might necessitate updating code that
references the renamed files by path or by name.
• (Windows) If a VI includes a MathScript Node, remove any unsupported
MathScript functions from your scripts.
• (Windows) If a VI includes a MathScript Node that calls functions from the
libraries class, add the DLL and the header file to the project before you
create or edit a build specification. Also make sure that the paths to these
files are correct in the application. For example, if you build header.h into
an application, its path is C:\..\Application.exe\..\
header.h, where C:\..\Application.exe represents the path to
the application and its filename. Resolve all conflicts before you create a
build specification. The Application Builder does not allow building an
application if the LabVIEW project contains conflicts.

Configuring Build Specifications

• If a VI loads other VIs dynamically using the VI Server or references a
dynamically loaded VI through Call By Reference Nodes, you must add
those VIs to the Always Included listbox on the Source Files page of
the Application, Shared Library, or Source Distribution Properties
dialog box.
• If a VI loads other VIs dynamically using the VI Server or references a
dynamically loaded VI through Call By Reference Nodes, make sure the
application or shared library creates the paths for the VIs correctly.
When you include the dynamically loaded VIs in the application or
shared library, the paths to the VIs change. For example, if you build
foo.vi into an application, its path is C:\..\Application.exe\
foo.vi, where C:\..\Application.exe represents the path to the
application and its filename.
• If a VI uses the Current VI's Path function, make sure the function works
as expected in the application or shared library. In an application or
shared library, the Current VI's Path function returns the path to the VI
in the application file and treats the application file as an LLB. For
example, if you build foo.vi into an application, the function returns a
path of C:\..\Application.exe\foo.vi, where C:\..\
Application.exe represents the path to the application and its
filename.
• If you place a checkmark in the Use the default LabVIEW
Configuration file checkbox on the Advanced page of the Application
Properties dialog box, an error might occur if a user is running the
LabVIEW Web Server and tries to run the application at the same time
because they share the same port.
• (Windows) If a VI includes a MathScript Node that calls functions from
the libraries class, add the DLL and the header file to the Always
Included listbox on the Source Files page of the Application
Properties dialog box.
Distributing Builds
• Consider creating an About dialog box to display general information
about an application.
• Consider distributing a configuration file, also called a preference file,
that contains LabVIEW work environment settings with an application,
such as the labview.ini file on Windows.
• Consider distributing documentation with an application or shared
library so users have the information they need to use the application or
shared library.

Note Do not distribute the LabVIEW product documentation. The LabVIEW product
documentation is copyrighted material.
Considerations for the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine

• The LabVIEW Run-Time Engine must be installed on any computer on
which users run the application or shared library. You can distribute the
LabVIEW Run-Time Engine with the application or shared library.
(Windows) You also can include the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine in an
installer. You must log on as an Administrator or a user with
administrator privileges to run an installer you build using the
Application Builder.
• Some VI Server properties and methods are not supported in the
LabVIEW Run-Time Engine. Avoid using these properties and methods
in the VIs you include in an application or shared library.
• Incorporate error handling into the VIs of the application because
LabVIEW does not display automatic error handling dialog boxes in the
LabVIEW Run-Time Engine.
• If the VI uses custom run-time menus, make sure the application menu
items that the VI uses are available in the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine.
• When you close all front panels in an application, the application stops.
If the VI you build into the application contains code that executes after
the last front panel closes, this code does not execute in the application.
Avoid writing block diagram code that executes after the last front panel
closes.
• If you reference a VI in an application using the Call By Reference
Node, if a VI uses Property Nodes to set front panel properties, or if a
front panel window appears to users, remove the checkmark in the
Remove front panel checkbox for that VI from the Use default save
settings section on the Source File Settings page of the Application
Properties dialog box. If you remove the front panel window, the Call By
Reference Node or Property Nodes that refer to the front panel window
will return errors that might affect the behavior of the application.

Exercise 10-1 Implementing Code for Stand-Alone

Applications
Goal
Create an About dialog box that you can use in your own applications.
Scenario
Most applications have an About dialog box that displays general
information about the application and the user or company that designed it.
You can create a VI that LabVIEW runs when a user selects Help»About to
display information about the stand-alone application you create.
When creating a stand-alone application, it is important to understand the

architecture of the Application Builder. A VI that is running as a stand-alone
executable remains in memory when the application finishes running. It is
necessary to call the Quit LabVIEW function in order to close the
application when the application finishes executing. Placing the Exit
LabVIEW function on the block diagram can make editing the application
more difficult in the future because LabVIEW exits each time the
application finishes. With the use of the Conditional Disable Structure, you
can specify if code should execute or not, without having to edit the block
diagram.
Stand-alone applications in LabVIEW should have the Window Appearance

set to Top-level application to cause the front panel to open when the VI
runs.
Design
1. Implement a dialog box VI that uses an Event structure to create an
About dialog box.
• Create a dialog box VI that allows the user to click the mouse
anywhere on the VI panel to close the VI.
• Modify the run-time menu to allow the user to select Help»About

to open the About dialog box.
2. Place a Conditional Disable Structure around the Quit LabVIEW
function and modify the Project to configure the condition.
3. Modify the VI Properties of the VI to prepare for building a stand-alone
application for the VI.

Implementation
About Dialog Box
1. Create a dialog box VI that allows the user to click the mouse button
anywhere on the VI panel to close the VI.
❑ Create a new VI.
❑ Select File»VI Properties and set the Window Appearance of the

VI to Dialog. Click OK.
2. Create a front panel for the VI.
❑ Place any free text or images you want on the front panel.
❑ Place error clusters on the front panel.
3. Switch to the block diagram and build the code that allows the user to
click the mouse button anywhere on the VI, as shown in Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5. About VI Block Diagram
❑ Place an Event structure on the block diagram and create an Event

case for the Mouse Down event for the <Pane> event source.
❑ Wire the error clusters through the Event structure on the block
diagram.
4. Save the VI as About.vi in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Modules\About directory.
5. Open the TLC Project. Add an About folder below the Modules folder
in the Project Explorer window. Place the About.vi in the About
folder in the Project Explorer window. Close the VI.
6. Open and modify the TLC Main VI so that the Run-Time Menu contains
Help»About LabVIEW. This displays the About dialog box in the
stand-alone application when the user selects Help»About. Figure 10-6
shows the completed Run-Time Menu Editor.

Figure 10-6. Run-Time Menu Editor
❑ Open the TLC Main VI. Open the Menu Editor by selecting Edit»
Run-Time Menu.
❑ Add the Help menu item by adding a User Item for Help, with the
Item Name set to _Help and the Item Tag set to Help. Use the
down arrow to move to a position beneath all the other entries, as
shown in Figure 10-6. Be sure to place the entry in line with File.
❑ Add the About LabVIEW item by selecting Edit»Insert

Application Item»Help»About LabVIEW.
7. Save the Run-Time Menu and exit the Menu Editor.
Quit LabVIEW Function

Use the Quit LabVIEW function to cause LabVIEW to finish executing
when the application completes. You can use a Conditional Disable
Structure to prevent the Quit LabVIEW function from executing based upon
a conditional disable symbol whose value is set in the Project Explorer
window. Implement this functionality as shown in Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7. Conditional Disable Structure Enclosing the Quit LabVIEW Function

1. Right-click TLC.lvproj in the Project Explorer window and select

Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Select Conditional Disable Symbols from the Category list, add a new
symbol with the Symbol name DEPLOY and the Value TRUE. Click Add
and click OK.
3. Modify the TLC Main VI by placing the Quit LabVIEW function on the
block diagram. The Quit LabVIEW function must be the last function
that executes with the application as shown in Figure 10-7.
4. Place a Conditional Disable Structure around the Quit LabVIEW

function and wire the error cluster to the border of the Conditional
Disable Structure.
5. Right-click the border of the Conditional Disable Structure and select

Edit Condition For This Subdiagram from the shortcut menu.
6. Select Deploy for the Symbol.
7. Enter TRUE for the Value.
8. Remove the checkmark from the Make Default? checkbox and click
OK.
9. Right-click the Conditional Disable Structure and select Add

Subdiagram After from the shortcut menu.
10. Select Deploy for the Symbol.
11. Enter FALSE for the Value.
12. Place a checkmark in the Make Default? checkbox and click OK.
LabVIEW only executes the Quit LabVIEW function if the Project

DEPLOY Conditional Symbol is set to TRUE. In this way, you can
control block diagram execution from the Project Explorer window
without actually modifying the block diagram.
Window Appearance
1. Select File»VI Properties and select Window Appearance from the
Category list.
2. Select Top-level application window and click OK.
3. Save the TLC Main VI.
End of Exercise 10-1

B. Building a Stand-Alone Application

You can use the Application Builder tools to create a build specification for
and build a stand-alone application (EXE). Before you create a build
specification or start the build process, review the Caveats and
Recommendations for Build Specifications and Builds section of this lesson.
Note The LabVIEW Professional Development System includes the Application

Builder. If you use the LabVIEW Base Package or Full Development System, you can
purchase the Application Builder separately by visiting ni.com.
Preparing VIs for Build Specifications

Complete the following steps to prepare VIs you want to use to build a
source distribution, or if you are using the Application Builder, to build a
stand-alone application or shared library or to convert a .bld file from a
previous version of LabVIEW.
1. Open the top-level VIs you want to use in the build, and open any VIs
you want to load dynamically using the VI Server or Call By Reference
Nodes.
2. From an open VI, press the <Ctrl-Shift> keys while you click the Run
button to recompile all VIs in memory.
3. Select File»Save All to save all VIs in memory, then close the VIs. You
also can select File»Save All (this Project) to only save VIs in the
current project.
Creating Build Specifications for Stand-Alone Applications

Use Build Specifications in the Project Explorer window to create build
specifications for source distributions and other types of LabVIEW builds.
A build specification contains all the settings for the build, such as files to
include, directories to create, and settings for VIs.
You must create build specifications in the Project Explorer window.

Expand My Computer, right-click Build Specifications, select New and
the type of build you want to configure from the shortcut menu. Use the
pages in the Source Distribution Properties, Application Properties,
Shared Library Properties, (Windows) Installer Properties, or Zip File
Properties dialog boxes to configure settings for the build specification.
After you define these settings, click the OK button to close the dialog box
and update the build specification in the project. The build specification
appears under Build Specifications. Right-click a specification and select
Build from the shortcut menu to complete the build. You also can select
Build All from the shortcut menu to build all specifications under Build
Specifications. If you rebuild a given specification, LabVIEW overwrites
the existing files from the previous build that are part of the current build.

Note You can duplicate build specifications in the Project Explorer window.
Right-click the build specification item you want to duplicate and select Duplicate from
the shortcut menu to create a copy of the Build Specification item. You also can drag and
drop build specification items to rearrange the build order within the same Build
Specification.
Refer to the Build Targets via Command Line VI in the labview\examples\

project\programatically build directory for an example of building
a project build specification from the command line.
Review the caveats and recommendations for applications and shared

libraries and for installers before you create build specifications with the
Application Builder.
Application Builder
You can use the Application Builder to create a build specification for and
build a stand-alone application. You can configure settings for specified VIs
to add passwords, remove block diagrams, or apply other settings. You also
can select different destination directories for VIs without breaking the links
between VIs and subVIs. Before you create a build specification or start the
build process, review the caveats and recommendations for LabVIEW build
specifications.

purchase the Application Builder separately by visiting the National Instruments Web
site.
Complete the following steps to build an application in LabVIEW.

1. Open the LabVIEW project for which you want to build the application.
You must have a project open and saved to configure a build
specification.
2. Prepare the VIs you want to use to build the application. Save changes
to any VIs in memory.
3. Expand My Computer. Right-click Build Specifications and select
New»Application from the shortcut menu to display the Application
Properties dialog box. If you previously hid Build Specifications in the
Project Explorer window, you must display the item again to access it.

4. Complete the following items on the Information page of the

Application Properties dialog box.
a. Enter a name for the build specification in the Build specification
name text box. This name appears under Build Specifications in the
Project Explorer window. The name must be unique among other
build specification names in the project.
b. Enter a name for the application in the Target filename text box.
(Windows) Applications must have a .exe extension.
(Mac OS) Applications must have a .app extension.
c. Enter the location for the built application in the Destination
directory text box. You can use the Browse button to navigate to
and select a location.
5. Complete the following items on the Source Files page.
a. From the Project Files tree, select the VI you want to define as a
startup VI for the application. You also can select multiple files in
the Project Files tree to add several files at one time to the Startup
VIs or Always Included listbox. Startup VIs open and run when a
user launches the application. You must define at least one VI as a
startup VI for the application.
b. Click the Add Item arrow button next to the Startup VIs listbox to
move the selected VIs to the Startup VIs listbox.
c. Click the Add Item arrow button next to the Always Included
listbox to move the selected items to the Always Included listbox.
If you build an application that uses VIs on the Source Control
palette, you must manually add the source control configuration
information to the .ini file for the built application. Add the
SCCConfigData, SCCProviderName, and
SCCProviderLocation tokens to the .ini file for the application
or to a custom .ini file if you are building an installer.
6. From the Destinations page, configure destination settings, add
destination directories for the application, and indicate whether
LabVIEW adds the files to a new project library.
7. From the Source File Settings page, edit destinations and properties for
individual files and folders in the application.
LabVIEW places an item set to Same as caller in the directory of the
caller. If you set an item to Same as caller and two different callers are
in different directories, LabVIEW places the item in the same directory
as the build.
Note If you plan to distribute a stand-alone application that uses shared variables, do not
include the .lvlib file in an LLB or in the executable. Change the Destination of the
.lvlib file to a destination outside the executable or LLB.

8. From the Icon page, select the icon file to associate with the application.
You also can view the icon using the Icon Image pull-down menu.
9. From the Advanced page, configure advanced settings for the
application.
10. From the Additional Exclusions page, configure settings to disconnect
type definitions, remove unused polymorphic VI instances, and remove
unused members of project libraries to reduce the size of the application.
11. From the Version Information page, configure the version number and
other application information.
12. From the Run-Time Languages page, set the language preferences for
the application.
Note The LabVIEW Run-Time Engine must be installed on any computer on which
users run the application or shared library. You can distribute the LabVIEW Run-Time
Engine with the application or shared library. (Windows) You also can include the
LabVIEW Run-Time Engine in an installer.
13. From the Preview page, click the Generate Preview button to review
the generated files for the application.
14. Click the OK button to update the build specification settings in the
project and close the dialog box. The build specification name appears
in the project under Build Specifications. Creating or updating the build
specification does not build the application. You must complete the next
step to build the application.
Note When you update the build specification settings, the settings become part of the
project. However, you must save the project if you want to save the settings.
15. Right-click the application build specification name and select Build
from the shortcut menu. You can find the resulting application in the
directory specified in the Destination path on the Destinations page.
You also can click the Build button in the Application Properties
dialog box to update the build specification and build the application.
You can duplicate build specifications. Right-click the build specification

item you want to duplicate and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu to
create a copy of the build specification item.
If you rebuild a given specification, LabVIEW overwrites the existing files

from the previous build that are part of the current build.
For more information on the application builder and setting its options, refer
to Building a Stand-Alone Application in the LabVIEW Help.

Exercise 10-2 Create a Stand-Alone Application

Goal
Create a build specification and build a stand-alone application (EXE) in
LabVIEW.
Scenario
Creating a stand-alone application is important for distributing and
deploying your application. It is also a step in the creation of a professional
installer.
Design
Use the Application (EXE) Build Specifications to create a stand-alone
application for the Theatre Light Controller.
Implementation
1. Create a stand-alone application of the Theatre Light Controller.
❑ Open the TLC.lvproj.
❑ Right click Build Specifications and select New»Application

(EXE) from the shortcut menu to open the Application Properties
dialog box.
❑ On the Information page, specify a Build specification name and

Target filename.
❑ Set the Destination directory to <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Builds\Executable.
❑ Select the Source Files page and select TLC Main.vi in the
Project Files listbox. Click the right arrow to place the VI in the
Startup VIs listbox.
❑ Select About.vi in the Modules»About folder and click the right

arrow to place the VI in the Always Included listbox.
❑ Select the Icon page and use the Icon Editor to create a 16 color icon
for both the 32 × 32 and 16 × 16 icons. Save the new icon in the
<Exercises>\LabVIEW Intermediate I\Course
Project\Icons directory. Deselect Use the default LabVIEW
Icon file and browse to the .ico file you just created.
❑ Select the Preview page and click the Generate Preview button to
preview the output of the Build Specification.

❑ Select the Advanced page and check Copy error code files to
include the custom error code that you developed.
❑ Click the OK button.
2. Right-click the build specification that you just created and select Build
Testing
Navigate to the directory you specified for the destination directory and run
the executable.

C. Building an Installer
You can use the Application Builder to build an installer for files in a
LabVIEW project or for a stand-alone application you created with a build
specification. Use installers to distribute stand-alone applications, shared
libraries, and source distributions that you create with the Application
Builder. Installers that include the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine are useful if
you want users to be able to run applications or use shared libraries without
installing LabVIEW.
Before you create a build specification or start the build process, review the
Caveats and Recommendations for Building Installers.
Caveats and Recommendations for Building Installers

consider when you build an installer.
• When you select files to include in the installer build from the page of
the Installer Properties dialog box, you cannot select part of a build
specification or a LabVIEW project library. You must include or exclude
a build specification or project library as a whole. The entire
specification or project library appears in the Destination View
directory.
• If you want to include a project library in the installer build, ensure the
project library does not include files on a network or other files with
links that will break if moved. You cannot copy a project library from
the Project View directory to the Destination View directory if any of the
files are on different drives, or if the files do not share a common path
with the LabVIEW project file (.lvproj).
• When you add a National Instruments product installer to the installer
build, you are adding only the components of the installer that you
installed on the computer you are using. When users run the installer you
built, the installer might remove components of the product from the
user computer that are not part of the installer. To minimize the risk of
removing product components on user computers, ensure you have a
complete and up-to-date installation of the product on the computer you
are using, including all optional components, before you add the product
installer to the build.
• You can include custom error codes in the installer. The [LV85RTEDIR]
folder in the Destination View directory corresponds to the Shared\
LabVIEW Run-Time\8.5 directory. If you place a checkmark in the
Install custom error code files? checkbox on the Advanced page, the
installer build includes all error code files from labview\project\
errors and labview\user.lib\errors and installs them in the
Shared\LabVIEW Run-Time\8.5\errors directory.

• Use the [LVDIR] folder in the Destination View directory to add files
to install in the directory of the latest version of LabVIEW that the user
has installed.
• The folders in the Destination View directory that do not have an LV
prefix correspond to Microsoft Installer (MSI) properties that install
files in the following locations.
– [DesktopFolder]—Files you include in this folder install to the
Windows desktop of the current Windows user.
– [PersonalFolder]—Files you include in this folder install to the
personal folder, such as My Documents, of the current Windows
user.
– [ProgramFilesFolder]—Files you include in this folder install
to the Program Files folder.
– [TempFolder]—Files you include in this folder install to the Temp
folder of the current Windows user.
– [WindowsFolder]—Files you include in this folder install to the
Windows folder.
– [SystemFolder]—Files you include in this folder install to the
system32 folder on Windows.
– [WindowsVolume]—Files you include in this folder install to the
root of the drive where Windows is installed, such as C:\.
Refer to the Microsoft Installer documentation on the Microsoft Web site for
more information about using these folders.
Creating Build Specifications for Installers

Expand My Computer. Right-click Build Specifications and select New»
Installer from the shortcut menu to display the Installer Properties dialog
box. Use this dialog box to create or configure settings for an installer.
Configuring Installer Properties

You can use the Application Builder to build an installer for files in a
LabVIEW project or for a stand-alone application, shared library, or source
distribution you created with a build specification. Before you create a build
specification or start the build process, review the caveats and
recommendations for LabVIEW installer builds.

purchase the Application Builder separately by visiting the National Instruments Web
site.

Complete the following steps to build an installer.

1. Open the project you want to use to build the installer. You must have a
project open and saved to configure an installer build specification.
2. Expand My Computer. Right-click Build Specifications and select
New»Installer from the shortcut menu to display the Installer
Properties dialog box. If you previously hid Build Specifications in the
Project Explorer window, you must display the item again to access it.
3. Complete the following items on the Product Information page of the
Installer Properties dialog box.
a. Enter a name for the installer build specification in the Build
specification name text box. This name appears under Build
Specifications in the Project Explorer window. The name must be
unique among other build specification names in the project.
b. Enter a name for the product associated with the installer in the
Product Name text box. This name corresponds to the
[ProductName] Microsoft Installer (MSI) property. Refer to the
Microsoft Web site for more information about Microsoft Installer
(MSI) properties.
c. Enter the location for the installer in the Installer destination text
box. You can use the Browse button to navigate to and select a
location.
d. Enter version, dialog box settings, and company information.
4. From the Source Files page, select the files or builds you want to include
in the installer from the Project View tree. Drag the selected files and
builds to the folders in the Destination View tree. You also can use the
arrow button to move the files from the Project View tree to the
Destination View tree.
If you want to remove files from the Destination View tree, select the
files to delete and click the Delete button or press the <Delete> key.
5. From the Source File Settings page, place checkmarks in the checkboxes
in the File Attributes section to configure the file attributes at
installation. If the installer build includes a stand-alone application in
which you enabled the ActiveX server, place a checkmark in the
Register COM checkbox for the application file.
6. From the Shortcuts page, configure any shortcuts you want to create to
files in the installer.
7. From the Additional Installers page, add installers for any National
Instruments products or drivers to include in the installer build. For
example, if you build an installer for an application or shared library that
uses the Storage VIs, you must add the NI USI installer.

8. From the Dialog Information page, set the dialog boxes, user interface
text, and error messages that appear when you run the installer.
9. From the Registry page, create registry keys and values for the installer.
10. From the Hardware Configuration page, specify the hardware
configuration information to include in the installer build.
Note Include the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine if you are distributing applications and
shared libraries to computers on which LabVIEW is not installed.
11. From the Advanced page, configure advanced settings for the installer.
12. Click the OK button to update the build specification settings in the
project and close the dialog box. The build specification name appears
in the project under Build Specifications.
Note When you update the build specification settings, the settings become part of the
project. However, you must save the project if you want to save the settings.
13. Right-click the installer build specification name and select Build from
the shortcut menu. You can find the resulting installer files in the
directory specified in the Installer destination text box on the Product
Information page of the build specification.
You can duplicate build specifications. Right-click the build specification

item you want to duplicate and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu to
create a copy of the build specification item.
If you rebuild a given specification, LabVIEW overwrites the existing files

from the previous build that are part of the current build.
Note You also can build an installer programmatically from a build specification.You do
not need additional license files when using LabVIEW distribution components with
LabVIEW-built applications.
For more information about building an installer in LabVIEW, refer to

Building an Installer (Windows) in the LabVIEW Help.

Exercise 10-3 Create an Installer

Goal
Create a professional installer for your application.
Scenario
A professional application should always have an installer to deploy the
application. Providing an installer improves the end user experience with the
application.
Design
Create an installer build specification for the executable you created.
Implementation
Create an installer for the Theatre Light Controller.
1. Open TLC.lvproj.
2. Right-click Build Specifications and select New»Installer from the

shortcut menu to open the My Installer Properties dialog box.
3. On the Product Information page, specify a Build specification

name, and Product name.
4. Set the Installer destination to <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Intermediate I\Course Project\Builds\Installer.
5. Select the Source Files page and verify that a folder that matches your
project name exists under ProgramFilesFolder. If no folder exists for
your project, add a folder and provide a meaningful name for the folder.
6. In the Project View list, select the stand-alone application build

specification. Click the arrow to place the build specification in the
folder you created.
7. Select the Shortcuts page to create a shortcut to the

ProgramMenuFolder in Windows. Click the blue + button to open the
Select Target File dialog box. Select the EXE for your project and click
OK. Change the Name to Theatre Light Controller. This places
the item in the Start»Programs menu.
8. Select the Additional Installers page and verify that a checkmark

appears in the checkbox for the LabVIEW Run-Time Engine installer.

9. Click OK.
10. Right-click the installer build specification and select Build from the
shortcut menu.
Testing
Navigate to the installer destination directory you specified and run the
installer. After the installer runs, verify the installation of the Theatre Light
Controller.
Note These are the ideal conditions for testing an installer. For a more accurate test, try
your installer on another computer that does not have LabVIEW installed.

Summary – Quiz
1. Which of the following are code changes that should be considered
before building a VI into an executable?
a. Removal of absolute file paths
b. Creating an About dialog box
c. Adding code to quit LabVIEW upon code completion
d. All of the above
2. Which of the following can be included when building an installer for

your executable?
a. LabVIEW Run-Time Engine
b. Custom error file
c. NI-DAQmx
d. All of the above


1. Which of the following are code changes that should be considered
before building a VI into an executable?
a. Removal of absolute file paths
b. Creating an About dialog box
c. Adding code to quit LabVIEW upon code completion
d. All of the above
2. Which of the following can be included when building an installer for

your executable?
a. LabVIEW Run-Time Engine
b. Custom error file
c. NI-DAQmx
d. All of the above

Notes

IEEE Requirements Documents
A
This appendix describes the IEEE standards for software engineers and
includes a requirements document for the Theater Light Control system that
conforms to the IEEE 830 standard for requirements documents.
Topics
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standards
B. IEEE Requirements Document
© National Instruments Corporation A-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Appendix A IEEE Requirements Documents
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

Standards
IEEE defined a number of standards for software engineering. IEEE

Standard 730, first published in 1980, is a standard for software quality
assurance plans. This standard serves as a foundation for several other IEEE
standards and gives a brief description of the minimum requirements for a
quality plan in the following areas:
1. Purpose
2. Reference documents
3. Management
4. Documentation
5. Standards, practices, conventions, and metrics
6. Reviews and audits
7. Test
8. Problem reporting and corrective action
9. Tools, techniques, and methodologies
10. Code control
11. Media control
12. Supplier control
13. Records collection, maintenance, and retention
14. Training
15. Risk management
As with the ISO standards, IEEE 730 is fairly short. It does not dictate how
to meet the requirements but requires documentation for these practices to a
specified minimum level of detail.
In addition to IEEE 730, several other IEEE standards related to software

engineering exist, including the following:
1. IEEE 610—Defines standard software engineering terminology.
2. IEEE 829—Establishes standards for software test documentation.
3. IEEE 830—Explains the content of good software requirements
specifications.
4. IEEE 1074—Describes the activities performed as part of a software
lifecycle without requiring a specific lifecycle model.
5. IEEE 1298—Details the components of a software quality management
system; similar to ISO 9001.
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual A-2 ni.com

Your projects may be required to meet some or all these standards. Even if
you are not required to develop to any of these specifications, they can be
helpful in developing your own requirements, specifications, and quality
plans.
B. IEEE Requirements Document

The following requirements document for the Theater Light Controller
system conforms to the IEEE-830 specification for requirements
documents.
Start of Requirements Document
Section 1: Introduction
This section provides an overview of the software requirements document.
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to provide a detailed, precise, and easy to
understand set of software requirements. Software developers use this
document as a reference to design, implement, and test the software. This
document serves as a basis to begin implementation of the software.
Scope
The scope of this document is to describe the software requirements for the
Theatre Light Control Software. The deliverables for the Theatre Light
Control Software will consist of the software system and software
documentation.
Definitions, Acronyms, and Abbreviations

The requirements document uses the following definitions, acronyms, and
abbreviations.
• API—Application Program Interface.
• Byte—Unit of memory storage in the computer to store one character of
information.
• Channel—The most basic element of the Theatre Light Control
Software. Each channel corresponds to a physical light.
• Channel Array—Allocated memory that stores information regarding
the channels. Portions of this array are displayed to the user on the front
panel.
• Channel Counter—Variable that can be used to iterate through
channels.

• Color—Attribute of the channel that defines the color of the channel as

a combination of red, green, and blue.
• Cue—A cue contains any number of independent channels with timing
attributes for the channels.
• Cue List—Contains a list of all the recorded cues.
• Fade Time—Cue timing attribute that defines the time it takes, in
multiples of one second, before a channel reaches its particular intensity
and color.
• Follow Time—A cue timing attribute that defines the amount of time to
wait, in multiples of one second, before the cue finishes.
• Intensity—Attribute of the channel that defines the intensity of the
physical light.
• Light—A standard theatre light that has the ability to vary in intensity
from 0% to 100% and change in color with a combination of red, green,
and blue.
• Megabyte—1 Mb equals 220 bytes.
• Pan—Theatre light motion control that provides horizontal movement
• Theatre Lighting Hardware Device—Hardware interface to the
theatre lights that controls the power, switching, and drive to the theatre
lights.
• Tilt—Theatre light motion control that provides vertical movement
• Wait Time—A cue timing attribute that defines the amount of time to
wait, in multiples of one second, before the cue fires.
References
IEEE Recommended Practice for Software Requirements Specifications,
IEEE Std. 830-1998.
Document Overview
This document contains three sections. The first section is an introduction
and overview of the requirements document. The second section provides an
overall description of the software that will be produced. The third section
addresses the specific requirements of the Theatre Light Control Software.
Section 2: Overall Description

This section describes the general issues that can affect the software
requirements of the product. This section does not provide detailed
information on the requirements for the product.

Product Perspective
The Theatre Light Control Software will perform as part of a theatre lighting
system as described by the specifications provided by ABC Theatre
Lighting Inc. The Theatre Light Control Software will provide the necessary
control for the theatre lighting system to operate.
The Theatre Light Control Software is an independent and entirely

self-contained control system that interfaces with the local theatre lighting
hardware device. The theatre lighting device controls the color and intensity
of the physical lights.
Product Functions
The Theatre Light Control Software will perform the following functions:
• Initialize
• Record
• Load
• Save
• Play
• Move Cue Up
• Move Cue Down
• Select Cue
• Delete
• Stop
• Close
User Characteristics
The users of the Theatre Light Control Software will have a deep
understanding of how theatre light systems operate. Also, the users will be
able to understand how to install and integrate the Theatre Light Control
Software into their system.

Constraints
The following are general design constraints for the Theatre Light Control
Software:
• The Theatre Light Control Software will be written in LabVIEW.
• The software must be able to control at least 16 channels.
• All minimum user-defined software times are one second.
• The minimum wait time and follow time is zero seconds.
• The minimum fade time is one second.
• The software must conform to the guidelines outlined in the customer
specification.
Assumptions and Dependencies

The Theatre Lighting Hardware Device will provide a standardized API that
the Theatre Light Control Software can interface to.
Apportioning of Requirements
Many theatre lighting hardware devices provide for lights that have motor
control to move the light around the stage. The Theatre Light Control
Software shall provide for the ability to easily implement channel pan and
tilt in a future version of the software. The Theatre Light Control Software
will only interface to theatre lighting hardware devices that do not contain
motor control capability for this version of the software.
Section 3: Specific Requirements

This section describes the specific requirements in detail. The software
should be developed to meet these requirements and tested to verify that the
system satisfies the requirements.
External Interface Requirements

This section provides details about the inputs and outputs to the software.

User Interfaces
The main user interface shall clearly display to the user the current status of
the channel and recorded cues. The following figure shows the main user
interface.
The Cue Control and Cue Information sections are the primary visible
components on the user interface. Cue Control contains a Cue Number and
Cue Name and controls for manipulating cues. Cue Information displays
all 16 channels of the system and particular information about a selected
cue. Each channel displays the user intensity settings and color information
for that channel.
The main user interface shall contain a menu to control the operation of the
application. The menu shall contain File»Open, File»Close, and File»Exit.
Hardware Interfaces
The Theatre Light Control Software interfaces to the Theatre Lighting
Hardware Device, which is physically connected to the lights. The Theatre
Lighting Hardware Device controls light intensity and color. The following
illustration shows a high-level system diagram of the theatre lighting
system.

Theatre Lighting Theatre Lighting

Control Software Hardware Device
32
The Theatre Lighting Hardware Device provides a LabVIEW API to allow

the Theatre Light Control Software to control the hardware device. The API
consists of the Theatre Open, Theatre Write, Theatre Light Wizard, and
Theatre Close VIs. The Theatre Open VI, shown in the following figure,
opens the Theatre Lighting Hardware Device.
The Theatre Write VI, shown, shown in the following figure, writes the
intensity and color information to a specific channel.
The Theatre Close VI, shown in the following figure, closes the Theatre
Lighting Hardware Device.

Functions
This section describes each of the product functions in detail.
Initialize
Introduction
“Initialize” shall set all the channels to a default state of an intensity of 0%
and a color combination of 0% red, 0% green, and 0% blue. Initialize must
initialize all aspects of the user interface, and application.
Processing
Initialize Block Diagram code
Initialize Front Panel
Record
Introduction
“Record” shall take the current settings specified for the channels and create
a cue. This function prompts the user for the cue attributes, which are wait
time, fade time, and follow time.
Processing
Prompt the user for the channel color, channel
intensity, cue name, wait time, fade time, and follow
time
Store the attributes for the cue
Store the cue name in the cue list
Load
Introduction
“Load” shall prompt the user for a LabVIEW datalog file that contains a
saved set of Cues.
Inputs
LabVIEW Datalog file
Processing
Prompt the user for a filename
Check that the file exists
If the file exists
Load cues from file
Store the cue names in the cue control

Save
Introduction
“Save Cues” shall store all attributes that relate to the cues in a LabVIEW
datalog file.
Processing
Prompt the user for a filename
Check that file exists
If the file exists
Prompt the user that file exists
Suspend processing
Save all recorded cues in memory
Outputs
LabVIEW Datalog file Prompts
Play
Introduction
“Play” shall start at the top of the Cue List and execute the cue in real time.
This function updates the front panel channel array by displaying what the
Theatre Lighting Hardware Device is being commanded to do. The
information displayed to the user on the front panel will correspond to the
information that is being communicated to the Theatre Lighting Hardware
Device using the LabVIEW API.
Processing
Disable the following controls: Record, Play, Up, Down,
Delete
Repeat the following for each cue:
Wait for the number of seconds specified by wait time
Fade the channels in the cue to the desired level
within the specified number of fade time seconds
Wait for the number of seconds specified by the follow
time
Enable the following controls: Record, Play, Up, Down,
Delete
Outputs
Theatre Lighting Hardware Device Display
Move Cue Up
Introduction
“Move Cue Up” shall move the currently selected Cue up one level.

Processing
Check if currently selected cue is the first cue in the
list
If the selected cue is not the first cue in the list
Swap Selected Cue with Selected Cue - 1
Move Cue Down

Introduction
“Move Cue Down” shall move the currently selected Cue down one level.
Processing
Check if currently selected cue is the last cue in the
list
If the selected cue is not the last cue in the list
Swap Selected Cue with Selected Cue + 1
Select Cue
Introduction
“Select Cue” shall display the Cue Name, Fade Time, Wait Time, and
Follow Time for the Cue in the Cue Information display when a Cue is
selected in the Cue List. This function also enables the Move Cue Up, Move
Cue Down, and Delete functions to operate as expected.
Processing
Get Cue Values for Selected Cue
Update Front Panel Channels
Delete
Introduction
“Delete” shall delete a cue and all information regarding the cue that is
stored in memory.
Processing
Delete Selected Cue
Update Cue List
Stop
Introduction
“Stop” shall cause any playing cue to stop when the button is clicked.
Processing
Send a stop message to stop playing cues

Close
Introduction
“Exit” shall close all open references and cleanly stop the application. This
function also initializes all channels to an intensity of 0% with a color
combination of 0% red, 0% green, and 0% blue.
Processing
Shutdown all modules
Shutdown all open references
Outputs
Theatre Lighting Hardware Device Channel array
Performance Requirements
• The software must respond to user commands within 100 ms.
• The software must not use 100% of the CPU time.
Design Constraints
The software will be tested with 32 channels.
Software System Attributes

The Theatre Light Control Software will contain certain quality attributes
built into the working product specified in this document.
Reliability
The Theatre Light Control Software will have been thoroughly tested at time
of delivery so that computational errors will not occur.
Availability
The Theatre Light Control Software will not require any operating service
intervals for preventive maintenance.
Security
Because of the nature of the Theatre Light Control Software, no data or files
will be encrypted. Therefore, no security controls will be built into the
application.
Maintainability
The LabVIEW Automation Company will maintain the Theatre Light
Control Software and provide software documentation.

Logical Database Requirements

There do not exist any specific requirements for a database because a
database is not required for the application.
Other Requirements
No other requirements exist for the application.
End of Requirements Document

Additional Information and Resources
B
This appendix contains additional information about National Instruments
technical support options and LabVIEW resources.
National Instruments Technical Support Options

Visit the following sections of the award-winning National Instruments
Web site at ni.com for technical support and professional services:
• Support—Technical support at ni.com/support includes the
following resources:
– Self-Help Technical Resources—For answers and solutions,
visit ni.com/support for software drivers and updates,
a searchable KnowledgeBase, product manuals, step-by-step
troubleshooting wizards, thousands of example programs, tutorials,
application notes, instrument drivers, and so on. Registered
users also receive access to the NI Discussion Forums at
ni.com/forums. NI Applications Engineers make sure every
question submitted online receives an answer.
– Standard Service Program Membership—This program entitles
members to direct access to NI Applications Engineers via phone
and email for one-to-one technical support as well as exclusive
access to on demand training modules via the Services Resource
Center. NI offers complementary membership for a full year after
purchase, after which you may renew to continue your benefits.
For information about other technical support options in your
area, visit ni.com/services or contact your local office at
ni.com/contact.
• System Integration—If you have time constraints, limited in-house
technical resources, or other project challenges, National Instruments
Alliance Partner members can help. The NI Alliance Partners joins
system integrators, consultants, and hardware vendors to provide
comprehensive service and expertise to customers. The program ensures
qualified, specialized assistance for application and system
development. To learn more, call your local NI office or visit
ni.com/alliance.
If you searched ni.com and could not find the answers you need, contact
your local office or NI corporate headquarters. Phone numbers for our
worldwide offices are listed at the front of this manual. You also can visit the
© National Instruments Corporation B-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Appendix B Additional Information and Resources
Worldwide Offices section of ni.com/niglobal to access the branch

office Web sites, which provide up-to-date contact information, support
phone numbers, email addresses, and current events.
Other National Instruments Training Courses

National Instruments offers several training courses for LabVIEW users.
These courses continue the training you received here and expand it to other
areas. Visit ni.com/training to purchase course materials or sign up for
instructor-led, hands-on courses at locations around the world.
National Instruments Certification

Earning an NI certification acknowledges your expertise in working with
NI products and technologies. The measurement and automation industry,
your employer, clients, and peers recognize your NI certification credential
as a symbol of the skills and knowledge you have gained through
experience. areas. Visit ni.com/training for more information about the
NI certification program.
LabVIEW Resources
This section describes how you can receive more information regarding
LabVIEW.
LabVIEW Publications
Many books have been written about LabVIEW programming and
applications. The National Instruments Web site contains a list of all the
LabVIEW books and links to places to purchase these books. Publisher
information is also included so you can directly contact the publisher for
more information on the contents and ordering information for LabVIEW
and related computer-based measurement and automation books.
info-labview Listserve
info-labview is an email group of users from around the world who
discuss LabVIEW issues. The list members can answer questions about
building LabVIEW systems for particular applications, where to get
instrument drivers or help with a device, and problems that appear.
To subscribe to info-labview, send email to:

[email protected]
To subscribe to the digest version of info-labview, send email to:

[email protected]
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual B-2 ni.com

Appendix B Additional Information and Resources
To unsubscribe to info-labview, send email to:

[email protected]
To post a message to subscribers, send email to:

[email protected]
To send other administrative messages to the info-labview list manager,

send email to:
[email protected]
You might also want to search previous email messages at:

www.searchVIEW.net
The info-labview web page is available at www.info-labview.org
© National Instruments Corporation B-3 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Glossary
Numbers
1D One-dimensional.
2D Two-dimensional.
A
A Amperes.
absolute path File or directory path that describes the location relative to the top level
of the file system.
active window Window that is currently set to accept user input, usually the frontmost
window. The title bar of an active window is highlighted. Make a
window active by clicking it or by selecting it from the Windows
menu.
application software Application created using the LabVIEW Development System and
executed in the LabVIEW Run-Time System environment.
array Ordered, indexed list of data elements of the same type.
array shell Front panel object that houses an array. An array shell consists of an
index display, a data object window, and an optional label. It can accept
various data types.
artificial data Condition in a dataflow programming language in which the arrival of

dependency data, rather than its value, triggers execution of a node.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
auto-indexing Capability of loop structures to disassemble and assemble arrays at

their borders. As an array enters a loop with auto-indexing enabled, the
loop automatically disassembles it extracting scalars from ID arrays,
ID arrays extracted from 2D arrays, and so on. Loops assemble data
into arrays as data exit the loop in the reverse order.
autoscaling Ability of scales to adjust to the range of plotted values. On graph

scales, autoscaling determines maximum and minimum scale values.
© National Instruments Corporation G-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Glossary
B
black box testing Form of testing where a module is tested without knowing how the
module is implemented. The module is treated as if it were a black box
that you cannot look inside. Instead, you generate tests to verify the
module behaves the way it is supposed to according to the
requirements specification.
block diagram Pictorial description or representation of a program or algorithm. The

block diagram consists of executable icons called nodes and wires that
carry data between the nodes. The block diagram is the source code for
the VI. The block diagram resides in the block diagram window of the
VI.
Boolean controls Front panel objects to manipulate and display Boolean (TRUE or
and indicators FALSE) data.
buffer Temporary storage for acquired or generated data.
Bundle node Function that creates clusters from various types of elements.
C
Capability Maturity Model for judging the maturity of the processes of an organization and
Model (CMM) for identifying the key practices required to increase the maturity of
these processes. The Software CMM (SW-CMM) is a de facto
standard for assessing and improving software processes. Through the
SW-CMM, the Software Engineering Institute and software
development community have put in place an effective means for
modeling, defining, and measuring the maturity of the processes
software professionals use.
caption label Label on a front panel object used to name the object in the user
interface. You can translate this label to other languages without
affecting the block diagram source code. See also Name Label.
case One subdiagram of a Case structure.
Case structure Conditional branching control structure, that executes one of its
subdiagrams based on the input to the Case structure. It is the
combination of the IF, THEN, ELSE, and CASE statements in control
flow languages.
checkbox Small square box in a dialog box you can select or clear. Checkboxes
generally are associated with multiple options that you can set. You
can select more than one checkbox.
CIN See Code Interface Node (CIN).
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual G-2 ni.com

Glossary
cluster A set of ordered, unindexed data elements of any data type, including
numeric, Boolean, string, array, or cluster. The elements must be all
controls or all indicators.
cluster shell Front panel object that contains the elements of a cluster.
COCOMO Estimation COnstructive COst MOdel. A formula-based estimation method for

converting software size estimates to estimated development time.
code and fix model Lifecycle model that involves developing code with little or no
planning and fixing problems as they arise.
Code Interface Node Special block diagram node through which you can link text-based
(CIN) code to a VI.
coercion Automatic conversion LabVIEW performs to change the numeric

representation of a data element.
coercion dot Appears on a block diagram node to alert you that you have wired data
of two different numeric data types together. Also appears when you
wire any data type to a variant data type.
cohesion How well a single module focuses on a single goal.
Color Copying tool Copies colors for pasting with the Coloring tool.
Coloring tool Tool to set foreground and background colors.
compile Process that converts high-level code to machine-executable code.

LabVIEW compiles VIs automatically before they run for the first time
after you create or edit alteration.
connector Part of the VI or function node that contains input and output
terminals. Data pass to and from the node through a connector.
connector pane Region in the upper right corner of a front panel or block diagram
window that displays the VI terminal pattern. It defines the inputs and
outputs you can wire to a VI.
constant See universal constant and user-defined constant.
Context Help window Window that displays basic information about LabVIEW objects when
you move the cursor over each object. Objects with context help
information include VIs, functions, constants, structures, palettes,
properties, methods, events, and dialog box components.
control Front panel object for entering data to a VI interactively or to a subVI

programmatically, such as a knob, push button, or dial.

Glossary
control flow Programming system in which the sequential order of instructions

determines execution order. Most text-based programming languages
are control flow languages.
conversion Changing the type of a data element.
count terminal Terminal of a For Loop whose value determines the number of times
the For Loop executes its subdiagram.
coupling Connection that is established from one module to another.
current VI VI whose front panel, block diagram, or Icon Editor is the active
window.
D
D Delta; Difference. Δx denotes the value by which x changes from one
index to the next.
DAQ See data acquisition.
data acquisition DAQ. Process of acquiring data, typically from A/D or digital input
plug-in devices.
data dependency Condition in a dataflow programming language in which a node cannot

execute until it receives data from another node. See also artificial data
dependency.
data encapsulation See information hiding.
data flow Programming system that consists of executable nodes that execute
only when they receive all required input data and produce output
automatically when they execute. LabVIEW is a dataflow system.
data storage formats Arrangement and representation of data stored in memory.
data type Format for information. In LabVIEW, acceptable data types for most
VIs and functions are numeric, array, string, Boolean, path, refnum,
enumeration, waveform, and cluster.
data type descriptor Code that identifies data types; used in data storage and representation.
datalog file File that stores data as a sequence of records of a single, arbitrary data
type that you specify when you create the file. Although all the records
in a datalog file must be a single type, that type can be complex. For
example, you can specify that each record is a cluster that contains a
string, a number, and an array.

Glossary
datalogging Generally, to acquire data and simultaneously store it in a disk file.

LabVIEW file I/O VIs and functions can log data.
default Preset value. Many VI inputs use a default value if you do not specify
a value.
default input Default value of a front panel control.
design patterns Techniques that have proved themselves useful for developing
software. Design patterns typically evolve through the efforts of many
developers and are fine-tuned for simplicity, maintainability, and
readability.
device Instrument or controller that is addressable as a single entity and

controls or monitors real-world I/O points. A device is often connected
to the host computer through some type of communication network or
can be a plug-in device.
For data acquisition (DAQ) applications, a DAQ device is inside your
computer or attached directly to the parallel port of your computer.
Plug-in boards, PCMCIA cards, and devices such as the
DAQPad-1200, which connects to your computer's parallel port, are all
examples of DAQ devices. SCXI modules are distinct from devices,
with the exception of the SCXI-1200, which is a hybrid.
dialog box Window that appears when an application needs further information to
carry out a command.
dimension Size and structure of an array.
directory Structure for organizing files into convenient groups. A directory is

like an address that shows the location of files. A directory can contain
files or subdirectories of files.
DLL Dynamic Link Library.
driver Software that controls a specific hardware device, such as a DAQ

device.

Glossary
E
empty array Array that has zero elements but has a defined data type. For example,
an array that has a numeric control in its data display window but has
no defined values for any element is an empty numeric array.
error in Error structure that enters a VI.
error message Indication of a software or hardware malfunction or of an unacceptable

data entry attempt.
error out The error structure that leaves a VI.
error structure Consists of a Boolean status indicator, a numeric code indicator, and a
string source indicator.
event Condition or state of an analog or digital signal.
event driven Method of programming whereby the program waits on an event to

programming occur before executing one or more functions.
F
file refnum See refnum.
Flat Sequence structure Program control structure that executes its subdiagrams in numeric
order. Use this structure to force nodes that are not data dependent to
execute in the order you want. The Flat Sequence structure displays all
the frames simultaneously and executes the frames from left to right
until the last frame executes.
For Loop Iterative loop structure that executes its subdiagram a set number of
times. Equivalent to text-based code: For i = 0 to n – 1, do....
frame Subdiagram of a Flat or Stacked Sequence structure.
free label Label on the front panel or block diagram that does not belong to any
other object.
front panel Interactive user interface of a VI. Front panel appearance imitates
physical instruments, such as oscilloscopes and multimeters.
function Built-in execution element, comparable to an operator, function, or

statement in a text-based programming language.

Glossary
functional global A VI containing a single-iteration While Loop with an uninitialized

variable shift register. A functional global variable is similar to a global
variable, but it does not make extra copies of data in memory.
Functional global variables also can expand beyond simple read
and write functionality.
G
General Purpose GPIB—synonymous with HP-IB. The standard bus used for
Interface Bus controlling electronic instruments with a computer. Also called
IEEE 488 bus because it is defined by ANSI/IEEE Standards
488-1978, 488.1-1987, and 488.2-1992.
global variable Accesses and passes data among several VIs on a block diagram.
GPIB See General Purpose Interface Bus.
H
heuristic A recognized usability principle.
Hierarchy window Window that graphically displays the hierarchy of VIs and subVIs.
I
I/O Input/Output. The transfer of data to or from a computer system
involving communications channels, operator input devices, and/or
data acquisition and control interfaces.
icon Graphical representation of a node on a block diagram.
Icon Editor Interface similar to that of a graphics program for creating VI icons.
IEEE Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
indicator Front panel object that displays output, such as a graph or LED.
information hiding Preventing or limiting other components from accessing data items in
a module except through some predetermined method.
inplace The condition in which two or more terminals, such as error I/O
terminals or shift registers, use the same memory space.
inplace execution Ability of a VI or function to reuse memory instead of allocating more.

Glossary
integration testing Integration testing assures that individual components work together
correctly. Such testing may uncover, for example, a misunderstanding
of the interface between modules.
ISA Industry Standard Architecture.
iteration terminal Terminal of a For Loop or While Loop that contains the current
number of completed iterations.
L
label Text object used to name or describe objects or regions on the front
panel or block diagram.
Labeling tool Tool to create labels and enter text into text windows.
LabVIEW Laboratory Virtual Instrument Engineering Workbench. LabVIEW is

a graphical programming language that uses icons instead of lines of
text to create programs.
LED Light-emitting diode.
library See VI library.
lifecycle model Model for software development, including steps to follow from the
initial concept through the release, maintenance, and upgrading of the
software.
listbox Box within a dialog box that lists all available choices for a command.
For example, a list of filenames on a disk.
LLB VI Library.
local variable Variable that enables you to read or write to one of the controls or
indicators on the front panel of a VI.
M
memory buffer See buffer.
menu bar Horizontal bar that lists the names of the main menus of an application.
The menu bar appears below the title bar of a window. Each
application has a menu bar that is distinct for that application, although
some menus and commands are common to many applications.
modular programming Type of programming that uses interchangeable computer routines.

Glossary
multithreaded Application that runs several different threads of execution

application independently. On a multiple processor computer, the different threads
might be running on different processors simultaneously.
N
Name Label Label of a front panel object used to name the object and as distinguish
it from other objects. The label also appears on the block diagram
terminal, local variables, and property nodes that are part of the object.
See also caption label.
node Program execution element. Nodes are analogous to statements,

operators, functions, and subroutines in text-based programming
languages. On a block diagram, nodes include functions, structures,
and subVIs.
non-displayable ASCII characters that cannot be displayed, such as null, backspace,

characters tab, and so on.
numeric controls Front panel objects to manipulate and display numeric data.
and indicators
O
object Generic term for any item on the front panel or block diagram,
including controls, indicators, nodes, wires, and imported pictures.
operator Person who initiates and monitors the operation of a process.
P
palette Display of icons that represent possible options.
panel window VI window that contains the front panel, the toolbar, and the icon and
connector panes.
pixel Smallest unit of a digitized picture.
polling Method of sequentially observing each I/O point or user interface

control to determine if it is ready to receive data or request computer
action.
Property Node Sets or finds the properties of a VI or application.

Glossary
prototype Simple, quick implementation of a particular task to demonstrate that

the design has the potential to work. The prototype usually has missing
features and might have design flaws. In general, prototypes should be
thrown away, and the feature should be reimplemented for the final
version.
pseudocode Simplified language-independent representation of programming

code.
pull-down menus Menus accessed from a menu bar. Pull-down menu items are usually
general in nature.
R
race condition Occurs when two or more pieces of code that execute in parallel
change the value of the same shared resource, typically a global
or local variable.
real-time Pertaining to the performance of a computation during the actual

time that the related physical process transpires so results of the
computation can be used in guiding the physical process.
refactor Redesign software to make it more readable and maintainable so that

the cost of change does not increase over time. Refactoring changes the
internal structure of a VI to make it more readable and maintainable,
without changing its observable behavior.
refnum Reference number. An identifier that LabVIEW associates with a file

you open. Use the refnum to indicate that you want a function or VI to
perform an operation on the open file.
representation Subtype of the numeric data type, of which there are 8-, 16-, and 32-bit
signed and unsigned integers, as well as single-, double-, and
extended-precision floating-point numbers.
ring control Special numeric control that associates 32-bit integers, starting at 0 and
increasing sequentially, with a series of text labels or graphics.
S
scalar Number that a point on a scale can represent. A single value as opposed
to an array. Scalar Booleans and clusters are explicitly singular
instances of their respective data types.
sequence structure See Flat Sequence structure or Stacked Sequence structure.

Glossary
shared library A file containing executable program modules that any number of
different programs can use to perform some function. Shared libraries
are useful when you want to share the functionality of the VIs you
build with other developers.
shift register Optional mechanism in loop structures to pass the value of a variable
from one iteration of a loop to a subsequent iteration. Shift registers are
similar to static variables in text-based programming languages.
shortcut menu Menu accessed by right-clicking an object. Menu items pertain to that
object specifically.
software configuration Mechanism for controlling changes to source code, documents, and
management (SCM) other material that make up a product. During software development,
source code control is a form of configuration management. Changes
occur only through the source code control mechanism. It also is
common to implement release configuration management to ensure
you can rebuild a particular release of software, if necessary.
Configuration management implies archival development of tools,
source code, and so on.
Software Engineering Federally funded research and development center to study software
Institute (SEI) engineering technology. The SEI is located at Carnegie Mellon
University and is sponsored by the Defense Advanced Research
Projects Agency. Refer to the Software Engineering Institute Web site
at www.sei.cmu.edu for more information about the institute.
source lines of code Measure of the number of lines of code that make up a text-based
project. It is used in some organizations to measure the complexity
and cost of a project. How the lines are counted depends on the
organization. For example, some organizations do not count blank
lines and comment lines. Some count C lines, and some count only the
final assembly language lines.
spaghetti code Code that contains program constructs that do not form an easy to
understand, logical flow.
specifications document Document that lists the individual tasks that define the function of the
application that is produced by the customer.
spiral model Lifecycle model that emphasizes risk management through a series of
iterations in which risks are identified, evaluated, and resolved.
Stacked Sequence Program control structure that executes its subdiagrams in numeric
structure order. Use this structure to force nodes that are not data dependent to
execute in the order you want. The Stacked Sequence structure
displays each frame so you see only one frame at a time and executes
the frames in order until the last frame executes.

Glossary
string Representation of a value as text.
string controls and Front panel objects to manipulate and display text.
indicators
structure Program control element, such as a Flat Sequence structure, Stacked

Sequence structure, Case structure, For Loop, or While Loop.
stub VI Nonfunctional prototype of a subVI. A stub VI has inputs and outputs,

but is incomplete. Use stub VIs during early planning stages of an
application design as a place holder for future VI development.
subdiagram Block diagram within the border of a structure.
subVI VI used on the block diagram of another VI. Comparable to a

subroutine.
system testing System testing begins after integration testing is complete. System
testing assures that all the individual components function correctly
together and constitute a product that meets the intended requirements.
This stage often uncovers performance, resource usage, and other
problems.
T
terminal Object or region on a node through which data pass.
tip strip Small yellow text banners that identify the terminal name and make it
easier to identify terminals for wiring.
top-level VI VI at the top of the VI hierarchy. This term distinguishes the VI from
its subVIs.
tunnel Data entry or exit terminal on a structure.
type definition Master copy of a custom object that several VIs can use.
type descriptor See data type descriptor.
U
unit testing Testing only a single component of a system in isolation from the rest
of the system. Unit testing occurs before the module is incorporated
into the rest of the system.
universal constant Uneditable block diagram object that emits a particular ASCII
character or standard numeric constant, for example, π.

Glossary
user-defined constant Block diagram object that emits a value you set.
UUT Unit under test.
V
Variant Data type that includes the control or indicator name, information
about the data type from which you converted, and the data itself,
which allows LabVIEW to correctly convert the variant data type to
the data type you want.
VI See virtual instrument (VI).
VI library Special file that contains a collection of related VIs for a specific use.
VI Server Mechanism for controlling VIs and LabVIEW applications

programmatically, locally and remotely.
virtual instrument (VI) Program in LabVIEW that models the appearance and function of a
physical instrument.
W
waterfall model Lifecycle model that consists of several non-overlapping stages,
beginning with the software concept and continuing through testing
and maintenance.
While Loop Loop structure that repeats a section of code until a condition is met.
white box testing Unlike black box testing, white box testing creates tests that take into
account the particular implementation of the module. For example, use
white box testing to verify all the paths of execution of the module have
been exercised.
wire Data path between nodes.
wire bend Point where two wire segments join.
wire branch Section of wire that contains all the wire segments from junction to
junction, terminal to junction, or terminal to terminal if there are no
junctions between.
wire junction Point where three or more wire segments join.
wire segment Single horizontal or vertical piece of wire.
wire stubs Truncated wires that appear next to unwired terminals when you move
the Wiring tool over a VI or function node.

Index
A sizing, 6-26
about dialog box, 10-3 style considerations, 6-26
abstract components variant data, 6-10
data abstraction, 2-16 wiring techniques, 6-26
drawing boundary conditions, testing, 7-4
dataflow diagrams, 2-25 build specifications, 10-12
flowcharts, 2-23 building
procedural abstraction, 2-16 applications, 10-12
access options shared libraries, 10-12
setting in project libraries, 4-36 stand-alone applications, 10-12
adding
items to projects, 4-28 C
alpha testing, 7-49
captions, 3-12
application
certification (NI resources), vii, B-2
analyzing an, 2-1
checklist
build specifications, 10-12
code implementation, 6-58
building, 10-1
customer communication, 2-6
caveats and recommendations, 10-5
data structures, 4-52
designing an, 4-1
error handling strategy, 4-70
documenting, 9-1
error handling strategies, 4-67 front panel style, 3-18
evaluating performance, 8-1 hierarchical architecture, 4-27
hierarchical architecture, 4-25 performance issues, 8-25
implementing requirements document, 2-7
code, 6-1, 10-2 scalable architecture, 6-12
scalable architecture, 6-7 specifications content, 2-3
user interface, 5-1 test plan, 7-5
menu items, 3-5 testing strategy, 7-10
test plan, 7-1 user interface-based data, 5-6
user interface, 3-2 classic controls and indicators, 3-14
Application Builder, 10-12 clone, 8-21
applications clusters, 4-51
documentation, 9-3 error, 4-68
arrays, 4-51 removing borders, 3-20
auto-populating folders, 4-30 code
developing, 6-26
B documenting, 6-27
implementing, 6-1, 6-26, 10-2
beta testing, 7-49
about dialog box, 10-3
block diagram
checklist, 6-58
comments, 6-27
relative file path handling, 10-2
left-to-right layouts, 6-27
© National Instruments Corporation I-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Index
performance, 8-2 controls

reviews, 7-2 captions, 3-12
self-documenting, 6-30 classic, 3-14
verification, 7-2 colors, 3-2
code and fix model, 1-5 default values, 3-13
code reviews, 7-2 describing, 9-5
coercion dots, avoiding, 8-18 descriptions, 9-6
cohesion, 2-22 dialog, 3-14
strong, 2-22 enumerated type controls, 5-2
strong, example, 2-23 fonts, 3-2
color graphics, 3-3
high-color controls and indicators, 3-14 high-color, 3-14
low-color controls and indicators, 3-14 keyboard navigation, 3-13
color style guidelines, 3-2 labels, 3-11
comments on the block diagram, 6-27 layout, 3-4
communication low-color, 3-14
checklist, 2-6 modern, 3-14
customer expectations, 2-4 paths, 3-12
programmer expectations, 2-5 performance considerations, 8-19
Configuration File VIs positioning, 3-10
creating configuration files, 6-32 ranges, 3-13
format, 6-32 ranges of values, 3-13
reading and writing .ini files, 6-31 ring, 5-2
configuration files ring controls, 5-2
configuration settings files, 6-32 sizing, 3-10
creating, 6-31 strings, 3-12
Windows configuration settings file tab, 3-7
formats, 6-32 text, 3-2
configuration management, 6-2 conventions used in the manual, x
change control, 6-4 coupling, 2-22
retrieving old versions of files, 6-3 low, 2-22
source control, 6-2 course
tracking changes, 6-3 conventions used in the manual, x
configuration tests, 7-47 description, viii
connector pane goals, ix
implementing, 5-15 project
recommended patterns, 5-15 goal, 1-11
style guidelines, 5-15 overview, 1-11
constants, eliminating, 6-31 requirements for getting started, viii
containers software installation, ix
subpanel controls, 3-8 software removal, ix
tab controls, 3-7 software repair, ix
LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual I-2 ni.com

Index
creating documenting, 9-3

LabVIEW projects, 4-28 event-based, 4-11
project libraries, 4-35 event-based, advanced, 4-14
project libraries from project folders, execution timing, 6-35
4-36 general VI, 4-3
revision history, 9-4 implementing, 6-7
user events, 4-14 initializing, 6-8
cross-linking, 4-42 master/slave, 4-8
cursors parallel loop, 4-7
creating custom, 3-21 producer/consumer (data), 4-10
custom menus, 3-4 producer/consumer (events), 4-13
customer communication queued message handler, 4-5
customer expectations, 2-4 selecting (figure), 4-25
programmer expectations, 2-5 simple VI, 4-2
customizing software control timing, 6-37
run-time shortcut menus, 3-6 Event structure timeout, 6-41
Get Date/Time in Seconds, 6-38
D synchronization timeout, 6-41
timed structure, 6-42
data abstraction, 2-16
loop, 6-43
data binding, documenting, 6-30
loop with frames, 6-44
data encapsulation. See information hiding
selecting timing source, 6-46
data structures
sequence, 6-42
arrays, 4-51
setting priorities, 6-44
checklist, 4-52
setting timeout, 6-47
choosing, 4-51
state machine, 4-4
clusters, 4-51
timing, 6-35
scalars, 4-51
user interface event handler, 4-11
user interface-based, 5-2
variant data, using, 6-11
data types
design techniques
numeric (table), 5-3
defining requirements for systems, 2-15
data types, choosing, 5-2
front panel prototyping, 3-15
dataflow diagrams, 2-25
design-related documentation, 9-2
dataflow diagrams (figure), 2-25
developing VIs
decorations
tracking development, 9-4
example, 3-6
development
for visual grouping of objects, 3-6
map (figure), 1-1
default values
successful, overview, 1-1
setting (guidelines), 3-13
successful, practices, 1-3
default values for controls, 3-13
development models, 1-3
dependencies, 4-31
See also design techniques
design patterns, 4-2
code and fix model, 1-5
comparing, 4-23
lifecycle models, 1-4
comparison (table), 4-23

Index
modified waterfall model, 1-7 drawing

prototyping for clarification, 1-7 abstracted components, 2-23
spiral model, 1-9 dataflow diagrams, 2-25
waterfall model, 1-5 flowcharts, 2-23
diagnostic tools (NI resources), B-1 drivers (NI resources), B-1
dialog box, about, 10-3
dialog boxes E
controls, 3-14
Embedded Project Manager, 4-27
indicators, 3-14
error handling
labels, 3-14
checking for errors, 4-68
ring controls, 5-2
checklist, 4-70
directories
error clusters, 4-68
naming, 6-34
error codes, 4-69
style considerations, 6-34
custom, 4-69
VI search path, 6-35
implementing, 6-68
documentation
strategies, 4-67
NI resources, B-1
implementing, 6-68
documenting
tests, 7-4
applications, 9-1, 9-3
errors
code, 6-27
clusters, 4-68
data binding, 6-30
codes, 4-68
methods to handle, 4-68
developing documentation, 9-2
evaluating specifications, 2-2
Express VIs, 6-28
events
help files, 9-9
creating user, 4-14
implementing documentation, 9-1
design patterns using, 4-11
overview, 9-2
design patterns using, advanced, 4-14
shared variable, 6-30
generating user, 4-15
user documentation, 9-2
registering user, 4-14
documenting VIs
unregistering user, 4-16
controls, 9-6
user, 4-14
creating help files, 9-9
examples (NI resources), B-1
descriptions, 9-5
execution
design-related documentation, 9-2
speed, 8-19
front panels, 9-5
Express VIs, documenting, 6-28
indicators, 9-6
libraries, 9-3
organizing documentation, 9-2 F
revision history, 9-4 feature creep, preventing, 2-3
user documentation, 9-2 file I/O
drag and drop, 3-10 Configuration File VIs, 6-31
examples, 3-10 ini files, 6-31

Index
reading .ini files with Configuration File localization, 3-17

VIs, 6-31 guidelines, 3-17
writing .ini files with Configuration File palettes, 3-14
VIs, 6-31 paths, 3-12
file management positioning, 3-10
change control, 6-4 prototyping, 3-15
previous versions of files, 6-3 ranges, 3-13
tracking changes, 6-3 ring controls, 5-2
file structure, 6-34 sizing, 3-10
filenames strings, 3-12
directories, 6-34 style checklist, 3-18
VI libraries, 6-34 style considerations, 3-2
VIs, 6-34 system controls, 3-14
files text, 3-2
selecting source control operations, 6-5 transparent, 3-10
flowcharts, 2-23 functional global variable, 4-57
flowcharts (figure), 2-24 using for timing, 4-59, 6-39
font style guidelines, 3-2 functional global variables
front panel guidelines, 6-58
captions, 3-12 functional specification (definition), 2-2
default values, 3-13 functional tests, 7-3
documenting, 9-5 boundary conditions, 7-4
keyboard navigation, 3-13 hand checking, 7-4
loading in subpanel controls, 3-8 functionality, testing, 7-48
overlapping objects, 3-7
positioning, 3-10
G
prototyping, 3-15
ranges of values, 3-13 general VI design pattern, 4-3
sizing, 3-10 generating
user events, 4-15
front panels
global variables
colors, 3-2
functional global variables, 4-57
control styles
timing, 4-59
examples, 3-14
graphics, 3-3
default values, 3-13
design, 3-2
design examples, 3-16 H
enumerated type controls, 5-2 help
fonts, 3-2 technical support, B-1
graphics, 3-3 help files
keyboard navigation, 3-13 creating, 9-9
labels, 3-11 creating (guidelines), 9-9
layout, 3-4 linking to VIs, 9-9

Index
heuristics, usability, 7-49 low-color, 3-14

hierarchical architecture, 4-25 modern, 3-14
checklist, 4-27 paths, 3-12
cohesion, 2-22 positioning, 3-10
coupling, 2-22 sizing, 3-10
hierarchical organization of files strings, 3-12
directories, 6-34 style considerations, 3-2
folders, 6-34 tab, 3-7
naming text, 3-2
directories, 6-34 information hiding, 4-56
VI libraries, 6-34 global variables, 4-56
VIs, 6-34 initializing
hierarchy, 4-25 design patterns, 6-8
history, See revision history initialization state, 6-9
History window shift registers, 6-9
documenting VIs, 9-2 using single frame Sequence structure,
6-8
installer
I
building an, 10-18
.ini files
installers, 10-12
reading and writing, 6-31
installing the course software, ix
I/O
Institute of Electrical and Electronic
effect on VI performance, 8-19 Engineers (IEEE) standards, A-2
IBM Rational ClearCase instrument drivers (NI resources), B-1
using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4 integration testing, 7-5
icons big-bang, 7-6
art glossary, 5-11 bottom-up, 7-8
intuitive icons, 5-12 sandwich, 7-9
style guidelines, 5-11 top-down, 7-7
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers) standards, 2-6, A-2
indicators K
captions, 3-12 keyboard navigation, 3-13
classic, 3-14 keyboard shortcuts
colors, 3-2 guidelines, 3-13
describing, 9-5 KnowledgeBase, B-1
descriptions, 9-6
dialog, 3-14 L
fonts, 3-2 labeling
graphics, 3-3 captions, 3-12
high-color, 3-14 labels
keyboard navigation, 3-13 block diagram documentation, 6-27
labels, 3-11 dialog box, 3-14
layout, 3-4 font usage, 3-2

Index
LabVIEW projects, 4-27 MKS Source Integrity

adding items to, 4-28 using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4
creating, 4-28 models
removing items from, 4-32 See development models
source control settings, 6-5 See prototyping
viewing dependencies, 4-31 modified waterfall model, 1-7
libraries
See LLBs N
See project libraries
naming
lifecycle models, 1-4
directories, 6-34
code and fix model, 1-5
VI libraries, 6-34
modified waterfall model, 1-7
VIs, 6-34
prototyping, 1-7
National Instruments support and services,
spiral model, 1-9 B-1
waterfall model, 1-5 NI, Certification, vii, B-2
load tests, 7-48 non-functional specification (definition), 2-2
localization guidelines, 3-17
O
M
objects
maintainable captions on front panel, 3-12
modules, 6-53 overlapping on front panel, 3-7
VIs, creating, 1-3 organizing
master/slave design pattern, 4-8 project libraries, 4-38
notifiers, 4-9 organizing documentation, 9-2
memory overlapping front panel objects, 3-7
allocation, 8-14
allocation (example), 8-14
developing for, 6-58 P
reallocation buffers, 8-14 palettes, 3-14
variant data, 6-10 parallel loop design pattern, 4-7
menus password protection
custom, 3-4 setting for project libraries, 4-37
handling selections, 3-5 paths
ring controls, 5-2 See also relative file path handling
run-time, 3-4 front panels, 3-12
run-time shortcut, 3-6 Perforce
static menus, 3-4 using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4
Microsoft Team System performance
using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4 checklist, 8-25
Microsoft Visual SourceSafe coercion and memory, 8-18
using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4 developing for, 6-58

Index
evaluating, 8-1 project libraries, 4-32

improving, 8-2 converting from project folders, 4-36
memory allocation, 8-14 creating, 4-35
memory reallocation buffers, 8-14 organizing, 4-38
problems, 8-13 setting access options, 4-36
fixing, 8-14 setting passwords, 4-37
identifying, 8-13 using sublibraries, 4-35
screen display, 8-19 projects, See LabVIEW projects
tests, 7-48 prototyping
VI Analyzer Toolkit, 8-5 See also design techniques
VI execution speed, 8-19 development models, 1-7
defer panel updates, 8-20 front panel prototyping, 3-15
input/output, 8-19 methods in LabVIEW, 1-8
screen display, 8-19 pull-down menus on front panel, 5-2
VI Metrics tool, 8-2
VI Performance Profiler, 8-13 Q
pictures
quality control
ring controls, 5-2
change control, 6-4
positioning
code reviews, 7-2
front panels, 3-10
configuration management, 6-2
positioning, front panels, 3-10
retrieving old versions of files, 6-3
Print dialog box
IEEE, A-2
printing documentation, 9-2
retrieving old versions of files, 6-3
procedural abstraction, 2-16
tracking changes, 6-3
producer/consumer (data) design pattern,
queued message handler design pattern, 4-5
4-10
requirements, 4-7
producer/consumer (events) design pattern,
4-13
queues, 4-13 R
synchronization, 4-13 ranges of values for controls, 3-13
Profile Performance and Memory window Rational ClearCase
using, 8-13 using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4
programming examples (NI resources), B-1 readable
project VIs, creating, 1-2
See also application reentrant VIs
analysis, 2-1 types of, 8-22
data structures, 4-51 using, 8-21
requirements, determining, 2-15 registering
scalable architecture, 4-2 user events, 4-14
software design, 4-1 relative file path handling, 10-2
user interface design, 3-1 reliability testing, 7-48
project conflicts, 4-42 removing
Project Explorer window, 4-27 items from projects, 4-32

Index
removing the course software, ix producer/consumer (events) design

repairing the course software, ix pattern, 4-13
requirements queued message handler design pattern,
abstracting components, 2-16 4-5
extracting nouns, 2-16 state machine design pattern, 4-4
extracting verbs, 2-19 timing, 6-35
organizing nouns, 2-18 user interface event handler design
organizing verbs, 2-20 pattern, 4-11
parsing verbs, 2-21 scalar data, 4-51
checklist, 2-7 enumerated type controls, 5-2
determining, 2-15 numeric, 5-3
developing, 2-6 ring controls, 5-2
document, 2-6 screen display
requirements for getting started, viii affect on performance, 8-19
resolving scroll bar controls, 3-9
project conflicts, 4-42 selecting
reviews source control provider, 6-4
code, 7-2 Serena Version Manager
revision history using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4
creating, 9-4 shared libraries, 10-12
numbers, 9-4 shared variable
ring controls, 5-2 documenting, 6-30
rings, front panel, 5-2 simple VI design pattern, 4-2
risk management, See spiral model sizing
run-time front panels, 3-10
shortcut menus, 3-6 software
run-time menus, 3-4 development, overview, 1-1
run-time shortcut menus development, practices, 1-3
customizing, 3-6 NI resources, B-1
software development map (figure), 1-1
software installation, course, ix
S software lifecycles, 1-4
scalable software quality standards
modules, 6-53 Institute of Electrical and Electronic
VIs, creating, 1-2 Engineers (IEEE), A-2
scalable architecture source code control tools
checklist, 6-12 previous versions of files, 6-3
choosing a, 4-2 source control
comparing, 4-23 change control, 6-4
implementing, 6-7 LabVIEW project settings, 6-5
initializing, 6-8 menu options, 6-5
master/slave design pattern, 4-8 quality control considerations, 6-2
producer/consumer (data) design pattern, selecting file operations, 6-5
4-10

Index
selecting third-party provider, 6-4 graphics, 3-3

tracking changes, 6-3 keyboard navigation, 3-13
source distributions, 10-12 labels, 3-11
specifications layout, 3-4
checklist, 2-3 paths, 3-12
evaluating, 2-2 ranges, 3-13
functional, 2-2 sizing and positioning, 3-10
non-functional, 2-2 strings, 3-12
speed of execution text, 3-2
optimizing, 8-19 hierarchical organization of files
spiral model, 1-9 directories, 6-34
split pane containers, 3-9 folders, 6-34
splitter bars, 3-9 naming VIs, VI libraries, and
stand-alone applications, 10-12 directories, 6-34
state machine icons, 5-11
design pattern, 4-4 subpanel controls, 3-8
infrastructure, 4-4 example, 3-8
static menus, 3-4 subVIs
application items, 3-5 documenting, 9-3
separators, 3-5 reentrant, 8-21
user items, 3-5 simultaneously calling, 8-21
stress tests, 7-48 support
strings, front panels, 3-12 technical, B-1
structures system
timed, 6-42 controls and indicators, 3-14
loop, 6-43 testing, 7-47
selecting timing source, 6-46 T
sequence, 6-42
tab controls, 3-7
setting priorities, 6-44 example, 3-7
setting timeout, 6-47 technical support, B-1
stub VIs, 7-7 test
style guidelines alpha, 7-49
block diagram, 6-26 beta, 7-49
sizing, 6-26 testing
speed optimization, 6-58 boundary conditions, 7-4
wiring techniques, 6-26 checklist, 7-5, 7-10
connector panes, 5-15 configuration, 7-47
documentation, 6-27 error, 7-4
front panels functionality, 7-3, 7-48
colors, 3-2 guidelines
default values, 3-13 integration testing, 7-5
fonts, 3-2 system testing, 7-47

Index
unit testing, 7-3 tree controls, 3-8

usability testing, 7-51 example, 3-9
hand checking, 7-4 troubleshooting (NI resources), B-1
implementing, 7-1
individual VIs, 7-3 U
integration, 7-5
unit test, 7-3
big-bang, 7-6
plan, 7-3
bottom-up, 7-8
unregistering
sandwich, 7-9
user events, 4-16
top-down, 7-7
usability
integration testing, 7-5
engineering techniques, 7-51
performance, 7-48
heuristics, 7-49
reliability, 7-48
testing, 7-49, 7-51
stress/load, 7-48
user documentation
system, 7-47
See documenting VIs
system testing, 7-47
See documenting applications
usability, 7-49, 7-51
user events
text
creating, 4-14
ring controls, 5-2
generating, 4-15
text style guidelines, 3-2
registering, 4-14
timing
unregistering, 4-16
user interface
execution, 6-35
See also front panels
functional global variable, 4-59, 6-39
data structures
software control, 6-37
arrays, 5-5
Event structure timeout, 6-41
checklist, 5-6
Get Date/Time in Seconds, 6-38
clusters, 5-5
synchronization timeout, 6-41
designing a, 3-1
timed structure, 6-42
event handler, 4-11
loop, 6-43
implementing, 5-1
scalar data, numerics, 5-3
selecting timing source, 6-46
using
sequence, 6-42
project libraries, 4-32
setting priorities, 6-44
setting timeout, 6-47
toolbars V
creating custom, 3-22 variant data
tracking changes, 6-3 handling, 6-10
tracking development, 9-4 using, 6-11
training (NI resources), B-2 VI Analyzer Toolkit, 8-5
transparent controls VI Hierarchy window, 4-25
creating, 3-24 VI Metrics tool, 8-2
transparent front panels, 3-10 VI Performance Profiler, 8-13

Index
viewing W
dependencies in projects, 4-31 waterfall model, 1-5
virtual folders, 4-30 modified, 1-7
VIs Web resources, B-1
describing, 9-5 wiring techniques, 6-26
hierarchical organization, 6-34
linking to help files, 9-5
maintainable, 6-53
Z
naming, 6-34 zip files, 10-12
scalable, 6-53
Visual SourceSafe
using with LabVIEW source control, 6-4

Course Evaluation
Course _______________________________________________________________________________________
Location _____________________________________________________________________________________
Instructor _________________________________________ Date ____________________________________
Student Information (optional)

Name ________________________________________________________________________________________
Company _________________________________________ Phone ___________________________________
Instructor
Please evaluate the instructor by checking the appropriate circle. Unsatisfactory Poor Satisfactory Good Excellent
Instructor’s ability to communicate course concepts ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Instructor’s knowledge of the subject matter ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Instructor’s presentation skills ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Instructor’s sensitivity to class needs ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Instructor’s preparation for the class ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Course
Training facility quality ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Training equipment quality ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Was the hardware set up correctly? ❍ Yes ❍ No
The course length was ❍ Too long ❍ Just right ❍ Too short
The detail of topics covered in the course was ❍ Too much ❍ Just right ❍ Not enough
The course material was clear and easy to follow. ❍ Yes ❍ No ❍ Sometimes
Did the course cover material as advertised? ❍ Yes ❍ No
I had the skills or knowledge I needed to attend this course. ❍ Yes ❍ No If no, how could you have been
better prepared for the course? ____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
What were the strong points of the course? __________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
What topics would you add to the course? ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
What part(s) of the course need to be condensed or removed? ____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
What needs to be added to the course to make it better? ________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
How did you benefit from taking this course? ________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Are there others at your company who have training needs? Please list. ____________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Do you have other training needs that we could assist you with? _________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
How did you hear about this course? ❍ NI Web site ❍ NI Sales Representative ❍ Mailing ❍ Co-worker
❍ Other _____________________________________________________________________________________

Labview Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices Course Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Labview Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices Course Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Labview Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices Course Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LabVIEW Intermediate I: TM

National Instruments Corporate Headquarters

© National Instruments Corporation iii LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

F. Choosing Data Types............................................................................................4-51

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual iv ni.com

© National Instruments Corporation v LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Thank you for purchasing the LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful

New User Experienced User Advanced User

Begin LabVIEW Basics I* LabVIEW Intermediate I* LabVIEW Advanced

Skills learned: Skills learned: Skills learned:

Certified LabVIEW Certified LabVIEW Certified LabVIEW

Skills tested: Skills tested: Skills tested:

© National Instruments Corporation vii LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

This course kit is designed to be completed in sequence. The course is

C. What You Need to Get Started

❑ Windows 2000 or later installed on your computer; this course is

❑ LabVIEW Professional Development System 8.6 or later

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual viii ni.com

❑ LabVIEW Intermediate I: Successful Development Practices course CD,

D. Installing the Course Software

Exercise files are located in the <Exercises>\LabVIEW

Repairing or Removing Course Material

© National Instruments Corporation ix LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

• Develop modular applications that are scalable, readable, and

This icon denotes a tip, which alerts you to advisory information.

This icon denotes a note, which alerts you to important information.

This icon denotes a caution, which advises you of precautions to take to

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual x ni.com

Design Implement Test Deploy

Analyze Implement the Implement the Implement the

Design the Implement Evaluate the Code Build and Deploy

Figure 1-1. Software Development Map

© National Instruments Corporation 1-1 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

A. Scalable, Readable, and Maintainable VIs

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual 1-2 ni.com

1 Poorly Designed 2 Well-Designed

Figure 1-2. Examples of Poorly Designed and Well-Designed Block Diagrams

Code that is difficult to read and difficult to understand is difficult to

B. Successful Development Practices

LabVIEW—A Programming Language

© National Instruments Corporation 1-3 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

Programmers have placed people in life-threatening positions in the past.

Although this discussion is theoretical, in practice consider all the steps

The lifecycle model is a foundation for the entire development process.

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual 1-4 ni.com

Code and Fix Model

Unfortunately, if you find major architectural problems late in the process,

The pure waterfall model consists of several non-overlapping stages, as

© National Instruments Corporation 1-5 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual 1-6 ni.com

Although the waterfall model has its weaknesses, it is instructive because it

Modified Waterfall Model

Prototyping is an effective tool for demonstrating how a design meets a set

© National Instruments Corporation 1-7 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual

LabVIEW Prototyping Methods

LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual 1-8 ni.com

Determine Objectives, Evaluate Alternatives

Plan Next Phase Develop and Test

© National Instruments Corporation 1-9 LabVIEW Intermediate I Course Manual